Mercedes - SL - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung 2315842500Z102 É2315842500Z102bËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 37 Introduction ......................................... 31 Safety ................................................... 49 Opening and closing ........................... 83 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 111 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 125 Climate control ................................. 139 Driving and parking .......................... 153 On-board computer and displays .... 227 COMAND Online ................................ 285 Stowing and features ....................... 543 Maintenance and care ...................... 561 Breakdown assistance ..................... 575 Wheels and tyres .............................. 595 Technical data ................................... 619 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 248 Function/notes ................................ 71 Important safety notes .................... 71 Warning lamp ................................. 275 Access data of the mobile phone network provider ...... 435, 437, 439, 440 Deleting ......................................... 440 Editing ........................................... 439 Making entries ............................... 437 Selecting ........................................ 435 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 148 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 142 Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus With spotlight function ................... 219 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 238 Display message ............................ 263 Function/notes ............................. 220 Active Body Control (AMG vehicles) Display message ............................ 260 Driving conditions menu in the COMAND display (AMG vehicles) ... 204 Function/notes ............................. 202 Active Body Control (except AMG vehicles) Display message ............................ 260 Driving conditions menu in the COMAND display ........................... 201 Function/notes ............................. 199 Active Driving Assistance package .. 220 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 238 Display message ............................ 263 Function/notes ............................. 223 Active light function ......................... 131 Active Parking Assist Display message ............................ 264 Function/notes ............................. 207 Important safety notes .................. 207 Active partition (USB mass storage devices only) Selecting ........................................ 478 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 77 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 73 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 199 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 257 Function/notes ............................. 132 Switching on/off ........................... 133 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 626 Address book .................... 412, 416, 417 Browsing ........................................ 412 Calling up ....................................... 412 Changing an entry .......................... 414 Connecting a call ........................... 415 Creating an entry ........................... 413 Deleting an entry ........................... 413 Deleting contacts ........................... 418 Details about an entry ................... 414 Entering characters ....................... 303 Entry as a home address ............... 368 Hiding contact details .................... 419 Importing contacts ........................ 417 Introduction ................................... 411 Receiving vCards ........................... 418 Searching for an entry ................... 413 Starting route guidance ................. 415 Voice tag ....................................... 416 Address entry menu .......................... 326 ...................................................... 326 Adjusting the balance ....................... 300 Adjusting the bass ............................ 300 Adjusting the brightness (TV, video) .................................................. 502 Adjusting the colour (TV, video) ...... 502 Adjusting the contrast (TV, video) ... 502 Adjusting the sound settings Balance .......................................... 300 Treble and bass ............................. 300 Adjusting the treble (sound) ............ 300 Index Adjusting the vehicle height Active Body Control (AMG vehicles) ............................................... 202 Active Body Control (except AMG vehicles) ........................................ 199 Adjusting the volume COMAND ....................................... 299 Navigation messages ..................... 299 Traffic announcements .................. 299 AIR FLOW ........................................... 144 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Glove compartment ....................... 150 Important safety notes .................. 150 Setting ........................................... 150 Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents ............................. 151 Setting the centre air vents ........... 150 Setting the side air vents ............... 150 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 117 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Headbag .......................................... 55 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 54 Important safety guidelines ............. 52 Sidebag ............................................ 54 Triggering ......................................... 51 AIRSCARF Switching on/off ........................... 117 AIRSCARF vents Setting the blower output .............. 151 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 79 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 79 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Alternate route .................................. 357 Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 241 Setting the colour (on-board computer) ............................................. 241 AMG Button for AMG menu .................... 168 SETUP ............................................ 168 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 244 Anti-glare film .................................... 559 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 181 Ashtray ............................................... 549 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 237 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 237 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 567 Hiding a service message .............. 567 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 567 Service message ............................ 566 Special service requirements ......... 567 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 79 Function ........................................... 79 Interior motion sensor ..................... 80 Switching off the alarm .................... 79 Tow-away protection ........................ 80 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 238 Display message ............................ 261 Function/notes ............................. 214 Audio Radio mode ................................... 462 Audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode Switching to (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ................................ 528 Audio DVD Pause function ............................... 474 Playback options ........................... 478 Safety notes .................................. 468 Setting the audio format ................ 478 Stop function ................................. 474 Switching to ................................... 472 Audio menu (COMAND Online) ......... 463 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 234 5 6 Index Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Automatic drive program ............... Changing gear ............................... Display message ............................ Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Engaging the park position ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Manual drive program (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............ Overview ........................................ Problem (fault) ............................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Transmission position display ........ Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... AUX (audio) Notes/socket ................................ Switching to ................................... AUX (video) Connecting an external video source ............................................ Setting the volume and sound ....... Showing/hiding the menu ............. Switching to ................................... AUX jacks ........................................... CD/DVD drive ............................... Avoiding an area ................................ B 257 159 159 127 167 169 167 269 167 173 164 167 169 170 163 173 167 158 163 157 169 165 166 173 500 500 516 517 517 517 521 521 379 Back button ....................................... 296 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 71 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 72 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 87 Important safety notes .................... 87 Replacing ......................................... 88 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 584 Display message ............................ 259 Important safety notes .................. 582 Jump starting ................................. 586 Overview ........................................ 582 Belt see Seat belts Belt force limiter Activation ......................................... 60 Function ........................................... 60 Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 51 Function ........................................... 60 Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 374 Blind Spot Assist see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® Activating audio mode ................... 491 Activating/deactivating ................. 313 Conditions (telephone) .................. 389 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 393 Connecting audio devices .............. 488 Device list ...................................... 489 Entering the passcode ................... 391 External authorisation .................... 392 General information ....................... 313 Interface ........................................ 388 Introduction ................................... 388 Reconnecting an audio device ....... 490 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 390 Settings ......................................... 313 Telephone basic menu ................... 394 Telephony ...................................... 389 Telephony notes ............................ 387 Bluetooth® audio basic display ....... 491 Index Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 562 Closing ........................................... 563 Display message ............................ 270 Important safety notes .................. 562 Opening ......................................... 563 Boot Emergency release .......................... 99 Important safety notes .................... 94 Locking separately ........................... 98 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 98 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 95 Opening/closing (from the outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) ............ 96 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 95 Overview .......................................... 94 Power closing .................................. 93 Boot lid Display message ............................ 270 Opening dimensions ...................... 629 Opening/closing .............................. 94 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 629 Boot separator Display message ............................ 271 Fitting ............................................ 106 General notes ................................ 105 Opening/closing ............................ 106 Removing ....................................... 106 Bottle holders .................................... 549 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 253 Notes ............................................. 627 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 73 Display message ............................ 256 Brakes ABS .................................................. 71 BAS .................................................. 71 BAS PLUS ........................................ 72 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 627 Display message ............................ 248 Driving tips .................................... 179 High-performance brake system .... Important safety notes .................. Parking brake ................................ Warning lamp ................................. Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away Buttons on the COMAND controller ........................................................ 180 179 176 275 296 C Call ...................................................... Accepting/ending/rejecting .......... Connecting .................................... see Telephone Call list Display details ............................... Call lists Deleting ......................................... Opening and selecting an entry ..... Saving an entry in the address book .............................................. Calling up a fault see Display messages Capacities (technical data) ............... Car see Vehicle Car key see Key Car wash (care) ................................. Care Automatic car wash ....................... Carpets .......................................... Display ........................................... Exhaust pipe .................................. Exterior lighting ............................. Gear or selector lever .................... High-pressure cleaner .................... Interior ........................................... Matt paintwork .............................. Night View Assist Plus ................... Notes ............................................. Paint .............................................. Plastic trim .................................... Reversing camera .......................... Roof lining ...................................... Seat belt ........................................ 397 396 397 406 407 405 406 622 568 568 574 572 572 571 573 569 572 570 572 568 570 573 572 574 574 7 8 Index Seat cover ..................................... 573 Sensors ......................................... 571 Steering wheel ............................... 573 Trim pieces .................................... 573 Washing by hand ........................... 569 Wheels ........................................... 570 Windows ........................................ 570 Wiper blades .................................. 571 Wooden trim .................................. 573 Category list (music search) ............ 481 CD Copy protection ............................. 480 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 476 General information ....................... 480 Inserting ........................................ 469 Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 528 Multisession .................................. 479 Notes on compact discs ................ 480 Pause function ............................... 474 Player/changer operation (COMAND) ..................................... 469 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 528 Safety notes .................................. 468 Selecting a media type .................. 474 Selecting a track ............................ 475 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ 299 Switching to ................................... 472 CD mode Playback options ........................... 478 CD player/CD changer(on-board computer) .......................................... 234 CD/DVD ..................................... 469, 470 Ejecting (DVD drive) ....................... 470 Ejecting (DVD single drive) ............ 469 Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 469 Inserting (DVD single drive) ........... 469 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 242 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 85 Centre console Lower section .................................. 45 Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 46 Upper section .................................. 44 Changing direction ............................ 352 Announcement phase .................... 352 Change of direction phase ............. 352 Preparation phase ......................... 352 Changing the character set .............. 307 Changing the picture format (TV, video) .................................................. 502 Character ........................................... 305 Changing the character set ............ 305 Changing the language .................. 304 Deleting ......................................... 305 Moving the cursor .......................... 305 Switching to letters ........................ 304 Characters ......................................... 305 Entering ......................................... 305 Entering (address book, phone book) ............................................. 303 Entering (navigation) ...................... 305 Charge maintenance socket ............ 552 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 63 ISOFIX .............................................. 64 On the front-passenger seat ............ 62 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70 Recommendations ........................... 67 Suitable positions ............................ 65 Children In the vehicle ................................... 61 Restraint systems ............................ 61 Cigarette lighter ................................ 550 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 571 Climate control Adjusting airflow (AIR FLOW) ......... 144 Controlling automatically ............... 144 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 148 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 142 Demisting the windows .................. 147 Demisting the windscreen ............. 146 Important safety notes .................. 140 Indicator lamp ................................ 144 Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. 141 Overview of systems ...................... 140 Index Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 148 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 144 Setting the air distribution ............. 145 Setting the air vents ...................... 150 Setting the airflow ......................... 146 Setting the temperature ................ 145 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 148 Switching on/off ........................... 142 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 149 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 147 Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 146 THERMOTRONIC (2-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 141 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 38 see Instrument cluster Collapsible emergency spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel COMAND control panel ..................... 294 ...................................................... 294 COMAND controller ........................... 296 COMAND display ............................... 293 Cleaning ......................................... 572 Cleaning instructions ..................... 293 Driving conditions menu (AMG vehicles) ........................................ 204 Driving conditions menu (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 201 Setting ........................................... 310 Switching on/off ........................... 293 COMAND Online ........................ 446, 461 Active multicontour seat ................ 319 Basic functions .............................. 298 Calling up drive status regulator (ABC) ............................................. 318 Display ........................................... 289 Emergency call system displays .... 432 Examples of operation ................... 296 Importing POIs ............................... 446 Menu overview .............................. 291 Multicontour seat .......................... 319 Seat functions ............................... 318 Settings ......................................... Switching on/off ........................... COMAND Online and Internet see Online and Internet functions Combination switch .......................... Compass function ............................. Connecting a USB device ................. Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... Contacts Deleting ......................................... Importing ....................................... Convenience closing feature ............ Convenience opening feature see Side windows Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Temperature (on-board computer) ............................................. Temperature gauge ........................ Warning lamp ................................. Cooling see Climate control Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... Copyright ............................................. Cornering light function Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Country-specific information (navigation) ............................................... Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... Deactivating ................................... Display message ............................ Driving system ............................... Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 461 298 129 381 472 231 418 417 101 148 565 258 627 244 228 281 480 36 255 131 382 135 182 184 265 182 182 182 183 184 183 9 10 Index Cup holder Centre console .............................. 548 Important safety notes .................. 548 D DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Selecting a station ......................... 464 see Radio Dashboard lighting see Instrument cluster lighting Data see Technical data Data carrier ................................ 479, 484 Audio DVD ..................................... 479 MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 484 Data modem mode Telephone with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ........................................... 423 Data roaming Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...................... 424 Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 257 Function/notes ............................. 127 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 239 Declarations of conformity ................. 33 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 241 Interior lighting .............................. 241 Delete button ..................................... 297 Destination ........................................ 370 Assigning a destination to an address book entry ........................ 370 Destination (navigation) Displaying information ................... 358 Entering a destination by address .. 326 Entering a destination using the map ............................................... 333 Entering a POI ................................ 338 Entering using geo-coordinates ..... 334 Entering using Mercedes-Benz Apps .............................................. 335 Saving ............................................ 369 Selecting from the destination memory ......................................... 332 Selecting from the list of last destinations ......................................... 333 Selecting storage options .............. 370 Storing after destination entry ....... 369 Storing during route guidance ....... 369 Destination memory (navigation) Deleting an entry ........................... 371 Entering/saving your home address .......................................... 330 Previous destinations .................... 372 Diagnostics connection ...................... 33 Dialling a number (telephone) .......... 397 Digital speedometer ......................... 232 Digital teletext (MHEG-5) .................. 508 Digital TV channels ........................... 506 Programme preview ....................... 506 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 255 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 126 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 240 Switching on/off ........................... 127 Disc CD/DVD ........................................ 480 MP3 ............................................... 479 DISC button Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode ............................................. 472 Activating Bluetooth® Audio ......... 492 Switching on the Media Interface .. 495 Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER ................................................ 484 Display Selecting the design ...................... 310 Display message Driving systems ............................. 260 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 272 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 566 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 247 Engine ............................................ 258 General information ....................... 247 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 247 Key ................................................ 272 Index Lights ............................................. 255 Safety systems .............................. 248 Tyres .............................................. 267 Vehicle ........................................... 269 Displaying the arrival time ............... 358 Displaying the distance to the destination ............................................... 358 Displaying the track and album ....... 478 Distance recorder see Trip meter Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 283 DISTRONIC PLUS Cruise control lever ....................... 186 Deactivating ................................... 192 Display message ............................ 264 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 191 Driving tips .................................... 192 Function/notes ............................. 185 Important safety notes .................. 185 Selecting ........................................ 187 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 190 Warning lamp ................................. 283 Dolby® Digital ................................... 300 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 242 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 92 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 85 Control panel ................................... 48 Display message ............................ 270 Emergency locking ........................... 93 Emergency unlocking ....................... 93 Important safety notes .................... 90 Opening (from the inside) ................ 91 Power closing .................................. 93 Doors Overview .......................................... 90 Draught stop Electrical draught stop ................... 108 Manual draught stop ...................... 107 Drive program Automatic ...................................... 169 Display ........................................... 165 Manual ........................................... 169 Manual (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............................... 170 Drive program selector ..................... 168 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 568 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 126 Driving on flooded roads .................. 181 Driving safety system BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 72 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 71 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 77 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 73 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 71 Electronic Brake-force Distribution .................................................. 76 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 73 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 73 Important safety guidelines ............. 70 Overview .......................................... 70 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................ 77 STEER CONTROL ............................. 78 Driving system Active Body Control (AMG vehicles) ............................................... 202 Active Body Control (except AMG vehicles) ........................................ 199 Adaptive Damping System ............. 199 Driving systems Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 220 Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 220 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 223 Active Parking Assist ..................... 207 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214 Cruise control ................................ 182 Display message ............................ 260 Distronic Plus ................................ 185 HOLD function ............................... 196 Night View Assist Plus ................... 217 PARKTRONIC ................................. 204 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 198 Reversing camera .......................... 211 Speed Limit Assist ......................... 215 11 12 Index SPEEDTRONIC ............................... Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... Aquaplaning ................................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Wet road surface ........................... DTMF tone transmission .................. DVD Copy protection ............................. Fast forward/fast rewind ............... Inserting ........................................ Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. Notes on discs ............................... Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. Selecting a media type .................. Selecting a track ............................ Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ DVD audio Operating (on-board computer) ..... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... Rear Seat Entertainment System ... Dynamic route guidance/TMC Displaying traffic reports ............... Displays on the map ...................... Introduction ................................... Switching on/off ........................... 193 180 181 167 179 192 179 126 181 181 181 178 178 181 180 180 154 599 126 180 398 480 476 469 528 480 528 474 475 299 234 235 535 365 365 364 364 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 243 Function/notes ............................. 118 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 119 Function/notes ............................. 118 Switching on/off ........................... 243 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 250 Function/notes ................................ 76 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 178 On-board computer ....................... 232 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 159 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 159 Deactivating/activating ................. 160 General information ....................... 159 Important safety notes .................. 158 Introduction ................................... 158 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 33 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency call 999 or 112 .............. 389 Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 93 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 86 Locking vehicle ................................ 93 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 93 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 614 Important safety notes .................. 614 Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ............................................. 615 Removing ....................................... 615 Technical data ............................... 617 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ............................................. 93 Engine Display message ............................ 258 Index ECO start/stop function ................ 158 Engine number ............................... 622 Jump-starting ................................. 586 Running irregularly ......................... 162 Starting problems .......................... 162 Starting the engine with the key .... 157 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 157 Stopping ........................................ 176 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 591 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 280 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 620 Problem (fault) ............................... 162 Engine jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Engine oil Additives ........................................ 626 Checking the oil level ..................... 564 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 564 Display message ............................ 259 Filling capacity ............................... 626 Notes about oil grades ................... 626 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 564 Temperature (on-board computer) ............................................. 244 Topping up ..................................... 564 Viscosity ........................................ 626 Entering a junction name ................. 330 Entering a street name ..................... 327 Entering an address (example) ........ 326 Entering the house number .............. 327 Entering the town .............................. 327 Entry ........................................... 304, 307 Deleting ......................................... 307 Saving ............................................ 304 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 31 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 244 Characteristics ................................. 74 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 75 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 74 Display message ............................ 248 ETS .................................................. 73 Function/notes ................................ 73 General notes .................................. 73 Important safety guidelines ............. 74 Warning lamp ................................. 277 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 73 Example display ........................ 473, 484 Audio CD mode .............................. 473 MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 484 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 572 Exterior lighting Settings options ............................. 126 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 120 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 121 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 243 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 121 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 121 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 121 Parking position ............................. 122 Resetting ....................................... 121 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 123 F Factory setting (reset function) ....... Fast forward Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... Video DVD ..................................... Fast rewind Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... Video DVD ..................................... Fault message see Display messages Favourites (Internet) ......................... Favourites button .............................. Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... First-aid kit ......................................... Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... Lowering the vehicle ...................... 316 476 513 476 513 459 313 577 576 609 609 13 14 Index Preparing the vehicle ..................... 606 Raising the vehicle ......................... 607 Removing a wheel .......................... 608 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 606 Flat tyre MOExtended tyres ......................... 578 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 578 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 579 see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. 558 Foglamps Extended range .............................. 132 Frequencies Garage door opener ....................... 555 Mobile phone ................................. 620 Two-way radio ................................ 620 Frequency Adjusting for radio stations ............ 466 Front-passenger seat Adjusting from the driver's seat ..... 114 Fuel Additives ........................................ 625 Consumption information .............. 625 Consumption statistics .................. 231 Displaying consumption ................. 317 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 232 Displaying the range ...................... 232 Driving tips .................................... 178 E10 ................................................ 624 Fuel gauge ....................................... 40 Grade (petrol) ................................ 624 Important safety notes .................. 623 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 624 Problem (malfunction) ................... 175 Refuelling ....................................... 173 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 623 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 174 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 232 Gauge .............................................. 40 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 623 Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Dashboard fuse box ....................... Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Fuse box in the rear compartment .. Important safety notes .................. 175 577 592 592 592 593 593 592 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 555 Frequencies ................................... 555 General notes ................................ 553 Important safety notes .................. 553 Opening/closing the garage door .. 555 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 553 Gear indicator (on-board computer) .................................................. 244 Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 244 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 31 Glass roof (sunblind) ......................... 109 Glove compartment .......................... 544 Google™ local search Importing a destination/route ....... 443 Popular searches ........................... 444 Search ........................................... 442 Search history ............................... 444 Selecting a search position ............ 442 Using as the destination ................ 443 GPS reception .................................... 323 Gracenote® Media Database ........... 476 H Handbrake see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 96 Hands-free microphone, switching on/off ................................................. 398 Index Harman/kardon® Logic 7® surround sound system see Surround sound (harman/ kardon® surround sound system) Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 272 Switching on/off ........................... 130 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 117 Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... 115 see NECK-PRO head restraints Headbag Display message ............................ 255 Operation ......................................... 55 Heading up (navigation) ................... 374 Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ 131 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 628 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 133 Topping up the cleaning system .... 566 see Automatic headlamp mode Headphones Changing batteries ........................ 523 Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 569 Hill start assist .................................. 158 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 197 Deactivating ................................... 197 Display message ............................ 262 Function/notes ............................. 196 Home address ........................... 330, 332 Entering and saving ....................... 330 Selecting from the destination memory ......................................... 332 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 79 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 281 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 283 Engine diagnostics ......................... 280 SPORT handling mode ................... 278 Indicator lamp ................................... 523 Remote control .............................. 523 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 256 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 40 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 42 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 228 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 240 Display message ............................ 257 Overview ........................................ 131 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left .. 240 Interface (USB, iPod®) see Media Interface Interior lighting ................................. 134 Automatic control system .............. 134 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 241 Emergency lighting ........................ 135 Manual control ............................... 135 Overview ........................................ 134 Reading lamp ................................. 134 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 241 Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 241 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 81 Function ........................................... 80 Priming ............................................ 80 Switching off .................................... 81 Internet ...................... 454, 457, 458, 459, 460 Calling up the carousel view .......... 454 Conditions for access .................... 432 Creating a favourite ....................... 459 Entering the URL ............................ 454 Favourites manager ....................... 459 Favourites menu ............................ 460 Menu functions .............................. 457 Opening favourites ......................... 458 15 16 Index Selecting favourites ....................... 455 Selecting/setting access data ....... 434 Internet radio Calling up ....................................... 454 Searching for stations .................... 454 iPod® ................................. 494, 497, 498 Alphabetic track selection ............. 498 Connecting to Media Interface ...... 494 Selecting a category/playlist ......... 497 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 64 iTunes® .............................................. 498 J Jack Storage location ............................ 577 Using ............................................. 607 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 586 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 88 Checking the battery ....................... 87 Convenience opening feature ........ 101 Display message ............................ 272 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 85 Emergency key element ................... 86 Important safety notes .................... 84 Loss ................................................. 89 Modifying the programming ............. 86 Opening/closing the roof .............. 105 Overview .......................................... 84 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 155 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89 Starting the engine ........................ 157 Key positions Key ................................................ 155 KEYLESS GO .................................. 155 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ...................... 101 Display message ............................ 272 Locking ............................................ 85 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 156 Start/Stop button .......................... 155 Starting the engine ........................ 157 Unlocking ......................................... 85 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 167 Manual drive program .................... 171 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane recommendations .................... Explanation .................................... Presentation .................................. Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light sensor (display message) ....... Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... Active light function ....................... Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Foglamps (extended range) ........... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Light switch ................................... Main-beam headlamps ................... Misted up headlamps .................... Motorway mode ............................. Parking lamps ................................ Rear foglamp ................................. Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ Side lamps ..................................... Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ Switching the spotlight on/off ....... 353 353 353 245 256 257 240 241 131 127 131 127 126 132 130 130 126 130 133 132 129 128 241 241 128 239 241 240 Index Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 241 Turn signals ................................... 129 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 182 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 194 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC LINGUATRONIC .................................. 312 Settings ......................................... 312 List of access data ............................ 437 New provider ................................. 437 List of mobile phone network providers ......................................... 434, 435 Calling up ....................................... 434 Empty ............................................ 434 With the selected provider ............. 435 Load/eject button ............................. 469 Loading aid (boot) Raising/lowering the roof .............. 546 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 92 Emergency locking ........................... 93 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 92 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 242 Luggage cover see Boot separator Lumbar support Adjusting (COMAND Online) .......... 319 M M+S tyres ........................................... MAGIC SKY CONTROL ....................... Main-beam headlamps Display message ............................ Switching on/off ........................... Map (navigation) Adjusting the scale ........................ 598 109 256 130 372 Arrival time/distance to the destination .......................................... 375 City model ..................................... 376 Geo-coordinate display .................. 375 Heading ......................................... 374 Information in the display .............. 375 Map settings .................................. 373 Moving ........................................... 373 North orientation ........................... 374 Notes ............................................. 372 POI symbols ................................... 374 RDS-TMC displays ......................... 365 Road display .................................. 375 Saving the crosshair position ......... 373 Showing the map data version ....... 382 Topographical map ........................ 376 Updating ........................................ 382 Updating process ........................... 383 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 570 Media Interfac e ........................... 494, 495, 496, 497, 499 Alphabetical track selection .......... 498 Basic menu .................................... 495 Connecting an external audio source ............................................ 494 Connecting an external video source ............................................ 516 Connection options ....................... 494 iPod® ............................................ 494 Mode ............................................. 494 MP3 player .................................... 494 Notes for the MP3 player ............... 499 Playback options ........................... 499 Selecting categories ...................... 497 Selecting folders ............................ 497 Selecting music files ...................... 496 Selecting playlists .......................... 497 Switching on .................................. 495 USB mass storage device .............. 494 see Separate operating instructions Media list ........................................... 474 Memory card (audio) ......................... 234 Memory function ............................... 123 Mercedes-Benz Contact .................... 427 17 18 Index Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call ............. 430 Conditions ..................................... 429 Displays in the COMAND display ... 432 Manual emergency call .................. 431 Overview ........................................ 429 Service availability in Europe ......... 429 Transmitted data ........................... 431 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 247 Messages see Display messages Microphone, switching on/off ......... 398 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mobile phone ............................. 390, 391 Authorising .................................... 391 Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 390 Connecting the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ........ 421 De-authorising ............................... 393 Disconnecting the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ........................................... 426 External authorisation .................... 392 Frequencies ................................... 620 Installation ..................................... 620 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 235 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 551 Registering (authorising) ................ 391 Transmission output (maximum) .... 620 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 86 MOExtended tyres ............................. 578 Motorway information ...................... 376 Motorway mode ................................ 132 MP3 Bit/sampling rates ......................... 480 Copyright ....................................... 480 Disc ............................................... 479 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 476 File systems ................................... 479 Formats ......................................... 479 Notes ............................................. 479 Operating ....................................... 234 Pause function ............................... 474 Playback options ........................... 478 Safety notes .................................. 468 Selecting a media type .................. 474 Selecting a track ............................ 475 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ 299 Switching to ................................... 472 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 230 Permanent display ......................... 239 Multifunction steering wheel Adjusting the volume ..................... 299 Operating the on-board computer .. 229 Overview .......................................... 43 Selecting a TV channel .................. 504 Multisession CD ................................ 479 MUSIC REGISTER ............................. 484, 485, 486, 487 Copying music data ....................... 485 Deleting all music files ................... 486 Deleting individual music files ....... 487 General notes ................................ 484 Memory space info ........................ 486 Playback options ........................... 487 Switching on .................................. 484 Music search ..................................... 481 My address ........................................ 368 N Navigation Adjusting the volume of the navigation announcements .................. Alternative route ............................ Avoiding an area ............................ Basic settings ................................ Blocking a route section affected by a traffic jam ............................... Compass function .......................... Destination memory ...................... Destination/route download ......... Displaying destination information (arrival time, distance to destination) ......................................... 299 357 379 325 357 381 368 444 358 Index Dynamic route guidance/Live Traffic Information ......................... 363 Dynamic route guidance/TMC ....... 363 Entering a destination .................... 326 Entering a destination by address .. 326 Entering a destination using the map ............................................... 333 Entering a POI ................................ 338 Entering characters (character bar) ................................................ 305 Entering/saving your home address .......................................... 330 General notes ................................ 323 GPS reception ................................ 323 Important safety notes .................. 323 Lane recommendation ................... 353 List of areas ................................... 380 Map settings .................................. 372 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233 Motorway information ................... 376 Off-road/off-map (off-road destination) ........................................... 362 Previous destinations .................... 371 Repeating announcements ............ 355 Route guidance .............................. 351 Selecting a destination from the destination memory ....................... 332 Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations ................... 333 Selecting your home address ........ 332 Setting options for destination/ route download .............................. 452 Setting route options (avoiding: motorways, toll roads, tunnels, ferries) ........................................... 325 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................ 325 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 324 Starting route calculation .............. 329 Switching announcements on/ off .................................................. 355 Switching on .................................. 324 Navigation announcements ............. 299 Switching off .................................. 299 NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 57 Resetting after being triggered ........ 57 Network provider Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...................... Night View Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ................. Cleaning ......................................... Display message ............................ Function/notes ............................. Problem (fault) ............................... Showing the image on the COMAND display ........................... Switching automatic activation on/off ............................................ North orientation (navigation) ......... Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 424 218 572 262 217 220 322 322 374 154 O Occupant safety Airbags ............................................ 52 Important safety notes .................... 50 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 56 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) ................................................. 51 Odometer see Trip meter Off-map .............................................. 363 Off-road .............................................. 362 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 244 Assistance menu ........................... 237 Audio menu ................................... 234 Convenience submenu .................. 243 Display messages .......................... 247 Displaying a service message ........ 567 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191 Factory setting submenu ............... 244 Important safety notes .................. 228 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 239 Light submenu ............................... 239 Menu overview .............................. 231 Message memory .......................... 247 Navigation menu ............................ 233 Operating the TV ............................ 235 Operating video DVD ..................... 235 19 20 Index Operation ....................................... 229 RACETIMER ................................... 245 Service menu ................................. 238 Settings menu ............................... 239 Standard display ............................ 231 Telephone menu ............................ 235 Trip menu ...................................... 231 Vehicle submenu ........................... 242 Online and Internet functions Ending the connection ................... 441 Establishing/ending the connection ................................................ 440 Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 453 Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider .............................................. 437 Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 453 Options menu ................................ 450 Resetting adjustments ................... 452 Selecting options for the local search ............................................ 450 Selecting options for the weather display ........................................... 451 Selecting the access data of the mobile phone network provider ..... 435 Setting options for destination/ route download .............................. 452 Specifying the ID for the download ............................................... 452 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 32 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 33 Important safety note ...................... 32 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 229 Overhead control panel ...................... 47 P Paint code .......................................... 622 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 570 Panic alarm .......................................... 50 Parking ............................................... 175 Engaging park position .................. 164 Important safety notes .................. 175 Parking brake ................................ 176 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 122 Reversing camera .......................... 211 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 207 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 251 Electric parking brake .................... 176 Warning lamp ................................. 280 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 257 Switching on/off ........................... 129 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 206 Driving system ............................... 204 Function/notes ............................. 204 Important safety notes .................. 204 Problem (fault) ............................... 207 Sensor range ................................. 205 Warning display ............................. 205 PASS AIRBAG OFF see PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Indicator lamp .................................. 63 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70 Pause function Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 474 Video DVD ..................................... 513 Personal POIs Acoustic notification ...................... 345 Calling up the menu ....................... 344 Personal special destination ............ 347 Selecting as the destination .......... 347 Personal special destinations ................................... 344, 345, 346 Displaying on the map ................... 344 Managing categories ..................... 345 Saving ............................................ 346 Settings ......................................... 344 Visual information .......................... 344 Petrol .................................................. 624 Index Phone book ........................................ 402 Adding a number to an address book entry ..................................... 404 Calling up ....................................... 401 Creating a new entry ..................... 404 Deleting an entry ........................... 403 Entering characters ....................... 303 Searching for an entry ................... 402 Symbol overview ............................ 402 Phone number transmission Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...................... 423 Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 502 Picture viewer Displaying pictures ........................ 518 Introduction ................................... 517 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 573 Playback options Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 478 POI (navigation) Category ........................................ 341 Defining the position for the POI search ............................................ 340 Entering ......................................... 338 Entering a POI using the map ........ 343 List ................................................. 341 POI icon .............................................. 374 Setting ........................................... 374 POIs (navigation) see Personal POIs Power closing ...................................... 93 Power socket Boot ............................................... 551 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 56 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 254 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 238 Display message ............................ 254 Function/notes ................................ 77 Warning lamp ................................. 283 Previous destinations (navigation) .. 371 Program selector button .................. 167 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 31 Pulling away (automatic transmission) .................................................... 158 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 34 R RACE START important safety notes ................... 198 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 245 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 242 Display message ............................ 262 Radio Alphabetical browser ..................... 464 Overview ........................................ 462 RDS (Radio Data System) .............. 467 Selecting a station ......................... 234 Setting a station ............................ 464 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ 299 Storing stations ............................. 466 Switching on .................................. 462 Switching wavebands .................... 464 Traffic Programme ......................... 467 Radio station ..................................... 466 Storing ........................................... 466 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 33 RDS (Radio Data System) General notes ................................ 467 Switching on/off ........................... 467 Read-aloud function .......................... 367 Automatic ...................................... 367 Reading lamp ..................................... 134 Rear foglamp Display message ............................ 256 Switching on/off ........................... 128 Rear lamps see Lights Rear Seat Entertainment Active COMAND source ................. 539 21 22 Index Adjusting sound settings ............... 525 Adjusting the brightness ................ 526 Adjusting the colour ...................... 526 Adjusting the contrast ................... 526 AUX mode ...................................... 541 CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 527 Changing the batteries .................. 523 Changing the picture format .......... 526 Cordless headphones .................... 522 Multiple users ................................ 525 Operating with the headphones ..... 525 Picture settings .............................. 526 System settings ............................. 526 TV mode ........................................ 531 Using the main loudspeaker .......... 525 Video DVD mode ........................... 535 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 148 Switching on/off ........................... 147 Rear-compartment screens .............. 520 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 121 Dipping (manual) ........................... 120 Receiving vCards ............................... 418 Redialling (telephone) ....................... 397 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 40 Important safety notes .................. 173 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 624 Refuelling process ......................... 174 see Fuel Remote control Button lighting ............................... 521 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 553 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 520 Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 135 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 260 Warning lamp ................................. 280 Reset function ................................... 316 Resetting (factory settings) ............. 316 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 149 Restraint system see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rev counter ........................................ 229 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 163 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 572 Displaying the image ..................... 322 Function/notes ............................. 211 Switching on/off ........................... 212 Reversing feature Side windows ................................... 99 Reversing function Boot lid ............................................ 94 Reversing lamp (display message) .. 257 Roll bar Display message ............................ 254 Operation ......................................... 55 Roller sunblind .................................. 109 Roof Display message ............................ 271 Important safety notes .................. 103 Opening/closing (with key) ........... 105 Opening/closing (with roof switch) ........................................... 104 Overview ........................................ 103 Problem (malfunction) ................... 110 Relocking ....................................... 105 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 574 Roof switch ........................................ 104 Route .................................................. 358 Estimated time of arrival ................ 358 Route (navigation) Calling up the "Routes" menu ........ 360 Displaying the distance to the destination .......................................... 358 Recording ...................................... 360 Route overview .............................. 359 Selecting an alternative route ........ 357 Setting route options (avoiding: motorways, toll roads, tunnels, ferries) ........................................... 325 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................ 325 Starting calculation ........................ 329 Index Route demonstration ........................ Route guidance .................................. Cancel ........................................... Continue ........................................ Destination reached ...................... General information ....................... Lane recommendations ................. Off-road ......................................... 359 353 356 356 357 351 353 362 S Safety Child restraint systems .................... 61 Safety notes .............................. 468, 511 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 468 Using the telephone ....................... 387 Video DVD mode ........................... 511 Safety system see Driving safety systems Saving the crosshair position .......... 373 Screen ................................................ 520 Selecting for remote operation ...... 520 SD memory card Ejecting .......................................... 472 Inserting ........................................ 472 Seat Balance (seat heating) ................... 320 Resetting adjustments ................... 322 Seat functions (COMAND Online) .. 318 Selecting for adjustment (COMAND Online) .......................... 319 Seat belt Seat belt guide ............................... 115 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 243 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 59 Belt force limiter .............................. 60 Belt tensioner .................................. 60 Cleaning ......................................... 574 Fastening ......................................... 59 Important safety guidelines ............. 57 Releasing ......................................... 59 Warning lamp ................................. 274 Warning lamp (function) ................... 60 Seats Active multicontour seat ................ 319 Adjusting (electrically) ................... Adjusting lumbar support (COMAND Online) .......................... Adjusting the head restraint .......... Belt guide ...................................... Cleaning the cover ......................... Correct driver's seat position ........ Important safety notes .................. Multicontour seat .......................... Overview ........................................ Seat heating problem .................... Seat ventilation problem ................ Sliding forward/back ..................... Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... Switching seat heating on/off ....... Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. Selecting channels TV .................................................. Selecting the country ....................... Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... Positions ........................................ Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... Service see ASSYST PLUS Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. Service products Brake fluid ..................................... Coolant (engine) ............................ Engine oil ....................................... Fuel ................................................ Important safety notes .................. Washer fluid ................................... Setting the air distribution ............... Setting the airflow ............................ Setting the audio format Audio DVD ..................................... Rear Seat Entertainment System ... Video DVD ..................................... Setting the date format .................... Setting the day design ...................... Setting the language COMAND ....................................... 114 319 115 115 573 112 113 319 113 117 117 115 123 117 116 117 503 327 573 163 571 238 627 627 626 623 622 628 145 146 478 539 515 311 310 313 23 24 Index Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 539 Setting the night design ................... 310 Setting the read-aloud speed ........... 312 Setting the reception region (TV) Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 534 Setting the volume Telephone calls .............................. 299 Video-AUX ..................................... 517 Settings Basic TV settings ........................... 507 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 244 Menu overview .............................. 291 On-board computer ....................... 239 Picture (COMAND) ......................... 502 Ringtone telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ............... 423 Sound settings ............................... 299 Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...................... 423 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 244 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 128 Side windows Convenience closing ...................... 101 Important safety notes .................... 99 Opening/closing (front) ................. 100 Opening/closing (rear) .................. 100 Opening/closing all ....................... 100 Overview .......................................... 99 Problem (malfunction) ................... 103 Resetting ....................................... 102 Sidebag ................................................ 54 SIM card Inserting ........................................ 421 Removing ....................................... 421 SIM card mode Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...................... 421 Snow chains ...................................... 599 Socket Charge maintenance socket .......... 552 Front-passenger footwell ............... 550 Under the armrest ......................... 551 Sockets General notes ................................ 550 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 298 Sound menu ....................................... 299 Sound Modus ..................................... 302 Sound settings Calling up the sound menu ............ 299 Surround sound ............................. 300 Special destination list ..................... 342 With character bar ......................... 342 Specialist workshop ............................ 34 Spectacles compartment ................. 545 Speed dial list .................................... 407 Storing a phone book entry in the speed dial list ................................ 407 Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 237 Display message ............................ 262 Display message in the multifunction display .................................... 216 Function/notes ............................. 215 Important safety notes .................. 215 Notes (navigation) ......................... 378 Speed limit assistant ........................ 378 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Digital ............................................ 232 In the Instrument cluster ................. 40 Segments ...................................... 229 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 239 SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 196 Display message ............................ 265 Function/notes ............................. 193 Important safety notes .................. 194 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 194 Permanent ..................................... 196 Selecting ........................................ 195 Storing the current speed .............. 195 Variable ......................................... 194 SPLITVIEW ......................................... 308 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 75 Warning lamp ................................. 278 Index SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Display message ............................ 255 Introduction ..................................... 51 Warning lamp ................................. 280 Warning lamp (function) ................... 51 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 157 Station list ......................................... 464 Station pre-sets ................................. 465 Station search ................................... 465 STEER CONTROL .................................. 78 Steering (display message) .............. 271 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 118 Button overview ............................... 43 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 229 Cleaning ......................................... 573 Gearshift paddles ........................... 169 Important safety notes .................. 118 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 123 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 169 Stop function Audio DVD ..................................... 474 Video DVD ..................................... 513 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 245 Storing channels TV .................................................. 505 Storing stations Radio ............................................. 466 Stowage areas ................................... 544 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 545 Centre console .............................. 545 Centre console (rear) ..................... 546 Cup holder ..................................... 548 Glove compartment ....................... 544 Important safety information ......... 544 Rear ............................................... 546 Spectacles compartment ............... 545 Stowage net ....................................... 546 Stowage space Display message ............................ 271 Stowage net ................................... 546 Umbrella holder ............................. 545 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... Street View ........................................ Summer tyres .................................... Sun visor ............................................ Supplemental Restraint System see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. Surround sound ................................. Surround sound (harman/ kardon® surround sound system) Notes ............................................. Switching on/off ........................... Suspension tuning Active Body Control (AMG vehicles) ............................................... Active Body Control (except AMG vehicles) ........................................ SETUP (on-board computer) .......... Switching between summer and standard time .................................... Switching wavelength (radio) .......... System settings Bluetooth® .................................... Date ............................................... Language ....................................... LINGUATRONIC (voice control) ...... Text reader speed .......................... Time ............................................... Time zone ...................................... 548 335 598 549 241 300 300 301 203 200 244 311 464 313 311 313 312 312 311 311 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ 256 see Lights Tank see Fuel tank Technical data Capacities ...................................... 622 Emergency spare wheel ................. 617 Information .................................... 620 Tyres/wheels ................................. 610 Vehicle data ................................... 629 Telephone .................................. 397, 399 Accepting a call ............................. 236 25 26 Index Accepting or rejecting a waiting call ................................................. Accepting/ending call ................... Adjusting the volume for calls ....... Automatically reconnecting mobile phone ................................. Calling (outgoing call) .................... Conference connection .................. Connecting a Mobile phone (general information) ............................ Deregistering (de-authorising) a mobile phone ................................. Display message ............................ Ending an active call ...................... Entering a number ......................... Entering phone numbers ................ External authorisation (Bluetooth®) .......................................... Function restrictions ...................... General notes ................................ Incoming call ................................. Making a call ................................. Making a call via speed dial ........... Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Operating options .......................... Overview of functions .................... Reception and transmission volume ............................................... Redialling ....................................... Rejecting a call .............................. Rejecting/ending a call ................. Safety notes .................................. Sending DTMF tones ...................... Single call ...................................... Switching hands-free microphone on/off ............................................ Telephone compartment ................ Text message (SMS) ...................... Toggling ......................................... Using the telephone ....................... see Bluetooth® Telephone basic menu ...................... Bluetooth® interface ..................... Telephone mode Redialling ....................................... 399 396 299 393 397 400 390 393 271 400 397 397 392 388 387 396 399 397 235 236 388 398 396 236 396 236 387 398 398 398 545 409 400 396 394 394 397 Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) Activating the module .................... Call lists ......................................... Charging a mobile phone ............... Connecting the mobile phone ........ Data modem mode ........................ Data roaming ................................. Deactivating the module ................ Disconnecting the mobile phone ... Installing the module ..................... Network provider ........................... Phone number transmission .......... Removing the module .................... Resetting the module ..................... Saving/deleting the PIN for the SIM card ........................................ Setting the ringtone ....................... Settings ......................................... SIM card mode .............................. Speed-dial keys ............................. Text messages ............................... Transferring the phone book .......... Telephone number Entering ......................................... Teletext TV (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... Teletext (TV) ...................................... Temperature Coolant .......................................... Coolant (on-board computer) ......... Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... Outside temperature ...................... Setting (climate control) ................ TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. Text message (SMS) Call sender .................................... Deleting ......................................... Inbox .............................................. Reading .......................................... Reading aloud ................................ Storing sender in address book ..... Storing the sender as a new address book entry ........................ 420 425 426 421 423 424 427 426 420 424 423 427 426 423 423 423 421 425 425 424 397 535 508 228 244 244 229 145 182 410 411 409 410 410 411 411 Index Text messages Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ...................... 425 Text messages (SMS) Notes and requirements ................ 409 Theft-deterrent system ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79 Immobiliser ...................................... 79 Time Setting ........................................... 312 Setting summer/standard time ..... 311 Setting the format ......................... 311 Setting the time ............................. 311 Setting the time manually .............. 311 Setting the time zone ..................... 311 Setting the time/date format ........ 311 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 245 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 579 TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Displays on the map ...................... 365 Switching dynamic route guidance on/off ................................... 364 Tone settings ..................................... 300 Balance and fader .......................... 300 Total distance recorder .................... 231 Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 80 Deactivating ..................................... 80 Function ........................................... 80 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 591 Important safety notes .................. 588 Towing Important safety notes .................. 588 With the rear axle raised ................ 590 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 589 Removing the towing eye ............... 590 With both axles on the ground ....... 591 Track Selecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 475 Selecting using the number keypad ................................................ 475 Track information .............................. 530 Traffic Announcement (TA) Interrupting .................................... 468 Notes ............................................. 467 Switching on/off ........................... 467 Traffic jam function ........................... 357 Traffic jam icon .................................. 365 Showing on route ........................... 365 Traffic jam message .......................... 367 Reading out on route ..................... 367 Traffic jams ........................................ 365 Showing in the map ....................... 365 Traffic Message Channel see TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Traffic messages see Dynamic route guidance/TMC Traffic Programme (TA) Switching off .................................. 299 Traffic reports ........................... 365, 367 Reading out on route ..................... 367 Real-time traffic news .................... 366 Showing in the map ....................... 365 Showing on route ........................... 365 Traffic symbol information ............. 365 Transmission Selector lever ................................ 163 see Automatic transmission Transporting the vehicle .................. 591 Travel guide Activating/deactivating data ......... 348 Calling up ....................................... 349 Choosing topics ............................. 350 Exploring a destination or route ..... 350 Selecting a destination or route on the map ......................................... 350 ViaMichelin .................................... 348 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 573 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 231 Trip meter Calling up ....................................... 231 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 232 True Image™ ...................................... 302 Turn signals Switching on/off ........................... 129 TV Alphabetical browser ..................... 506 Automatic picture shutoff .............. 501 Digital teletext (MHEG-5) ............... 508 Fixing a channel ............................. 507 27 28 Index Further options .............................. Information about the current programme ......................................... Operating (on-board computer) ..... Picture settings .............................. Programme preview ....................... Reception quality ........................... Selecting channels (COMAND Online) ........................................... Selecting channels (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. Selecting language and subtitles ... Setting the reception region .......... Showing/hiding the menu ............. Showing/hiding the navigation menu ............................................. Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) ............................................ Storing channels (COMAND Online) ........................................... Storing channels (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. Switching on .................................. Teletext .......................................... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. 509 506 235 502 506 502 503 532 509 507 503 503 299 505 533 502 508 620 620 620 602 267 602 581 581 600 601 601 601 603 602 602 602 Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. M+S tyres ...................................... MOExtended tyres ......................... Overview ........................................ Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Summer tyres ................................ Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... Wheel and tyre combinations ........ see Flat tyre 605 604 284 604 605 597 605 267 596 598 598 596 605 597 606 598 610 597 612 U Umbrella holder ................................. 545 Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 93 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 92 Updating the digital map .................. 382 USB see Media Interface V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 549 Variable SPEEDTRONIC see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 34 Data acquisition ....................... 35, 287 Display message ............................ 269 Electronics ..................................... 620 Equipment ....................................... 32 Implied warranty .............................. 35 Individual settings .......................... 239 Leaving parked up ......................... 178 Index Locking (in an emergency) ............... 93 Locking (key) ................................... 85 Lowering ........................................ 609 Pulling away ................................... 158 Raising ........................................... 607 Registration ..................................... 34 Securing from rolling away ............ 606 Tow-starting ................................... 588 Towing away .................................. 588 Transporting .................................. 591 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 93 Unlocking (key) ................................ 85 Vehicle data ................................... 629 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data ....................................... 629 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 629 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 93 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 622 Vehicle level Active Body Control (AMG vehicles) ............................................... 202 Active Body Control (except AMG vehicles) ........................................ 199 Display message ............................ 260 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 577 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 235 see Video DVD Video DVD .......................................... 514 Automatic picture shutoff .............. 501 Data carrier .................................... 511 DVD menu ..................................... 514 Fast forward/rewind ...................... 513 Function restrictions ...................... 511 Interactive content ........................ 516 Operation ....................................... 511 Pause function ............................... 513 Playing conditions .......................... 511 Safety notes .................................. 511 Selecting ........................................ 514 Selecting a film/title ...................... 514 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 513 Setting the audio format ................ 515 Setting the language ...................... 515 Setting the picture ......................... Showing/hiding the menu ............. Showing/hiding the navigation menu ............................................. Stop function ................................. Subtitles ........................................ Switching on .................................. Video-AUX Setting the picture ......................... VIN ...................................................... 502 512 512 513 516 512 502 622 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 275 Brakes ........................................... 275 Distance warning signal ................. 283 ESP® ............................................. 277 ESP® OFF ...................................... 278 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 182 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 186 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 194 Overview .......................................... 42 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 63 Reserve fuel ................................... 280 Seat belt ........................................ 274 SRS ................................................ 280 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 284 Warning triangle ................................ 576 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 272 Waypoints .......................... 335, 337, 338 Accepting waypoints for the route .............................................. 338 Creating ......................................... 335 Editing ........................................... 337 Entering ......................................... 335 Searching for a filling station when the fuel level is low ........................ 338 Weather display (COMAND Online) ........................................ 447, 448 Calling up the weather map ........... 448 Information chart ........................... 447 Selecting locations in the information chart ....................................... 447 Selecting the location .................... 447 Selecting the location in the weather map .................................. 448 29 30 Index Switching off .................................. 447 Switching on .................................. 447 Weather map (COMAND Online) ........................................ 448, 449 Legend ........................................... 449 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 448 Switching to the weather information display .................................... 449 Website .............................................. 458 Adding to favourites ....................... 458 Wheel and tyre combinations see Tyres Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 609 Wheel chock ...................................... 606 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 605 Changing/replacing ....................... 605 Checking ........................................ 597 Cleaning ......................................... 570 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 606 Emergency spare wheel ................. 614 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 609 Fitting a wheel ............................... 606 Important safety notes .................. 596 Overview ........................................ 596 Removing a wheel .......................... 608 Storing ........................................... 606 Tightening torque ........................... 609 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 610 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 570 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 146 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Notes ............................................. 628 Topping up ..................................... 566 Windscreen wipers Display message ............................ 272 Problem (malfunction) ................... 138 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 136 Switching on/off ........................... 135 Winter operation Important safety notes .................. 598 Overview ........................................ 598 Slippery road surfaces ................... 181 Snow chains .................................. Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. M+S tyres ...................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 599 242 598 571 136 136 573 Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 146 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. You can return your vehicle to these plants free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conservation of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Ravoid Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Rdoor Z 31 32 Introduction Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 622). Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Introduction G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could effect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly any more and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Electromagnetic compatibility Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 33 34 Introduction G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rservice Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual technical data in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Introduction Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognising and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Rservice Raccident reports to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. Rdamage Z 35 36 Introduction Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource 37 Cockpit ................................................. 38 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 43 Centre console .................................... 44 Overhead control panel ...................... 47 Door control panel .............................. 48 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 40 38 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 169 ; Combination switch 129 = Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 118 ? Horn A Instrument cluster B PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel 47 D Climate control systems 140 40 204 Function Page E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 155 155 F Cruise control lever 182 G Activates Night View Assist Plus 218 H Electric parking brake 176 I Light switch 126 J Opens the bonnet 563 K Diagnostics connection 33 39 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 204 = Combination switch 129 ? Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 118 A Horn B Instrument cluster C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 169 D Diagnostics connection 33 47 40 Function Page E Opens the bonnet 563 F Activates Night View Assist Plus 218 G Light switch 126 H Electric parking brake 176 I Ignition lock Start/Stop button 155 155 J Cruise control lever 182 K Climate control systems 140 40 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays and controls i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function : Speedometer with segments ; Fuel gauge = Rev counter Function Page 229 229 Page ? Coolant temperature 228 A Multifunction display 230 B Instrument cluster lighting 228 41 At a glance Instrument cluster i Instrument cluster: miles Function : Speedometer with segments ; Fuel gauge = Rev counter Function Page 229 229 Page ? Coolant temperature 228 A Multifunction display 230 B Instrument cluster lighting 228 42 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page Function Page F 6 SRS 280 G ü Seat belt 274 H M SPORT handling mode (AMG vehicles) 278 I ? Coolant 281 J R Rear foglamp 128 K ; Engine diagnostics 280 L 8 Reserve fuel : L Dipped-beam headlamps 127 ; T Side lamps 128 = ÷ ESP® 277 ? K Main-beam headlamps 130 A ! Electric parking brake (red) 280 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 280 M å ESP® OFF 277 C · Distance warning 283 N ! ABS 275 D #! Turn signals 129 O J Brakes 275 E h Tyre pressure monitor 284 Multifunction steering wheel 43 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function Page : Multifunction display 230 ; COMAND display 289 = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute 235 Function A B =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions Page 229 229 229 247 229 44 Centre console At a glance Centre console Centre console, upper section Function Page : COMAND Online 294 ; c Seat heating 116 = s Seat ventilation 117 ? Ò AIRSCARF 117 A c PARKTRONIC 204 B £ Hazard warning lamps 130 Function C a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp D å ESP® (except AMG vehicles) ¤ start/stop function (AMG vehicles) Page 63 74 158 Centre console 45 At a glance Centre console, lower section (except AMG vehicles) Function : Page Stowage compartment Cup holders Ashtray 545 548 549 ; COMAND controller 296 = Seat adjustment 318 ? Favourites button 313 A Roof switch 104 B Opens/closes the side windows 100 C Extends/retracts the draught stop 108 D Stowage compartment with Media Interface Cigarette lighter Power socket 545 550 551 Selects park position 163 E Function Page F ¤ start/stop button 158 G Shows the driving conditions menu in the COMAND display (vehicles with Active Body Control) 201 H É Sets the vehicle level 199 I Adjusts the suspension settings Sets the suspension tuning (vehicles with Active Body Control) J 199 200 Ú Selects the drive program/program selector button 167 K Transmission positions 166 L Selector lever 163 46 Centre console At a glance Centre console, lower section (AMG vehicles) Function : Page Stowage compartment Cup holders Ashtray 545 548 549 ; COMAND controller 296 = Seat adjustment 318 ? Favourites button 313 A Roof switch 104 B Opens/closes the side windows 100 C Extends/retracts the draught stop 108 D Stowage compartment with Media Interface Cigarette lighter Power socket 545 550 551 Function Page E Selects park position 163 F Drive program selector 168 G ß button (drive program or calling up/storing suspension tuning) 168 à Adjusts the suspension setting 203 H I å J Transmission positions 166 K Selector lever 163 ESP® 74 Overhead control panel 47 At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 134 ; c Switches the interior lighting on/off 134 = µ Operates MAGIC SKY CONTROL 109 ? | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 134 p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 134 A Function Page B ë Deactivates towaway protection C Rear-view mirror 120 D Buttons for the garage door opener 555 E ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 80 F Spectacles compartment 545 80 48 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page : Opens the door 91 ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle 92 = Adjusts the seats ? r 45 = Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel (memory function) w Adjusts the frontpassenger seat from the driver’s seat 113 Function A B C 123 114 o Opens the boot lid p Opens/closes the boot lid 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically W Opens/closes the side windows Page 98 98 120 99 49 Useful information .............................. 50 Panic alarm .......................................... 50 Occupant safety .................................. 50 Driving safety systems ....................... 70 Anti-theft systems .............................. 79 Safety Child restraint systems ...................... 61 Occupant safety 50 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Safety els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Panic alarm To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. X i The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. Occupant safety Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint systems could result in them not functioning properly any more. The restraint systems could then no longer protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do and could fail in the event of an accident or activate unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify parts of the restraint systems. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. The airbag system can be adapted for a person with disabilities. For further information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The seat belts, together with SRS (Supplemental Restraint System), are complementary, co-ordinated restraint systems (Y page 51). They reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre-defined types of accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, make sure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 112) Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 59) Rthe airbags can inflate without restriction if deployed (Y page 52) Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 118) Rthe restraint systems have not been modified An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional restraint system that complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. For example, if the protective capacity of correctly fastened seat belts is not increased by deploying the airbags, the airbags will not deploy. Airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly. The seat belt helps, firstly, to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag. Secondly, in a head-on collision, for example, the seat belt restricts movement of the vehicle occupant towards the point of impact. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Introduction SRS consists of: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rairbags Rthe airbag control unit with crash sensors tensioners Rbelt force limiters SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. Rbelt SRS warning lamp G WARNING If SRS is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have SRS checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp goes out while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred if: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp does not go out after a few seconds Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up again Triggering of belt tensioners and airbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rmagnitude Based on the evaluation of this data, the airbag control unit triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. If there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front airbags are also deployed. Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the event of a collision. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the Z 51 Safety Occupant safety Safety 52 Occupant safety rate of deceleration or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process must take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. i The belt tensioners can only be triggered if the seat belt tongues are correctly engaged in the seat belt buckles. i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the collision detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal Rside collision impact Rrear impact Roverturn Airbags Important safety notes G WARNING Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag deployment: Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, pregnant women – must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the centre of the driver's airbag cover as possible. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. This is especially important if you have secured a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their heads into the area of the window in which the sidebag/headbag is deployed. Rrearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled if a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front- passenger seat. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in the pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area where the airbags are deployed. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example, coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury being caused by an airbag, due to the high speed at which the airbag must be deployed. G WARNING If you modify the airbag covers or affix objects, e.g. stickers to them, the airbags may no longer function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the airbag covers and do not affix any objects to them. The airbag installation locations are identified by the AIRBAG symbol. G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. G WARNING After the driver's airbag has been deployed, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupants. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. i After an airbag has been deployed, have the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified Z 53 Safety Occupant safety 54 Occupant safety specialist workshop, even if your vehicle can still be driven. Safety Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. the system determines that the frontpassenger seat is occupied. Exception: if a child restraint system with transponder is installed correctly. The PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds when the ignition is switched on. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console does not light up (Y page 63). If a child restraint system is fitted to the frontpassenger seat and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is not on: Ra child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted or Ra child restraint system with a transponder has been fitted incorrectly Sidebags Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. The front airbags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. They are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of other airbags in the vehicle The time within which the front airbag is deployed is dependent on whether or not a seat belt is worn. If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are generally not deployed. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: frontpassenger front airbag ; is only enabled if G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door pan- Occupant safety You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belts. Headbags Safety elling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Example: headbag on the front-passenger side Example: sidebag on the driver's side Sidebags : deploy next to the outer seat cushions of the seat backrest. When deployed, the sidebags offer additional thorax protection for vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms The sidebags are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are generally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can 55 Headbags : deploy in the area of the front side windows. Headbags enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The headbags are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Ron the side on which an impact occurs Ron the driver's and the front-passenger's side if the vehicle overturns and the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rindependently of the front airbags Roll bars G DANGER If the roll bar has developed a fault, it may not function, e.g. in the event of an accident. The roll bars may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Z 56 Occupant safety Have roll bars checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Safety G WARNING If you place objects or clothing on the roll bar covers, these could impair roll bar extension. The roll bars may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended. In addition, objects could endanger the vehicle occupants when the roll bar is extending. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Ensure that the movement area of the roll bar covers is kept clear. Always stow all objects in the vehicle correctly. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRESAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- The roll bars are located in the rear area of the vehicle under the two outer rear compartment trim covers. The roll bars are extended automatically if systems detect that the vehicle is in danger of overturning. The two rear compartment trim covers are opened and the roll bars are extended within fractions of a second. Once the roll bars are extended, you can no longer lower them. An open roof can no longer be closed. In this case, visit the nearest qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Introduction PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if BAS PLUS brakes hard or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe seat belts are pre-tensioned. the vehicle skids, the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. RVehicles with a multicontour seat or active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the backrest is increased. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. Rif Occupant safety X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but only when the vehicle is stationary. Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints Safety If the seat belts are not released: The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about seat-belt adjustment can be found under "Seat-belt adjustment" (Y page 59). NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING Only use head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. The use of non-approved head restraint covers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints from triggering properly. Consequently, the NECK-PRO head restraints cannot provide the intended level of protection. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding availability. NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries. The NECKPRO head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of a certain severity. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and frontpassenger seat (Y page 57). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognise when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a 57 Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direction of arrow = until the cushion engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Seat belts Important safety notes G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances, this could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Z Safety 58 Occupant safety Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. Rthe seat belt must fit snugly on your body and must not be twisted. Therefore, avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The shoulder belt section must be routed across the centre of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. Rseat belts must not be twisted within the belt loop on the seat. Rdo not route the belt strap across sharp edges or fragile objects. This is especially the case if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident, and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. Ronly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. Rpersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age cannot wear the seat belts correctly. Therefore, they should always be secured in a suitable child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting a child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the upright position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in the upright position. G WARNING Seat belts cannot perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, bleached or coloured, or are very dirty Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or very dirty Rmodifications have been made to the seat belt tensioners or belt anchorages In the event of an accident, seat belts can sustain damage that is not visible to the naked eye, e. g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified belt tensioners could deploy unexpectedly or fail. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never make modifications to seat belts, belt tensioners, belt anchorages or seat belt retractors. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, are not worn and are clean. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts that have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This Occupant safety Fastening seat belts Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 112). X Pull the seat belt smoothly through seat belt guide :. X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis. X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 59). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the belt adjustment on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 243). The seat belt adjustment is a convenience function integrated in PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection). More information on PRE-SAFE®(Y page 56). Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Information about releasing the seat belt with release button ?(Y page 59). Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. Z Safety reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. 59 Occupant safety 60 X Safety X Press release button ? on belt buckle =. Guide belt tongue ; back to seat belt guide :. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, a warning tone may sound. The ü seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. Only for certain countries: the ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after every engine start. This happens regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened. It then goes out if the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the ü seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (Y page 274). Belt tensioners, belt force limiters G WARNING Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: an electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. The seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners. The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. The belt tensioners can only be activated when: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe restraint systems are operational; see " SRS warning lamp" (Y page 51) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts The belt tensioners are triggered depending on the accident type and severity: Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction on the side opposite to the impact Rin certain situations where the vehicle overturns and the system determines that it can provide additional protection If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags. They take on a part of the deceleration force, resulting in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area. Child restraint systems Important safety notes G WARNING To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children. Rif you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. When doing so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces which occur in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this pur- pose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. Z 61 Safety Child restraint systems 62 Child restraint systems road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: is appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. In order to correctly secure the child in the child restraint system, always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Make sure that the child is secured for the trip. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use the listed child restraint systems (Y page 67). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Rreleasing i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Safety Ropen doors and endanger other persons or Rclimb the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which products to clean child restraint systems. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat G WARNING If the front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously or even fatally injured by the frontpassenger airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger front airbag when it deploys. Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. When doing so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ron vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, Child restraint systems Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat G WARNING If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled. If the frontpassenger front airbag deploys, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. or Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. When doing so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions/communicates correctly, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system Z Safety unless a child restraint system with transponders for automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat. In order to make use of the automatic child seat recognition, a Mercedes-Benz approved child seat with a transponder is necessary. Ron vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, if the _ PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on and the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up. To make you aware of this danger, a corresponding warning sticker has been affixed to the side of the dashboard and on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 63 64 Child restraint systems Safety G WARNING Electronic devices on the front-passenger seat can affect the function of the automatic child seat recognition, for example: Rlaptop Rmobile phone cards such as ski passes or access passes The front-passenger front airbag could deploy unintentionally or not function as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any of the devices mentioned above or similar devices on the frontpassenger seat. Rtransponder : PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp The automatic child seat recognition sensor system on the front-passenger seat detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat has been fitted there. The Mercedes-Benz child seat is equipped with transponders for automatic child seat recognition so that it can be detected by the sensor system. In this case, PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp ; lights up briefly when the ignition is switched on. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : remains lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis- abled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side: Rthe sidebag headbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe ISOFIX child seat securing system G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. When installing a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. G WARNING If the child restraint system has not been fitted correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. The child could be seriously or even fatally injured. For this reason, when securing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's fitting instructions and the correct application range of the child restraint system. For safety reasons, only use child restraint systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing system which have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, always make sure that it is engaged correctly in the ISOFIX securing loops on both sides. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing loops :. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing the ISOFIX child restraint system. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems. ISOFIX retaining loops : for an ISOFIX child restraint system are fitted to the frontpassenger seat. Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle. Installing a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat X Move the seat to its highest and rearmost position. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. X Move the backrest to a vertical position. When doing so, ensure that the complete surface of the child restraint system rests against the backrest of the front-passenger seat and that the child restraint system does not touch the roof. To do so, you may have to adjust the backrest down a little. X Move the seat cushion angle to the highest, most vertical position. X Move the belt height adjustment to the lowest position. Rearward-facing child restraint systems without a transponder for automatic child seat recognition may not be installed on the frontpassenger seat. Suitability of the front-passenger seat for attaching belted child restraint systems Key to the letters used in the following table: X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 67). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Z 65 Safety Child restraint systems Safety 66 Child restraint systems Weight categories Frontpassenger front airbag is not disabled Frontpassenger front airbag is disabled Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Category II: UF, L 15 to 25 kg U, L Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L UF, L or IUF in accordance with the "Suitability of the front passenger seat for attaching belted child restraint systems" or "Suitability of the front-passenger seat for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system". Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Suitability of the front-passenger seat for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system: Key to the letters used in the following table: X Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a "Universal" category child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted when the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 67). Carry-cot weight category Size category Equipment Frontpassenger seat F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X Weight category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Example: approval label on the child restraint system "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal". "Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF Size category Equipment Frontpassenger seat E ISO/R1 X Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Size category Equipment Frontpassenger seat E ISO/R1 X D ISO/R2 X C ISO/R3 X Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg approximately 9 months to 4 years Size category Equipment Frontpassenger seat D ISO/R2 X C ISO/R3 X B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF Recommended child restraint systems Installing a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: Move the seat to its highest and rearmost position. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed towards the front to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. X Move the backrest to a vertical position. When doing so, ensure that the complete surface of the child restraint system rests against the backrest of the front-passenger seat and that the child restraint system does not touch the roof. To do so, you may have to adjust the backrest down a little. X For certain child restraint systems, this can mean that the area of use is restricted, as the maximum size setting of the child restraint system is not possible due to possible contact with the roof. X Move the seat cushion angle to the highest, most vertical position. X Move the belt height adjustment to the lowest position. Weight category 0: up to 10 kg; up to approximately 6 months Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type BABY SAFE plus BABY SAFE plus II Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 04 301146 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 10 00 970 20 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg; up to approximately 15 months Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type BABY SAFE plus BABY SAFE plus II Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 04 301146 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 10 00 970 20 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes Z 67 Safety Child restraint systems 68 Child restraint systems Safety Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg; approximately 9 months to 4 years Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg; approximately 4 to 12 years Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type DUO plus DUO plus Type KIDFIX KIDFIX Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 03 301133 04 301133 Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301198 04 301198 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 11 00 970 16 00 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 18 00 970 19 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Manufacturer Britax Römer Manufacturer Britax Römer Type DUO plus Type KIDFIX Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301133 Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301198 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 21 00 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 22 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes Automatic child seat recognition Yes Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg; approximately 4 to 12 years Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type KID KID Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301148 04 301148 03 301148 04 301148 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 12 00 970 17 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Suggested "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems: Category I: 9 to 18 kg Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type DUO plus DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 03 301133 04 301133 B1 Order number A 000 970 11 00 A 000 970 16 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Type DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301133 Order number A 000 970 21 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes 69 Safety Child restraint systems Z 70 Driving safety systems Safety Problems with automatic child seat recognition Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. G WARNING There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. When you switch on the ignition, it is also possible that: Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp lights up. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly. Rthe PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp does not light up, or lights up and does not go out after 60 seconds. There is a risk of injury. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptop Rmobile phone Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards Rthe If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 71) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 71) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) (Y page 72) RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 73) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 73) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 76) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 77) Brake (Y page 77) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 78) RPRE-SAFE® Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. (Y page 596). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 248). ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Brakes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist System) General notes Important safety notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Important safety notes tion (Y page 70). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 275) and Z 71 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems 72 Brakes Safety X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. With the aid of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. BAS PLUS can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle or reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rinterference Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle and PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUS is carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS RBAS Driving safety systems i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if: Ryou release the brake pedal Rthere is no longer a risk of collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou activate kickdown Adaptive brake lamps i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 130). ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. ETS remains active when you deactivate ESP®. i AMG vehicles: your vehicle may be equipped with 20-inch tyres on the rear axle. If replaced with a 19-inch tyre, ETS may intervene noticeably sooner for the first few kilometres. After approximately 10 km ETS will function as usual again. Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 610). Z Safety PLUS automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 7 km/h and 250 km/h. At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. 73 74 Driving safety systems Important safety notes Safety G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! When testing the electric parking brake on a braking dynamometer, switch off the ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 590). ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 277) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 248). i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General notes If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated is deactivated G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi- Driving safety systems Deactivating/activating ESP® You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® is activated. handling mode is activated. RESP® is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING X To switch off: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X To switch on: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). Z Safety cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. 75 Driving safety systems 76 Safety Deactivating/activating ESP® spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. RETS is still active. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. X Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree. Rthe engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Rengine EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 70). Driving safety systems If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 275) as well as display messages (Y page 250). ADAPTIVE BRAKE i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 196) and hill start assist (Y page 158). PRE-SAFE® Brake General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRESAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Z Safety G WARNING 77 Driving safety systems 78 Safety In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 238). When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the multifunction display. This function will issue a warning if: Rat a speed of around 30 km/h or more, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for several seconds. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or more, you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. The PRE-SAFE® Brake function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 7 km/h and 200 km/h At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h, PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. i If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated. If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further Ractivating kickdown Rreleasing the brake pedal The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle is no longer any danger of a collision Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle Rthere STEER CONTROL General notes STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. Anti-theft systems This steering support is provided in particular if: 79 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on Safety a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning. steering is faulty. Power steering will, however, continue to function. Rthe Anti-theft systems Immobiliser To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The engine can be started by anyone with a valid key that is left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet Rthe glove compartment Rthe stowage space under the armrest Ra stowage compartment in the rear X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Rthe Z Anti-theft systems 80 Safety The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Activating Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the tow-away protection primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Deactivating X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. X X Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again door is opened and closed again Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the towaway protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ra Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Ris Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Activating Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed Rthe stowage compartment under the armrest is closed This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: X Anti-theft systems roof is closed doors are closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. i Only for the Netherlands and Belgium: the interior motion sensor is primed even when the roof is open. However, the roof should be closed so as to prevent a false alarm. Deactivating X The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again door is opened and closed again Rthe vehicle is locked again Ra i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESSGO. Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 90). Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is automatically deactivated. Deactivating Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. X To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople Rthe or animals remain in the vehicle side windows remain open Z Safety Rthe Rthe 81 82 83 Useful information .............................. 84 Key ....................................................... 84 Doors .................................................... 90 Boot ...................................................... 94 Side windows ...................................... 99 Opening and closing Roof .................................................... 103 84 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Key Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 80). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). All countries: G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Key Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality. Key functions You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 242). When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 241). KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. Locking and unlocking centrally : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the boot lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe Rthe X vehicle is locked again anti-theft system is primed again To lock centrally: press the & button. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors boot lid Rthe glove compartment Rthe stowage compartment under the armrest Rthe stowage compartment in the rear compartment Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. Rthe You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion Z Opening and closing Do not keep the key: 85 Key 86 The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. Opening and closing X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 101). X To unlock the boot lid: pull the boot lid handle. The vehicle only unlocks the boot lid. X X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 87). Emergency key element Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means only the driver's door, the lockable stowage compartments in the vehicle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 87). i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 79). There are several ways to deactivate the alarm: X or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X the vehicle To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. Key Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not automatically be unlocked. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Removing the emergency key element X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 93) Runlocking the boot (Y page 99) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 93) Opening and closing or X Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in 87 Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 88). X Z Key 88 i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle Opening and closing i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 86). Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold battery compartment cover : shut. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. Insert emergency key element ; into the key (Y page 86). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Key 89 Problems with the key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If this does not work: X Lock (Y page 93) or unlock (Y page 93) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. Lock (Y page 93) or unlock (Y page 93) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the key. To do this, hold the key as close as possible to the vehicle and press the % or & button. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Lock (Y page 93) or unlock (Y page 93) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Lock (Y page 93) or unlock (Y page 93) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Z Opening and closing You can no longer lock The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the key battery (Y page 87) and replace it if necessary using the key. (Y page 88). 90 Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Opening and closing The engine can no lon- The on-board voltage is too low. ger be started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior key. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 584). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 586). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine can no longer be started using KEYLESS-GO. The key is in the vehicle. The vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. X There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 80). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- gered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). All countries: G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Doors G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: 91 a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Ropen doors and endanger other persons or Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door to close. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 80). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is Z Opening and closing road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Doors 92 X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. i When a door is opened, the side window Opening and closing on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window is raised again. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. For example, you can unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 80). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. Automatic locking feature X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. The central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the stowage compartments, such as the glove compartment. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the doublelock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the : To deactivate ; To activate To deactivate: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. Doors 93 You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 242). Power closing Power closing pulls the doors and boot lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. X Power closing feature (doors): push the door past the first detent position into the lock. Power closing will pull the door fully closed. X To power close the boot lid: lightly push the boot lid closed. The power closing function pulls the boot lid closed. Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 79). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 86). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert emergency key element into the key (Y page 86). X Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door and the boot lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 92). X Check whether the locking knob on the front-passenger door is still visible. Press down the locking knob by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 86). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Z Opening and closing Rthe Boot 94 leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. Opening and closing ! Only close the boot once the roof is lowered completely. Otherwise, you could damage the roof. 1 To lock Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Insert emergency key element into the key (Y page 86). X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not primed. Boot Important safety notes G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 629). i When the soft top is open, you can use loading aid (Y page 546) to raise the folded soft top when loading it into the boot. For this purpose, you can also open the boot separator. The boot separator must be closed again after loading. Otherwise, the soft top can no longer be closed. You can unlock the boot lid when the vehicle is stationary and the roof is fully opened or closed. Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed from outside Ropened and closed automatically from out- side (vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature) Ropened and closed automatically from inside (vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature) Ropened, closed or stopped during operation without the use of your hands (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS) Rlocked separately Runlocked with the emergency key element Boot lid reversing feature The boot lid is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the boot lid during the Boot closing procedure. The boot lid opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness to the boot lid while it is closing. The reversing function does not react: this purpose, you can also open the boot separator. The boot separator must be closed again after loading. Otherwise, the roof can no longer be closed. Closing Opening and closing G WARNING Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rpress the F button on the key, or the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the boot lid, or Rpull the boot lid handle Rpress Opening/closing from the outside Opening X X Pull the boot lid down using recess :. Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO. i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the boot, the boot lid cannot be locked. It then opens again. Opening/closing automatically from the outside Important safety notes G WARNING Press the % button on the key. Pull handle :. X Raise the boot lid. i When the soft top is open, you can use loading aid (Y page 546) to raise the folded soft top when loading it into the boot. For X X 95 Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress Z Boot 96 Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. ! The boot lid swings upwards when Opening and closing opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 629). Vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close the boot lid and lock the vehicle. Press locking button ; in the boot lid. If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid closes and the vehicle locks. i If a key with KEYLESS-GO is detected in the boot, the boot lid opens again after it is closed. It does not lock. X Opening You can automatically open the boot lid using the handle in the boot lid. X If the boot is unlocked, pull the boot lid handle and release it again immediately. Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid can also be opened automatically with the key. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. Closing HANDS-FREE ACCESS Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make a leg movement within the detection range of sensors. ! If the key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the boot: Rusing a car wash a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 2 m away from the vehicle. Rusing General notes : Closing button ; Locking button X To close: press closing button : in the boot lid. With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the boot lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the Boot Operation X RAlways ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 30 cm away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDSFREE ACCESS could be triggered. The boot lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - set something down or lift something behind the vehicle - polish the rear of the vehicle Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in such situations. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the boot. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. RUsing HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. To open/close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your leg. You will hear a warning tone while the boot lid is opening or closing. If the boot lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again. i If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the boot lid does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure: X Rmove your foot in sensor detection range : under the bumper, or Rpull the handle on the outside of the boot lid or Rpress the closing button in the boot lid or Rpress the F button on the key If the boot lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the boot lid will open. If the boot lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the boot lid will close. Z Opening and closing ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. 97 98 Boot Opening/closing automatically from the inside Opening and closing Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. In addition, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. children, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Release the remote operating switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. To reopen the tailgate pull on the remote operating switch. G WARNING To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is closed. X You can open and close the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Locking the boot separately The separate boot locking function is only available in certain countries. You can lock the boot separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 86). The boot lid can be automatically opened or closed even if the key is not in the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could activate the functions. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid (Y page 629). Opening and closing 1 Basic position 2 To lock Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise from position 1 to position 2. X Pull out the emergency key element. X Insert emergency key element into the key (Y page 86). X Side windows ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 79). X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 86). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. 1 Basic position 2 To unlock Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. X Pull the boot lid handle. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert emergency key element into the key (Y page 86). Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. X i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 93), the boot is also locked. Side window reversing feature The front side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the upward movement of one of the front side windows during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid, not a substitute for your attention when closing the side window. Z Opening and closing Unlocking the boot (emergency key element) 99 Side windows 100 G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Opening and closing Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows Opening and closing the side windows in the front The switches for the side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger side window on the frontpassenger door. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic closing is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the corresponding switch again. X i You can continue to operate the side win- dows after you switch off the engine. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Opening/closing the rear side windows To open: open the front side window on the corresponding side (Y page 100). X Press the corresponding switch again and release. The corresponding rear side window opens fully. X To stop the rear side windows: briefly pull the corresponding switch up and release. X To close: close the front side window on the corresponding side (Y page 100). X Pull the respective switch and hold it. The corresponding rear side window will continue to close until you release the switch. X Opening and closing all side windows Using the switch on the centre console : Left ; Right Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic closing is started. X Using the switch on the centre console, you can close all side windows simultaneously. X Open the cover on the lower centre console. The switch for all side windows is under the cover. Side windows 101 You can use the key to open or close all side windows simultaneously. Close the roof (Y page 104). Open the boot separator (Y page 105). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key must be within 2 m of the vehicle. X To open all side windows: press the % button on the key until the side windows are fully opened. X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the % button. X To close all side windows: press the & button on the key until the side windows are fully closed. X To interrupt the closing procedure: release the & button. X To open all side windows: press switch : to the point of resistance. X To open all side windows fully: press switch : beyond the point of resistance. All side windows open simultaneously. i If, after opening the windows, you close one side window using the button in the door control panel: X Rthe front side window closes first and Rthen the corresponding rear side window closes To close all side windows: pull switch :. All side windows begin the closing procedure simultaneously. The rear side windows close after the front side windows. X Make sure that all the side windows are fully closed. X Using the key G WARNING When using convenience closing, you could become trapped within the sweep of the closing window. There is a risk of injury. Monitor the entire closing procedure when using convenience closing. When closing, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the closing area. If someone is trapped: X X Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO G WARNING When using convenience closing, you could become trapped within the sweep of the closing window. There is a risk of injury. Monitor the entire closing procedure when using convenience closing. When closing, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the closing area. If someone is trapped: Release the recessed sensor surface on the door handle immediately. X Pull the door handle immediately and hold it until the side windows open again. X With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side windows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Release the & button immediately. Press and hold the % button until the side windows open again. Z Opening and closing X Side windows Opening and closing 102 Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. X Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 100) X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 100). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Roof 103 Problems with the side windows If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Roof Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurise after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely. G WARNING Closing the roof manually is a complex, technically challenging procedure that requires considerable effort during certain phases. You or others could be trapped while performing this task. There is a risk of injury. Only have the soft top closed manually at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Never sit on the rear compartment trim or stow heavy objects there. You will otherwise damage the roof and rear compartment trim of the vehicle. ! Do not forget that the weather can change abruptly. Make certain that the roof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 104 Roof Opening and closing ! When opening and closing the roof, make sure that: Rthere is sufficient upward clearance, as the roof swings upwards. Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the vehicle, as the boot lid swings backwards beyond the bumper. Rthe boot is only loaded to below the boot separator. Rthe boot separator is not pushed up by the load. Rthe boot separator is closed. Rthe boot lid is closed. Rthe outside temperature is above Ò15 †. You could otherwise damage the roof, boot and other parts of the vehicle. i Vehicle dimensions when opening/closing the roof (Y page 629). i Make sure that the roof and rear window are dry and clean before opening the roof. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle interior or boot. Opening and closing using the roof switch Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, boot lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button. Opening and closing Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Close the boot separator (Y page 106). X Close the boot lid. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the cover on the lower centre console. Roof switch : is located under the cover. X To open: pull soft-top switch : until the entire soft top is stowed away in the boot. You see the Vario-roof in operation message in the multifunction display. As soon as the opening procedure has ended, the message disappears and you hear a tone. The front side windows close. The rear side windows open. X To close: press and hold soft-top switch : until the soft top is fully closed. You see the Vario-roof in operation message in the multifunction display. As soon as the closing procedure has ended, the message disappears and you hear a tone. All of the side windows close. X Make sure that all the side windows are fully closed. X Roof Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roof, body parts could be trapped by, for example, the roof mechanism, boot lid or side windows. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, release the button. Opening and closing Close the boot separator (Y page 105). X Close the boot lid (Y page 94). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key must be within 2 m of the vehicle. X To open: press and hold the % button on the key until the roof is fully opened. The roof and the rear side windows open. The front side windows close. X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the % button. X To open the front side windows: press and hold the % button on the key again. X To close: press and hold the & button on the key until the roof is fully closed. The roof and the side windows close. X To interrupt the closing procedure: release the & button. i The key cannot be used to open the roof if the roof is closed and the boot separator is open. Instead, all of the side windows open or close simultaneously (Y page 100). X Locking the roof again Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurise after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely. The roof is not locked if: Rthe K symbol and the Vario-roof in operation message appears in the multifunction display Rthe K symbol and the Open/close vario-roof completely message appear and you hear a warning tone. Ryou hear a warning tone for up to 10 seconds when pulling away or while driving. Locking You can lock the roof again if it is not locked fully. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Make sure the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the roof switch (Y page 104). X Boot separator General notes ! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage when folding back the roof, you should: Ronly load the boot to below the boot separator Rnot place any objects on or in front of the boot separator Z Opening and closing Opening and closing with the key 105 Roof 106 Rnot place any objects on the cover behind the roll bars Rnot allow the load to push up the boot separator Removing and fitting ! Make sure that the boot separator is fully Opening and closing closed. Otherwise, the roof could be blocked when opening or closing. The boot separator can be used to cover luggage and loads in the boot. Opening and closing Closed boot separator : Boot separator ; Net = Eyelets ? Handle To remove: unhook net ; from the holder on the left and right-hand sides and guide it to the rear until it is completely rolled up. X Remove boot separator : from fastening eyelets = in the side panels. X Push boot separator : against the direction of the arrow by handle ?. X Closed boot separator : Boot separator ; Eyelets = Handle To close: pull boot separator : in the direction of the arrow by handle =. X Hook boot separator : into fastening eyelets ; in the side panels. X To open: remove boot separator : from fastening eyelets ; in the side panels. X Push boot separator : against the direction of the arrow by handle =. X Opened boot separator : Boot separator A Catch lever (example: driver's side) Turn driver's side catch lever A in the direction of the arrow. X Repeat the same process on the catch lever on the passenger side. Boot separator : is unlocked. X Pull out boot separator : in the direction of the arrow. X Roof 107 other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Fit the draught stop as described. Do not place any objects on top of the fitted draught stop. the roof is open. You could otherwise damage the draught stop or the vehicle interior. A Catch lever (example: driver's side) B Guide To install: insert guides B of boot separator : into the brackets. X Slide in boot separator : as far as it will go. X Turn driver's side catch lever A in the direction of the arrow. X Repeat the same process on the catch lever on the passenger side. Boot separator : is unlocked. X Pull boot separator : by handle ? in the direction of the arrow. X Hook boot separator : into fastening eyelets = in the side panels. X Pull net ; forwards and hook the left and right-hand sides into the holder. X The draught stop offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The draught stop can be fitted or removed from the driver's side or passenger side. We recommend that a second person assists you when doing this. Perform operations involving the draught stop preferably on the side facing away from traffic, after you have stopped the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Fitting/removing Draught stop Manual draught stop Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the draught stop in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the draught stop when visibility conditions are good. Rear brackets for draught stop : Bracket cover, front-passenger side ; Bracket cover, driver's side To fit: open the roof (Y page 104). Press the mark on cover : and push in the direction of the arrow. X Repeat the procedure with cover ;. The rear brackets for draught stop = are visible. X X G WARNING If the draught stop is incorrectly fitted, it could detach itself during a journey and endanger Z Opening and closing ! Fit or remove the draught stop only when Roof 108 X Slide covers : and ; of the rear brackets against the direction of the arrow until they are fully closed. Electrical draught stop Opening and closing Important safety notes = ? A B Draught stop Pin Front brackets for draught stop Lock cover (example: front-passenger side) Make sure that draught stop = is folded back. X Push the upper half of cover B on draught stop =. X Repeat the procedure with the cover on the driver's side. Draught stop = is unlocked. X Hold draught stop = at an angle and insert pins ? into the rear brackets. Make sure that pins ? sit correctly in the brackets. X Insert draught stop = into front brackets A. X Check whether draught stop = is correctly seated in all four brackets. X Push the lower half of cover B on draught stop =. Draught stop = is locked. X Fold draught stop = forward if necessary. X To remove: make sure that draught stop = is folded back. X Push the upper half of cover B on draught stop =. Draught stop = is unlocked. X First remove draught stop = from front brackets A. X Hold draught stop = at an angle and then remove from the rear brackets. G WARNING If you use the draught stop in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the draught stop when visibility conditions are good. ! When extending or retracting the draught stop, make sure there are no objects on the rear compartment trim. Otherwise, the objects could damage the draught stop. The draught stop offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The roof must be fully open before the draught stop can be extended. Extending and retracting Open the roof (Y page 103). X Open the cover on the lower centre console. The switch for the electrical draught stop is under the cover. X X To extend: press button :. X To retract: press button : again. X Roof Sunblind for the glass roof 109 RNever remove the trim behind the overhead control panel. the trim is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CONTROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The roller sunblind protects you from excessive glare and heat caused by the sun shining through the glass roof. To close: using handle : slide the roller blind in the direction of the arrow. X To open: using handle : slide the roller blind in the opposite direction to the arrow. X The electrical components of MAGIC SKY CONTROL are protected by a covering behind the overhead control panel. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit has a yellow high-voltage warning sticker. The electric cables of the high-voltage section are coloured orange. MAGIC SKY CONTROL operation MAGIC SKY CONTROL General notes MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the transparency of which can be changed by applying electrical voltage. MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched between darkened and transparent states. i MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automat- ically when you turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove the key. Risk of electric shock G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high voltage. If the trim behind the overhead control panel is damaged or removed, electrical components will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the status it was set to before the engine was switched off. X To change the degree of transparency: press button :. X i At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time. Z Opening and closing RIf 110 Roof Problems with the roof Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Opening and closing The roof will not open or The boot separator is not in place. close. X Close the boot separator (Y page 106). The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid (Y page 95). The on-board voltage is too low. X Leave the engine running. The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been automatically deactivated. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure. The automatic roof mechanism is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X 111 Useful information ............................ 112 Correct driver's seat position .......... 112 Seats .................................................. 113 steering wheel .................................. 118 Mirrors ............................................... 120 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function .............................. 123 Correct driver's seat position 112 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Correct driver's seat position Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 118). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 118) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 57). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 59). The seat belt should: Rfit snugly across your body routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 120) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions. X Store the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 123). Rbe Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 113). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 114) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. Ryou Seats Important safety notes G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it can move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Seats 113 114 Seats ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when moving the seat back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The head restraints cannot be removed. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. A Seat fore-and-aft adjustment B Backrest angle i Further related subjects: RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 123). PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position (Y page 56). RIf Adjusting the front-passenger seat from the driver's seat G WARNING If the front seats are positioned too closely to the dashboard or steering wheel, the front airbags could cause additional injuries to vehicle occupants in the front. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always adjust the front seats so that they are as far away as possible from the front airbags. In addition, observe the instructions on how to adjust the seats correctly. ! Do not move the front-passenger seat fully forwards if there are objects in the luggage net in the front-passenger footwell. The objects could otherwise be damaged. Adjusting the seats electrically : ; = ? Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat cushion length You can use the seat switches on the driver's side to adjust the front-passenger seat. Seats To activate/deactivate: press button :. If the indicator lamp in button : is lit, you can access the following functions for the frontpassenger seat: X 115 Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints electrically Rcall adjustment up the memory function Removing the seat belt from the seat belt guide G WARNING When driving off-road, your body is subject to forces from all directions due to the uneven surface. You could be thrown from your seat, for instance. There is a danger of injury. Always wear a seat belt, even when driving offroad. : ; = ? A B X Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for the head restraint adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow. Sliding the seats forward/back Both the driver's seat belt and the frontpassenger seat belt can be removed from the seat belt guide. This makes it easier to move the seats forward. Before you drive off, the seat belt must be inserted into the seat belt guide. Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 57). X To remove: open up magnetic head ; and fold the tab up in the direction of the arrow. X Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide :. X To insert: fold the tab up in the direction of the arrow. X Insert the seat belt back into the seat belt guide and fold the tab back down. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. ! Make sure that there are no containers in the cup holder and no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rseat 116 Seats Switching the seat heating on/off Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Switching on/off You can move the seat forwards, in order to gain better access to the rear compartment, e.g. to reach the stowage compartment in the rear (Y page 546). X Remove the seat belt from the seat belt guide (Y page 115). X To move the seat forwards: press : on switch :. The seat moves automatically to the foremost position. X To move the seat backwards: press 9 on switch :. The seat moves back to the previous position. X To stop seat movement: press : or 9 in the opposite direction. Adjusting the multicontour seat You can set the multicontour seat using COMAND Online(Y page 319). Adjusting the active multicontour seat You can set the active multicontour seat using COMAND Online (Y page 319). Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the 4-way lumbar support with COMAND Online (Y page 319). G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. Driver's and front-passenger seat The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. You can set the distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and backrest using COMAND Online (Y page 320). Seats Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. X Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch the seat heating on again. X Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off X ventilation may switch off. i If you open the roof with the key (Y page 105), the seat ventilation of the driver's seat switches on automatically and the side windows open. Problems with the seat ventilation The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. AIRSCARF Activating/deactivating G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X 117 118 steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. The AIRSCARF function warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. The warm air flows out of the holes in the head restraints. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button :. Three red indicator lamps in the button light up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds. X Press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i The blower continues running for seven seconds to cool down the heating elements. i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF may switch off. steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 118) Rstoring settings (Y page 123) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. steering wheel Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat and the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rpress one of the memory function memory buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING If you use openings in the bodywork or detachable parts as steps, you could: Rslip and/or fall Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to fall. There is a danger of injury. Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 243). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Ropen i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe Ryou driver's door is closed and insert the key into the ignition lock or Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO If you close the driver's door with the key inserted in the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 123). Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: 119 Mirrors 120 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 243). This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users travelling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users travelling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Mirrors Rear-view mirror Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, to the right or to the left. The exterior mirror must be set to a position that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. X X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of 10 minutes. i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating. Mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 121 i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if they have been folded in manually. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button : until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position (Y page 121). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 120). i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. Setting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 243). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 243): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Exterior mirror pushed out of position 122 Mirrors Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Using the memory button Setting and storing the parking position Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Using reverse gear : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the kerb should be visible. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X Calling up a stored parking position setting : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. X The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING If the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. If someone becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment is stopped. G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. Z 123 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function Memory function 124 Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 114). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 118) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 120). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. X 125 Useful information ............................ 126 Exterior lighting ................................ 126 Interior lighting ................................. 134 Replacing bulbs ................................. 135 Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers ........................... 135 126 Exterior lighting Useful information "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelligent Light System) are not available. i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Lights and windscreen wipers ist workshops: (Y page 34). Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set by: Rusing the light switch the combination switch (Y page 129) Rusing the on-board computer (Y page 239) Rusing Exterior lighting Light switch General notes Operation For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 240). 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps X Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (Y page 240). If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. Turn the light switch to Ã. Exterior lighting Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 Ropen Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. à is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have switched on the daytime driving lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime driving lights or the side lamps and dippedbeam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. Here, the daytime driving lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 239). When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up and the daytime driving lights are switched off or dimmed. Dipped-beam headlamps G WARNING 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. B R Rear foglamp Z Lights and windscreen wipers The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: 127 128 Exterior lighting Lights and windscreen wipers Rear foglamp 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps B R Rear foglamp When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in position L, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several Exterior lighting hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left parking lamp. 129 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps B R Rear foglamp X Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Turn signals To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor Z Lights and windscreen wipers B R Rear foglamp Exterior lighting 130 Lights and windscreen wipers Main-beam headlamps : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Headlamp flasher : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Hazard warning lamps To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X Exterior lighting The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: 131 Active light function Ran airbag is deployed or vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. Rthe operate even if the ignition is switched off. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times (Y page 135) while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on Cornering light function Intelligent Light System General notes The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" using the on-board computer (Y page 240). The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel Z Lights and windscreen wipers i The hazard warning lamps continue to 132 Exterior lighting Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Motorway mode the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp Adaptive Highbeam Assist Lights and windscreen wipers General notes Motorway mode increases the range of the beam. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m Rif you are driving at speeds above 130 km/h Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation Extended range foglamps The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Exterior lighting G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist recognises road users too late or not at all. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured Rdirt Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h: The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 30 km/h and no other road users are recognised: The main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 25 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: The main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X X Headlamps misted up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right Z Lights and windscreen wipers Important safety notes 133 134 Interior lighting Interior lighting Automatic interior lighting control Lights and windscreen wipers Overview of interior lighting Overhead control panel : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; c Switches the interior lighting on = | Switches the interior lighting/auto- matic interior lighting control off ? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off A To switch the automatic interior lighting control on Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Overhead control panel : p To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; c To switch the interior lighting on = | To switch the interior lighting/auto- matic interior lighting control off ? p To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off A To switch the automatic interior lighting control on To switch on: set the switch to centre position A. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. X The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 241). Ropen Windscreen wipers Manual interior lighting control Windscreen wipers To switch the interior lighting on: set the switch to the c position. X To switch the interior lighting off: set the switch to the | or (if the door is closed) to the centre position. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Replacing bulbs G DANGER Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The front and rear lamps of your vehicle are equipped with either xenon or LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 135 Windscreen wipers 136 Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind- screen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. Lights and windscreen wipers X In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wipers to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. i The vehicle is equipped with the MAGIC VISION CONTROL wipe/wash system. The washer fluid is fed through the wiper blades and when the screen is wiped with washer fluid î, the water is emitted directly from the blades. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. ! Always position the windscreen wiper arms vertically before folding them away from the windscreen. By doing so, you will avoid damage to the bonnet. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windscreen wipers to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the key to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windscreen wipers to position °. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windscreen wipers start. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X X Windscreen wipers Removing the wiper blades 137 Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow = beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade engages in the removal position with an audible click. X To remove a wiper blade: firmly press release knob ; and pull the wiper blade upwards :. Lights and windscreen wipers X Fitting the wiper blades Push the new wiper blade in the direction of arrow : onto the wiper arm until lug ; engages. X Push the wiper blade out of the removal position in the direction of arrow = beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade disengages with an audible click and is freely movable again. X Z 138 Windscreen wipers Problems with the windscreen wipers Lights and windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 139 Useful information ............................ 140 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 140 Operating the climate control system ..................................................... 142 Climate control Adjusting the air vents ..................... 150 140 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops: (Y page 34). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 149). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather. This will speed up the cooling process, and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i An hour after the key has been removed, it is possible that the residual heat function may be activated automatically in order to dry the air-conditioning system. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the air-conditioning system. Overview of climate control systems 141 : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I To set the temperature, left (Y page 145) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 144) To demist the windscreen (Y page 146) To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 149) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 142) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 147) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 146) To set the temperature, right (Y page 145) To switch climate control on/off (Y page 142) To set the air distribution (Y page 145) To set the airflow (Y page 146) To adjust the airflow (Y page 144) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 148) Information about using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons on the control panel of the climate control. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, the ñ button on the climate control panel may be used to additionally adjust the airflow (FOCUS/ MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (2-zone) Climate control 142 Operating the climate control system when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up, as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RVehicles with COMAND Online: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 160). Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. i Activate climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 144). Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X To switch on: press the à button on the control panel for the climate control. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button on the control panel for the climate control. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only switch off cooling with air dehumidification for a short period. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Operating the climate control system 143 Activating/deactivating Example: ¿ button To switch on: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. Climate control X 144 Operating the climate control system Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the ¿ button flashes three times or goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification system cannot be switched on. Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Climate control Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only switch off cooling with air dehumidification for a short period. Activating/switching Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. i When automatic mode is enabled the airflow can be selected (Y page 144). X X To switch to manual mode: press the _ button. or X Press the I or K button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Setting the airflow In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings: FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less of a draught Operating the climate control system 145 cally, depending on the outside temperature. Setting the air distribution Activating/deactivating Example: ñ button Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press the à button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the required airflow setting appears in the display. Setting the temperature Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. X Air distribution settings The air distribution can be set to the following positions: Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Turn controls : or D clockwise or anticlockwise (Y page 141). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. i If you turn controls : and D anti-clockwise to the lowest temperature setting, airrecirculation mode may activate automati- P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents b Directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side Climate control X Operating the climate control system 146 air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Setting the airflow Climate control Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X To increase: press the K button. X To reduce: press the I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off er's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Demisting the windscreen General notes Example: ¬ button You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. Switch off the "Windscreen demisting" function as soon as the windscreen is clear again. Switching the "Demisting windscreen" on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: X Rhigh To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driv- airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off X X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Operating the climate control system Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X 147 Rear window heating General notes Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or Turn the temperature controls on the left or the right on the climate control panel clockwise or anti-clockwise. Turn temperature controls : or D clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 141). or X Press the K or I button. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate the à mode button. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press button ¤. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Climate control X Operating the climate control system 148 Problems with the rear window heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again. lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. Climate control Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode General notes If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. Activating/deactivating To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: X Rafter around five minutes at outside tem- peratures below approximately 5 † approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter around 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5 † if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated Rafter Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. i Air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution or at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the g button is not X G WARNING When using convenience closing, you could become trapped within the sweep of the closing window. There is a risk of injury. Monitor the entire closing procedure when using convenience closing. When closing, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the closing area. G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped Operating the climate control system X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows are closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: Press the W button for opening/closing the side windows. The side window stops. X To then open the side window, press the W button again. i Notes on the reversing feature for the side windows (Y page 99). X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows are opened. The side windows move back to their original positions. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows manually after closing them with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this posiX tion when opened using the convenience opening feature. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function General notes It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set for the vehicle interior. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 155). X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. X i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. Z Climate control between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, press the W switch immediately to open/close the side window in the door. The side window stops. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. 149 150 Adjusting the air vents Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Setting the centre air vents Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Adjusting the air vents Climate control Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. To open the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : anticlockwise. X To close the centre air vent: turn the adjuster in one of centre air vents : clockwise until it engages. X Adjusting the side air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet grille on the bonnet and in the engine compartment on the frontpassenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. i You can move the adjusters for the air vents vertically or horizontally to set the direction of the airflow. i Optimal climate control function is ach- ieved by opening the air vents fully and setting the adjusters to the middle position. : Side window demister vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; anti-clockwise. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise until it engages. X Adjusting the glove compartment air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle. Adjusting the air vents : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF vents : using the AIRSCARF button (Y page 117). When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Z Climate control At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. 151 152 153 Useful information ............................ 154 Running-in notes ............................... 154 Automatic transmission ................... 163 Refuelling ........................................... 173 Parking ............................................... 175 Driving tips ........................................ 178 Driving systems ................................ 182 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 154 154 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Running-in notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1,500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. briefly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm. RIt is advisable to select drive program C for Controlled Efficiency. ROnly i You should also observe these notes on running-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. AMG vehicles with self-locking rear axle differential Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil after a running-in period of 3,000 km to improve protection of the rear axle differential. This oil change prolongs the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use Driving G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to pro- tect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. Driving and parking loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. 155 Key positions Key g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop button. You can switch the engine on and off with the Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only Z Driving Driving and parking 156 the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. The key can then be inserted into the ignition lock. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button and Relectrically powered equipment can be operated i The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switchoff function. Key positions with KEYLESS-GO If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. i The power supply is switched off if you press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position and the driver's door is open. X To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. i The power supply is switched off if you press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position and the driver's door is open. When you switch on the ignition, all of the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after the engine is started or if a one lights up while you are driving, there may be a technical problem (Y page 275). Removing the Start/Stop button Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;. i When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approximately two seconds' recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. X You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Starting the engine i The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can Starting procedure with the key Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. X X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 155) and release it as soon as the engine is running. Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 155). The engine starts. Z 157 Driving and parking Driving Driving 158 Pulling away Driving and parking Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the shift lock released. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the electric parking brake (Y page 176). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 242). i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. X Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Driving : ECO start/stop display If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 160) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. For further information on automatic engine switch-off (Y page 159) and automatic engine start (Y page 159). Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If the conditions for automatic engine switchoff are not all fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is lit yellow. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times consecutively (initial stop, then three subsequent stops). The ¤ symbol is lit yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switchoff is again possible. i AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine stops is unlimited. i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Rin transmission position D or N, the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Z Driving and parking General notes 159 Driving 160 Driving and parking Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M (AMG vehicles) Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low (Y page 159) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 159) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function ECO button in AMG vehicles Deactivating (AMG vehicles) X Press button : in drive program C. or X Switch to drive program S, S+ or M (Y page 168). Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. Activating (AMG vehicles) X ECO button Deactivating (except for AMG vehicles) X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. Activating (except for AMG vehicles) X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 159) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 159) are met, the ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunc- Driving 161 tion display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ Driving and parking stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Z 162 Driving Driving and parking Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 196). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting to start the engine again. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 157). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. RThere RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 586). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Automatic transmission Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to coolant warning lamp cool down. may also be on and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 565). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Automatic transmission Selector lever Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. ! If the engine speed is too high or if the G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. vehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission position D or R, park position P is otherwise engaged automatically. The transmission could be damaged. Selector lever j Park position k Reverse gear Z Driving and parking Problem 163 Automatic transmission 164 Driving and parking i Neutral h Drive When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever forwards past the first point of resistance. X When you select a transmission position, the selector lever subsequently returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display. i When reverse gear is engaged and the Engaging park position P Shifting to neutral N When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Press the P button in the centre console. When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance. X i Park position P is released if you: Rdepress the brake pedal and Rpush the selector lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance The transmission shifts to neutral N. Park position P is engaged automatically and the electric parking brake applied: Rif you remove the key from the ignition lock Rif you switch off the engine using the Start/ Stop button and open the driver's or frontpassenger door Rif you open the driver's door while travelling at low speed in transmission position D or R Rwhen HOLD (Y page 196) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185) brakes your vehicle until it is stationary and at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - the engine is switched off - the driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened - there is a system malfunction - the power supply is insufficient Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. ECO start/stop function is switched on, the engine starts up automatically (Y page 159). X i If the vehicle is braked to a standstill when in neutral N and the brake pedal is kept depressed, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically (Y page 159). Staying in neutral (N) G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting Automatic transmission Rmake sure the ignition is switched on. Rwhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rselect neutral N. Rrelease the brake pedal. Rif the electric parking brake is applied, release it. Rswitch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. With KEYLESS-GO: Rmake sure the ignition is switched on. Rwhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rengage park position P. Rrelease the brake pedal. Rremove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. Rinsert the key into the ignition lock. Rswitch on the ignition. Rdepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rselect neutral N. Rrelease the brake pedal. Rif the electric parking brake is applied, release it. Rswitch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. Shifting to transmission position D When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the selector lever back past the first point of resistance. X Transmission position and drive program display Display in transmission positions P, R and N : Transmission position: currently selected transmission position will be highlighted ; Drive program (E/S/M) In addition to drive program ; being shown in the multifunction display, the currently selected drive program is indicated in red on the program selector button. Display when in transmission position D : Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program (E/S) When you have selected drive program E or S, the transmission position is displayed in position :. The selected gear is displayed in position ;. i If the vehicle is braked to a standstill when in transmission position D (Y page 159) and the brake pedal is kept depressed, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically. Z Driving and parking With the key: 165 166 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Display when in transmission position D and drive program M Transmission positions B : Gear ; Drive program (M) Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 163) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In order to secure the vehicle, always engage the electric parking brake in addition to the parking lock. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the transmission is locked. The automatic transmission shifts into P automatically: Rwhen the key is removed from the ignition lock. Rwhen the engine is switched off with the transmission in position R or D and one of the doors is opened. In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Automatic transmission ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. 7 Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Program selector button Selecting drive programs Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 167) position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore Program selector button Program selector button : allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the speedometer multifunction display. Z Driving and parking Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. A 167 168 Automatic transmission Economy: comfortable, economical driving RS Sport: sporty driving style RM Manual: manual gearshifting Driving and parking RE RM Manual: manual gearshifting RRS driving mode RACE START: optimum acceleration dynamics from a standstill (SL 63 AMG only) i Further information about permanent i Further information about permanent i The automatic transmission switches to i The automatic transmission switches to i For further information on the "Automatic i RS cannot be selected during normal driv- drive program M (Y page 170). In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 169). automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. drive program M (Y page 170). In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 169). automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. ing. For further information on RACE START, see (Y page 198). drive program", see (Y page 169). Drive program for AMG vehicles AMG button (SETUP) You can save and call up the following presettings with the AMG button: RDrive program (Y page 168) settings RSuspension You can use the drive program selector switch to choose from a range of different transmission settings or select the RACE START drive mode. X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display. The drive program indicator on the drive program selector lights up red. RC Controlled Efficiency: comfortable engine and transmission design that provides for optimum fuel consumption RS Sport: sporty engine and transmission settings RS+ SportPlus: extremely sporty engine and transmission settings To store: press and hold AMG button : until you hear a tone. X To call up: press AMG button :. The stored drive program is selected. X To display: briefly press AMG button :. The multifunction display shows SETUP in the AMG menu (Y page 244). X Automatic transmission Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine and transmission settings vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher Rthe : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad- dle In the manual drive program, you can change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles (Y page 169). Further information about permanent drive program M(Y page 170). Further information about temporary drive program M(Y page 169). i The full range of functions of the steering wheel gearshift paddles is available only once the operating temperature is reached. i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. Manual drive program M General notes In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. You can activate manual drive program M in the E and S automatic drive programs. i In addition to temporary drive program M, you can also activate permanent drive program M (Y page 167). Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 170). Automatic drive program Automatic drive programs E and S Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-orientated engine and transmission settings Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Activating Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 169). Manual drive program M is temporarily activated. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. X Shifting gears If you pull on the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which Z Driving and parking Steering wheel gearshift paddles 169 Automatic transmission Driving and parking 170 gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear up or down, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 169). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 169). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. X i Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. Gearshift recommendation lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S. You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in place (Y page 169). or X Use the lever to switch the transmission position. or X Use the program selector button to change the drive program (Y page 167). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S. Manual drive program General notes In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Deactivating If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of i In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 169). Activating the manual drive program Manual drive program M differs from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, responsiveness and the smoothness of the gear changes. You can select manual drive program M with the program selector button or the drive program selector (AMG vehicles). In manual drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift pad- Automatic transmission AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector until M appears in the multifunction display (Y page 168). Shifting up X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 169). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. Gearshift recommendation : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X If the colour in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear. Downshifting X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 169). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Maximum acceleration X The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. AMG vehicles ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again. Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. Z Driving and parking the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. dles if the transmission is in position D. The selected gear appears in the multifunction display. X Press the program selector button until M (Y page 167) appears in the multifunction display. X 171 Automatic transmission 172 Deactivating the manual drive program Press the program selector button (Y page 167) until E or S appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display (Y page 168). Driving and parking X Refuelling 173 Problems with the transmission Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- G WARNING G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong Z Driving and parking Problem Driving and parking 174 Refuelling fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. Opening the fuel filler flap ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tyre pressure table Fuel type to be refuelled ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel : ; = ? Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 623). Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Refuelling General notes The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. X X Closing the fuel filler flap Place fuel filler cap on the fuel filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Parking 175 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it (Y page 155). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking G WARNING Important safety notes If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Z Driving and parking This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptions of and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Parking 176 Switching off the engine Driving and parking Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission Vehicles with a key: move the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 155). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0 (Y page 155). X i The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake, if the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i The electric parking brake carries out a function check at regular intervals when the engine is switched off. Noises that occur are normal. Parking Applying and releasing manually 177 The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. i The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. X To release: pull handle :. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock or Rthe ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button X Applying automatically The electric parking brake is applied automatically: Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's seat belt is not inserted in the belt buckle and the driver's door is open. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. Rthe engine is running. transmission is in position D or R. Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the boot lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h. Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake. i The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force. Z Driving and parking i The electric parking brake is not automat- 178 Driving tips During braking: Drive sensibly – save fuel Ra Observe the following tips to save fuel: warning tone sounds Release parking brake message appears Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged. Driving and parking Rthe Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. X Disconnect the battery or connect it to a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. RThe tyres should always be inflated to the recommended tyre pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RObserve the service intervals in the Service Booklet or in the service interval display. Have all the maintenance work carried out in accordance with Daimler AG regulations. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain. ECO display Example: ECO display The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption. In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such as: Rload Rtyre pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. The evaluation of your driving style takes the following three categories into consideration: RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds - The bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behaviour at all times): - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes): - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes - The bar empties: frequent braking i An economical driving style involves driv- ing at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendation. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E. i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the bar for Constant will change. i The ECO display summarises the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 232). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. Z 179 Driving and parking Driving tips 180 Driving tips ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Driving and parking results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed. You will have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This can increase the braking distance considerably. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Ensure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. New brake pads/linings New or replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance and ceramic brake system for AMG vehicles The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This is dependent on: Rspeed Rbraking force conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage (service life) that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more information on this from a qualified specialist workshop. New brake pads/brake pads and discs that have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Always be aware of this and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during the running-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the Rambient Driving tips Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Rthe Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. ! Take care not to damage the sealing strip and the moulding on the side of the rear window when scraping ice off the rear window. Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in still water is 12 cm Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Move the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. Z Driving and parking brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. If you regularly drive at high speeds, it is particularly important to have the brake system checked and maintained regularly. 181 Driving and parking 182 Driving systems You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 599). For more information on driving with summer tyres, see (Y page 598). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 598). Driving systems Cruise control Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating may cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the stored speed. Cruise control lever General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and to call up Important safety notes ? To store the current speed or a lower If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for maintaining lane. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed the last stored speed speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp ; on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Driving systems Selecting cruise control Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. X You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. Cruise control lever X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Storing and maintaining the speed Cruise control lever Storing or calling up the speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Cruise control lever Z Driving and parking When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. The speed is then permanently displayed in the status indicator together with the ¯ symbol. 183 Driving systems 184 Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Driving and parking X Deactivating cruise control Setting a speed Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Cruise control lever Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. X i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the electric parking brake are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Driving systems General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. It maintains the preset distance to the vehicle in front. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. Z Driving and parking DISTRONIC PLUS 185 186 Driving systems Driving and parking ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road and weather conditions or traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying correctly in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads). Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: This speed can: Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Rbe Cruise control lever Rin Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed and to call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS You can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp = off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp = on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Driving systems Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. Activating Cruise control lever X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Important safety notes ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Ryour vehicle must not be secured by the electric parking brake. RESP® must be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe bonnet must be closed. Cruise control lever Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down = . DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down = until the desired speed has been set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X If the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display, you can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when driving at speeds below 30 km/h. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, for example because it has changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Z Driving and parking Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS 187 188 Driving systems Driving and parking Pulling away and driving Changing lanes If you wish to move into the overtaking lane (in countries where traffic drives on the right, the passing lane is the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS assists you if: Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou have switched on the corresponding turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. RDISTRONIC Cruise control lever DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated when you depress the brake, except when the vehicle is stationary. X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or up : or down = . or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. It maintains the preset distance to the vehicle in front. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Vehicles with COMAND Online i The following function is not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can react appropriately to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive around a roundabout a T-junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Rapproach Example: roundabout The current speed is maintained: Rapproximately ten seconds before the roundabout/T-junction and for approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on the roundabout Rapproximately twelve seconds before reaching a motorway exit and approximately four seconds after the motorway exit Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the set speed you specified. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a short period the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: G WARNING driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is not sufficient If a fault occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed Stopping Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. Rthe G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192). Z 189 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 190 To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Driving and parking X Cruise control lever Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Setting a speed Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 191). Make sure that you maintain a sufficient and safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Cruise control lever Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. Cruise control lever Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 237). In the Assistance menu of the on-board computer, you can also activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 238). When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS activated Z Driving and parking To increase: turn control = in direction ;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X 191 Driving systems 192 Driving and parking X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 237). You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door is open Rthe vehicle has skidded If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Driving systems Vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane Driving and parking Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles 193 DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. SPEEDTRONIC General notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the Z Driving and parking 194 Driving systems vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Variable SPEEDTRONIC Cruise control lever Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 196) i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying correctly in lane. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and to call up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control or DIS- TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. LIM indicator lamp ; on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp ; off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp ; on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Driving systems You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed Cruise control lever X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Storing the current speed Cruise control lever X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. Setting a speed Cruise control lever X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. The current speed is stored. The multifunction display shows the stored speed, such as Limit 100 km/h, km/h for five seconds. Vehicles with cruise control: the stored speed is permanently displayed in the status indicator, e.g. LIM 100 km/h. km/h Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the segments from the start of the scale up to the stored speed light up in the speedometer. Cruise control lever X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise conZ Driving and parking Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC 195 Driving systems 196 trol lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. Driving and parking or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically deactivated, but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 242). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Driving systems Activating the HOLD function G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 197). Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : HOLD appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain amount of pressure until HOLD disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a short period the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Z Driving and parking Important safety notes 197 Driving systems 198 Ra system fault occurs power supply is not sufficient If a fault occurs, then the transmission may also be shifted into position P automatically. Driving and parking Rthe i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X RACE START Important safety notes i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT handling mode (Y page 75). Only activate RACE START on dedicated race circuits. RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. i RACE START is only available for the SL 63 AMG model. Activation conditions You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors are closed Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated (Y page 75) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) Rthe transmission is in position D Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector clockwise (Y page 168) until the RS lamp lights up. The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 169). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 169). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed increases to at least 3,500 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Driving systems cession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. Selecting comfort tuning Adaptive Damping System General notes The adjustable suspension system adapts to the particular driving conditions. Adjustment depends on your individual selection, i.e. sporty or comfortable. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Selecting sports tuning Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension for a comfortable driving style. The message COMFORT appears in the multifunction display. X In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension for a sporty driving style. The message SPORT appears in the multifunction display. X The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you want to experience direct contact with the road surface when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Active Body Control (except AMG vehicles) Vehicle level General notes In order to reduce fuel consumption and improve the driving dynamics, the vehicle is lowered as its speed increases. With the SPORT suspension setting, it is lowered by up to 13 mm, with COMFORT by up to 5 mm. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised to the set vehicle height. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Z Driving and parking i After using it several times in short suc- 199 Driving systems 200 Important safety notes Driving and parking G WARNING The vehicle is slightly lowered if you: Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to raised level. Setting the normal level Rhave selected the SPORT suspension tuning at normal level and Rswitch off the engine Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you switch off the engine. ! When the engine is switched off, the vehi- cle is lowered if SPORT suspension tuning has been selected at the normal level. The vehicle is automatically lowered by approximately 10 mm. Make sure when parking that you position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Setting the raised level Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. X The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Rare driving faster than approximately 120 km/h. Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h. Suspension setting Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X Make sure that a speed of 120 km/h is not exceeded. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. If the engine has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function, it is now restarted. X General notes The electronically controlled ABC suspension system features improved driving dynamics and ride comfort. The ABC suspension system is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps vehicle load Ryour individual selection of the sporty or comfortable button Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Rthe Driving systems Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension setting for a sporty driving style. The ABC Active Body Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. X Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension setting for a comfortable driving style. The ABC Active Body Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. X In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Driving conditions menu in the COMAND display The firmer suspension setting in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer a firmer suspension setting. Selecting comfort setting You can display some driving systems and additional information in the COMAND display. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure COMAND Online is switched on (Y page 298). X Press button :. The corresponding displays appear in the COMAND display. Z Driving and parking Selecting sporty tuning 201 202 Driving systems Driving and parking When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches. ! If you have selected the normal level and Example: displays in the COMAND display : Selection of raised level (Y page 199) ; Activity of ABC suspension struts for roll switched the engine off, the vehicle is lowered. The vehicle is automatically lowered by approximately 10 mm. Make sure when parking that you position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Setting the raised level and pitching support = Selected suspension setting, i.e. sporty or comfortable (Y page 200) ? G-FORCE (longitudinal and lateral accel- eration) A Current vehicle level Active Body Control (AMG vehicles) Vehicle level General notes In order to reduce fuel consumption and improve the driving dynamics, the vehicle is lowered as its speed increases. In the SPORT suspension setting, it is lowered by up to 13 mm, with COMFORT by up to 5 mm. As the speed is reduced, the vehicle is raised to the set vehicle height. Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Important safety notes The vehicle is slightly lowered when the engine is switched off. G WARNING People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres when the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X Make sure that a speed of 120 km/h is not exceeded. X If symbol ; is not shown: press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Vehicle level. level X Press the a button. The following message appears: Vehicle level Raise with OK. OK X Press the a button. If the engine has been switched off by the ECO start/stop function, it is now restarted. Symbol ; appears. The vehicle height is adjusted to the raised level. X Setting the normal level Selecting sporty tuning Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If symbol ; is shown: press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Vehicle level. level X Press the a button. The following message appears: Vehicle level Lower with OK. OK X Press the a button. Symbol ; is faded out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected the suspension setting for a sporty driving style. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Selecting comfort tuning X X The firmer suspension setting in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you prefer a firmer suspension setting. Rare driving faster than approximately 120 km/h. Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h. Suspension setting General notes The electronically controlled ABC suspension system features improved driving dynamics and ride comfort. The ABC suspension system is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps vehicle load Ryour individual selection of the sporty or comfortable button Rthe Z 203 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 204 Make sure that the engine is running or that it has been switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. X If indicator lamp ; is lit: press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. You have selected the suspension setting for a comfortable driving style. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. Driving and parking X In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Driving conditions menu in the COMAND display You can display some driving systems and additional information in the COMAND display. X Call up the driving conditions menu in the COMAND display (Y page 318). The corresponding displays appear in the COMAND display. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Rshift Example: displays in the COMAND display : Selection of raised level (Y page 202) ; Activity of ABC suspension struts for roll and pitching support = Selected suspension setting, i.e. sporty or comfortable (Y page 203) ? G-FORCE (longitudinal and lateral accel- eration) A Current vehicle level Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 571). Rbelow Front sensors the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Rear sensors Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays Side view Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness Top view The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The Z 205 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 206 Driving systems warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the cover behind the seats in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. RFront area: following the sixth segment, you will hear an intermittent warning tone. From the seventh segment, you will hear a continuous warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. RRear area: from the first segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The interval gets shorter after each segment. At the seventh segment, you will hear a continuous warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving systems 207 Problems with PARKTRONIC Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 571). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approxThe problem may be caused by an external source of radio or imately five seconds. ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 204). When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Rthat Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. G WARNING The vehicle will veer out when parking and can take you onto sections of the oncoming lane. As a result, you may collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. When parking, pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a Z Driving and parking Problem 208 Driving systems sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Driving and parking Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rparking or stopping prohibitions Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Runsuitable surfaces Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 205) warning messages during the parking procedure. Rat any time, you can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Parking Important safety notes Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Park- ing Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. G WARNING If objects are located above the detection range, Active Parking Assist may start to steer into the parking space too soon. As a result, you could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop the vehicle and switch Active Parking Assist off. G WARNING Active Parking Assist merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. There is a risk of accident if you do not apply the brakes yourself. Always apply the brakes yourself when parking and manoeuvring. Detecting parking spaces Example: detected parking space Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right = or the left : also appears. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. If you wish to park in a space on the driver's side, the turn signal on Driving systems Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Reversing into the parking space X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when reversing. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. i When parking in tight spaces, you will achieve the best results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Additional manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Drive forwards and reverse according to the information shown in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. PARKTRONIC continues to be available. X Manoeuvre if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 205). Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer drawbars might be identified incorrectly or not at all. Z Driving and parking the driver's side must remain on. The turn signal must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: 209 210 Driving systems Driving and parking RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. In some cases, Active Parking Assist may guide you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should a gear be changed too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle using Active Parking Assist. X Start the engine. X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing the street. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Shift the transmission to position D or R as required while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X X Drive forwards or reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. X Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Cancelling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. Driving systems Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 206). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol goes out and the Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. Reversing camera General notes behind your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. i The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera messages in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). Rin Reversing camera : is in the boot lid handle. Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area Z Driving and parking X 211 Driving systems 212 Activating/deactivating the reversing camera To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the function "show reversing camera display" is selected in COMAND Online (Y page 322). X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the COMAND display. Driving and parking X To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Displays in the COMAND display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle = Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Runder ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axis (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Driving systems 213 = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approx- Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 212). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. X Additional display for vehicles with PARKTRONIC : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 205), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display. Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle "Reverse parking" function Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel Turning the steering wheel : Red guide line for the vehicle width includ- ing the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ; Parking space marking Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 212). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parkX : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Z Driving and parking imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle Driving systems 214 Driving and parking ing space until red guide line : reaches parking space marking ;. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. : End of parking space ; White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel = Red guide line at a distance of approxReversing with the steering wheel turned : Red guide line for the vehicle width includ- ing the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. imately 0.25 m from the rear of the vehicle X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line = is then at end of parking space :. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes Driving to the final position : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of day, length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Rif Ryou the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND Online or making a telephone call with it Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. switch off the engine take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. Ryou Speed Limit Assist General notes Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 238). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Take a break! message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a or % button to confirm the message. X On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs with camera : attached at the top of the windscreen. i Speed Limit Assist is not operational in all countries. Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from the navigation system is also used for this purpose. The display appears if Speed Limit Assist detects a traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit from the digital road map is taken and shown in the display. Important safety notes Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and does not always detect traffic signs specifying the maximum permissible speed. Traffic signs Z 215 Driving and parking Driving systems 216 Driving systems Driving and parking always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. The system may be impaired or may not function if: is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by dirt, snow or trees Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads Permanently showing detected traffic signs Rthere Information in the multifunction display Briefly showing detected traffic signs X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 237). When you activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function, a traffic sign indicating the speed limit or end of speed limit zone may appear in the multifunction display. The traffic sign appears for approximately five seconds as soon as it is detected. Any other information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. : Maximum permissible speed (example) ; Maximum permissible speed for vehicles subject to the restriction in the additional sign (example) = Additional character in fog ? Speed Limit Assist is available and switched on Display the assistance graphic using the on-board computer (Y page 237). A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is generally displayed until: X Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected Ryou make a turn Ryou leave or enter a town Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road) Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist using COMAND Online; see the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. The maximum permissible speed is shown in the COMAND display. Night View Assist Plus General notes good time. Drive carefully and always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Camera ; of Night View Assist Plus picks up the infrared light and displays a black and white image in COMAND. The image shown in COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by main-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedestrian recognition is active, pedestrians recognised by the system are visually highlighted in colour in the Night View Assist Plus display with small frame corners. i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. In addition, thermal imaging camera : is integrated in the radiator grille. The camera helps detect pedestrians and animals. Observe the notes on cleaning the thermal imaging camera and cleaning the windscreen (Y page 572). Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe thermal imaging camera in the radiator grille is dirty, misted up or covered Ron bends, on hilltops or in dips Rat high outside temperatures Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects directly in front of or beside the vehicle. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that other objects are marked or highlighted as well as pedestrians and animals. Pedestrian and animal recognition General notes Pedestrian or animal recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians or animals are partially or entirely obscured by other objects, e.g. parked vehicles Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian or of the animal in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections Rpedestrians or animals do not contrast with the surroundings Rthe camera system no longer recognises pedestrians as persons due to special clothing or other objects Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Ranimals are not recognised by the system, e.g. because of their size or shape Z 217 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 218 Driving systems Pedestrian and animal recognition is deactivated at temperatures above 32 †. The spotlight function and automatic activation are then no longer active. Night View Assist Plus can recognise larger animals such as deer, cows or horses using typical characteristics. The system does not detect: Pedestrian recognition Rsmaller animals, e.g. dogs and cats Ranimals whose silhouette is not clearly rec- ognisable When detected, animals are marked with small coloured frame corners. In contrast to pedestrian recognition, there is no separate standby symbol in the multifunction display. Activating/deactivating Night View Assist Plus : Night View Assist Plus display in the COMAND display ; Standby symbol for active pedestrian rec- ognition = Highlighting ? Pedestrian recognised Night View Assist Plus can recognise pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if: View Assist Plus is activated are driving faster than approximately 10 km/h Rit is dark If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ; appears. Persons who are detected are highlighted by framing =. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windscreen to evaluate the situation. Activation conditions You can only activate Night View Assist if all of the following conditions have been fulfilled: Rthe ignition is switched on (Y page 155) or the engine has been started Rthe light switch is in the à or L position Rreverse gear has not been engaged Activating Night View Assist Plus RNight Ryou Animal recognition Animals can be recognised in the following situations: Rdarkness Routside built-up areas Rbelow an outside temperature of 32 † X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the COMAND display. i The infrared headlamps only switch on in the dark when the vehicle is being driven at speeds of at least 10 km/h. This means that you do not have the full visual range while stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. The infra- Driving systems Automatic activation You can use COMAND Online to select the Night View Assist Automatic activa‐ tion option. The pedestrian and animal search function remains active even when the Night View image is not displayed. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds of more than 60 km/h, the Night View image is automatically displayed in the COMAND display as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected. X In COMAND Online, select automatic activation of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 322). Deactivating Night View Assist Plus Rthe driving speed is at least 60 km/h "Adaptive Highbeam Assist" (Y page 133) or "Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS" function is activated Rreverse gear has not been engaged The spotlight function is not active or is active only to a limited extent if: Rthe Ryou are driving in city traffic Rthere are pedestrians located in the area of an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle in front Activating the spotlight function The pedestrian detection with spotlight function runs in the background. If the prerequisites are met, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash four short pulses at a pedestrian detected on or near to the road surface. X In the light menu, select the spotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 240). The spotlight function does not flash at animals. Display in the assistance graphic X Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display goes off in the COMAND display. Night View Assist Plus is deactivated. Spotlight function General notes i The function described below is not available in all countries. Under certain conditions, the spotlight function uses the headlamps to flash at detected pedestrians. The spotlight function is only active if: Rpedestrian recognition is active Rthe road surface is not lit Pedestrian symbol : in the assistance graphic indicates the status of the spotlight function. If the symbol is displayed not filled in, the function is switched on. If the symbol is displayed filled in, the conditions for the spotlight function are met. Showing the assistance graphic X In the Assist. menu, select Assistance graphic (Y page 237). Z Driving and parking red headlamps are deactivated at speeds below 5 km/h. The Night View image continues to be displayed. 219 220 Driving systems Driving and parking Problems with Night View Assist Plus Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. The windscreen is misted up on the inside. Fold down camera cover (Y page 572). X Demist the windscreen (Y page 147). X The windscreen is iced up. X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 146). The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen. Replace the wiper blades (Y page 136). X The windscreen is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash. X Clean the windscreen (Y page 570). The windscreen has been damaged by stone impact in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windscreen. The pedestrian and ani- The infrared camera in the radiator grille is dirty. mal recognition is not X Use a soft cloth and water to clean the infrared camera. available. Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 223). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the area to the sides of your vehicle which are behind the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. If a risk of side impact is detec- ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist also uses the forward-facing radar sensor system. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Driving systems 221 G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rif the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer function properly. Monitoring range G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Driving and parking Rovertaking Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of vehicles may be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range will then be indicated late or not at all. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Due to the nature of the system: Rpoor Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Z Driving and parking 222 Driving systems Indicator and warning display Visual and acoustic collision warning : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. A warning is always issued when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Course-correcting brake application G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. Driving systems RESP® 223 is deactivated. Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected Driving and parking Activating Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 242) and Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 238) are activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; appears in the multifunction display. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. Either a very slight course-correcting brake application, or none at all, may occur if: are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds Ryou clearly brake or accelerate Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes Rthere Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera : at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the Z Driving and parking 224 Driving systems brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. If you select km in the Display unit Speed-/odometer function on the on-board computer (Y page 239), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road Warning vibration through the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway Rthe system recognises solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes cut the corner on a bend Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. In rare cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can recognise unclear markings or particular structures on the roadway as solid lane markings. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. able lane marking. Before this, a warning must have been issued by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend Ryou have switched on the turn signals Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration RESP® is deactivated Rthe transmission is not in position D Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction switch on the turn signal Ryou clearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ryou If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is intended to help you return the vehicle to the original lane. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognis- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Rlane markings are no longer be detected Z 225 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 226 Driving systems Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 238). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 237) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP® Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown Ryou brake hard Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend Useful information ............................ 228 Important safety notes .................... 228 Displays and operation .................... 228 Menus and submenus ...................... 231 Display messages ............................. 247 Warning and indicator lamps .......... 274 On-board computer and displays 227 On-board computer and displays 228 Displays and operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 40). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 40). X Turn the brightness control knob anticlockwise or clockwise. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or L, the brightness is dependant upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not lit. Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 40). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Displays and operation Operating the on-board computer On-board computer and displays At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Overview Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 230). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 182): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated (Y page 193): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 185): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. : Multifunction display ; Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep- arate operating instructions = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button X 229 To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Z On-board computer and displays 230 Displays and operation Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: 9 : a up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number W X RAdjusts 8 RMute Back button % the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions RHides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory Press and hold: RIn the volume % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display RConfirms selection/display mes- sage the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station RIn Right control panel ~ RRejects or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches : ; = ? Transmission position (Y page 165) Drive program (Y page 165) Text field Menu bar A Time (Y page 312) B Outside temperature or speed (Y page 239) Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. X To show menu bar ?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds of inactivity. RServ. menu (service) (Y page 238) menu (Y page 239) RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 244) RSettings Trip menu Standard display The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation (Y page 169) XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 207) ¯ Cruise control (Y page 182) È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 193) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 133) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 158) ë HOLD function (Y page 196) 120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 229). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 231) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 233) RAudio menu (Y page 234) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 235) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 237) RNavi X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" Example: "From start" trip computer : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. reset X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 232). The From start trip computer is automatically reset when: Z 231 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 232 Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer ECO display : Gearshift recommendation (Y page 169) ; Digital speedometer Example: ECO display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY X If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. Further information on the ECO display; see (Y page 178). Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Gearshift recommendation : is not given on AMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. Resetting values Example: resetting the trip computer "From start" Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range. X The approximate range that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If You can reset the values of the following functions: Rtrip meter start" trip computer R"From reset" trip computer RECO display R"From i If you reset the values in the "ECO dis- play", the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset. Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions : Road to which the change of direction In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. Further information on navigation (Y page 323). X Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. ; Distance to change of direction and visual Route guidance not active leads distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Direction of travel ; Current road Activating route guidance No change of direction announced : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = New lane during a change of direction ? Lane continues through change of direc- tion A Lane recommendation B Change-of-direction symbol : ; = ? Distance to the destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" On multilane roads, the system may display lane recommendation = for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed. Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map. Z 233 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 234 Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. RNew route... or Calculating route: route calculating a new route ROff map or Off road: road the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position). RNo route: route no route could be calculated to the selected destination. Audio menu Selecting a radio station i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting) (Y page 462). Audio player or audio media operation Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current track Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). Select audio player or audio media (Y page 472). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track ; has been reached. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. X X : Waveband ; Channel frequency with memory position i Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). Select Radio (Y page 462). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and hold the 9 or : button. If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and hold the 9 or : button. X X i Switching wavebands (Y page 464). Storing stations (Y page 466). If track information is stored on the audio player or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, radio stations can also be received. The multifunction display shows TV (RADIO). (RADIO) Telephone menu Introduction Example: CD/DVD changer display : Current scene Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). X Select video DVD (Y page 512). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : has been reached. X TV operation : Channel frequency with memory position i The memory position is only displayed along with channel : if this has been stored. Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). X Select TV (Y page 502). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored channel: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone, see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 551). or X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to COMAND Online (Y page 389). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered. When you enter your PIN via the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system i Storing a TV channel (Y page 505). Z 235 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 236 or COMAND Online, the mobile phone searches for a network. RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron Accepting a call Example: incoming call X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Dialling an entry from the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. X Assistance menu Introduction The assistance graphic shows: Rthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 214) is deactivated. lane markings as bright lines when Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 223) is activated. Rthe Ä symbol when Speed Limit Assist (Y page 215) is operational. The assistance graphic can also display traffic signs that are detected and indicate speed limits. Rthe æ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 77) is deactivated. Rthe pedestrian symbol of the spotlight function when the spotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 240) is activated. Rthe In the Assist. menu, you have the following options: RShowing the assistance graphic (Y page 237) RAMG vehicles only: setting the vehicle level (Y page 202) RActivating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function (Y page 237) RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 238) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 238) RActivating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 238) RActivating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 238) Showing the assistance graphic Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance graphic. graphic X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic (Y page 191). X The assistance graphic can display the status of and information from other driving systems or driving safety systems. Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Speed Limit Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows Speed Limit Assist. X Press the : button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. When the Speed Limit Assist message function is activated, the assistance graphic shows the Ä symbol in the multifunction display. If the Speed Limit Assist message function is activated, a detected speed limit is automatically displayed for five seconds. Other items in the multifunction display are not shown during this time. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 238 Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. Brake X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the multifunction display. X For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 77). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ATTENTION ASSIST. ASSIST X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 220). Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep‐ ing Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. X For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist; see (Y page 223). Service menu For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 214). Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X In the Serv. menu, you have the following options: RCalling up display messages (Y page 247) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 601) RChecking the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 602) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 567) Settings menu Introduction Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. miles X Press the a button to save the setting. X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rtotal In the Settings menu, you have the following options: Rchanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 239) Rchanging the light settings (Y page 239) Rchanging the vehicle settings (Y page 242) Rchanging the convenience settings (Y page 243) Rrestoring the factory settings (Y page 244) Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometres. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Selecting the permanent display function Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display function. You will see the selected setting outside temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]. [mph] X Press the a button to save the setting. X i The speed is displayed in mph. Lights Setting the daytime driving lights The Daytime driving lights function can only be switched on with the engine turned off. Z 239 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 240 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime driving lights function. If the Daytime driving lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 127). Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light System function. If the Intell. Light System function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you activate the Intell. Light Sys‐ tem, you activate the following functions: tem RMotorway mode RActive light function RCornering light function RExtended range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Intell. Light System: system inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic display message instead of the Intell. Light System function in the Lights submenu (Y page 240). Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 131). Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. traffic X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 126). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right. Switching the spotlight function on or off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 to select the Spot‐ light function. When the spotlight function is activated, the assistance graphic shows the pedestrian symbol. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on the spotlight function of Night View Assist Plus (Y page 219). Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light +/- function. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to a level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Setting the ambient lighting colour Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Ambient light colour function. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set the colour to SOLAR SOLAR, SOLAR orange or SOLAR red. red X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lighting function. When the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the key. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 127). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the boot lid, the exterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: Rside lamps Rdipped-beam headlamps Rdaytime driving lights Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.off function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 242 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lighting delayed sw.-off function. If the Lighting delayed sw.-off function has been switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres) function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (240 240 km/h to 160 km/h). km/h The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. For further information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 196). Switching the automatic locking feature on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door locks function. When the Automatic door locks function is activated, the left-hand vehicle door is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. For further information on the automatic locking feature; see (Y page 92). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you activate the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.). Man.) You will see the selected setting: on or off off. X Press the a button to save the setting. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185) PLUS (Y page 72) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 77) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220) RBAS Comfort Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 59). Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking function on/off This function is only available on vehicles with a memory function (Y page 123). When you activate the Auto. fold-in mir‐ rors function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold-in mirrors function. If the Auto. fold-in mirrors function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 118). Switching belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. : Folds the exterior mirrors in or out If you have switched on the Auto. fold-in mirrors function and you fold the exterior Z 243 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 244 mirrors in using button :, they will not fold out automatically (Y page 121). You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :. If you have switched the function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (Y page 121), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. Resetting to factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Daytime driving lights in the Lights submenu, you must turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission fluid temperature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, oil temperature ? is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. If the transmission fluid temperature is below 50 †, oil temperature B is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. SETUP : Drive program (C C/SS+ SS+/MM) ; ESP® mode (ON ON/OFF OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT SPORT) = Suspension tuning (SPORT SPORT/COMFORT COMFORT) SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode, the SPORT handling mode and the suspension setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. or X Briefly press the AMG button on the centre console (Y page 167). RACETIMER Displaying and starting the RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Starting a new lap : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ ish Lap. Lap Stopping the RACETIMER : Lap ; RACETIMER You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. X Displaying the intermediate time Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Press a to confirm Yes Yes. X The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X Z 245 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 246 Deleting all laps Lap evaluation If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. : ; = ? A Overall evaluation : ; = ? A RACETIMER overall evaluation Total time driven Average speed Distance covered Maximum speed This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. X Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 196) page 175) RParking (Y Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 248 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Rself-diagnosis Rthe is not yet complete on-board voltage may be insufficient G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 249 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 250 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. T! ÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 176). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Release parking brake The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 176). ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Move the transmission selector lever to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 252 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 606). X Move the transmission selector lever to P. X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 606). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Move the transmission selector lever to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake Parking brake inop‐ has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. erative The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Move the transmission selector lever to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! The red ! indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Key: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the parking brake Check brake fluid level G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 254 Display messages Display messages # Check brake pad wear Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual PRE‑SAFE® Brake is deactivated or temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper (Y page 571). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 75). Rthe PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a fault. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. A The roll bars are defective. Malfunction Con‐ sult workshop G WARNING The roll bars will then possibly not be extended in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Restraint sys. mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 51). 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand headbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front left malfunc‐ G WARNING tion Consult work‐ shoporFront shop Front right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintenmalfunction Con‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. sult workshop This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left windowbag mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshoporRight workshop Right The left or right headbag may either be triggered unintentionally or, windowbag malfunc‐ in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. tion Consult work‐ This poses an increased risk of injury. shop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Left cornering light or Right cor‐ nering light Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 256 Display messages Display messages b Rear left indica‐ tor or Rear right indicator b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Left mirror indica‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tor or Right mir‐ ror indicator b The third brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Third brake lamp Left brake lamporRight lamp Right brake lamp Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b Left main beamorRight beam Right main beam b Number plate lamp b Rear foglamp The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear foglamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Reversing light b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamporRight lamp Right daytime driving lamp The reversing lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The exterior lighting is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative Malfunction See Owner's Manual AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Switch off lights Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 258 Display messages Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 565). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Open the bonnet. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. Rtorn If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is OK: X 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 564). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 564). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Z 259 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 260 Display messages Display messages 4 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest Add 1 litre engine (Y page 564). oil when next refu‐ X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 564). elling X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. X ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 8 Reserve fuel level C The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. X Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ABC Malfunction The ABC function (Active Body Control) is restricted. G WARNING The vehicle's suspension settings may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABC Malfunction Stop vehicle The vehicle level of the ABC is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. After a few seconds, the vehicle level is adjusted and the display message disappears. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The vehicle is leaking oil. The display message is shown continuously. G WARNING The vehicle's suspension settings may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ABC is malfunctioning. The display message is shown continuously. G WARNING The suspension settings are thus affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too great. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. À Attention Assist: Take a break! Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À Attention Assist inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 262 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Speed Limit Assist is operational again. Speed Limit Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 196). Radar sensor deac‐ tivated See Own‐ er's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 242). Spotlight inopera‐ tive Night View Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Off Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision camera in the radiator trim is dirty Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthe outside temperature is too high X Clean the windscreen. X Clean the camera in the radiator trim. Rthe If the system has been switched off due to excessive outside temperatures, the system will switch back on automatically once it has cooled down. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Night View Assist is operational again. Night View Assist Plus is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Clean the windscreen. X Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist inoper‐ ative Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe sensors are dirty Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Clean the sensors (Y page 571). X Restart the engine. X Z 263 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 264 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. led X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 207). Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. ative Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 207). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist switched off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 185). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: rently unavailable Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow See Owner's Manual Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper (Y page 571). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS inactive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - km/h An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185). DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 265 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 266 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Limit --- km/h While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. Cruise control - - - km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 182). 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h! X Drive more slowly. Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres tyre pressure in one or more tyres is incorrect Rthe G WARNING Tyre pressures which are too low, harbour the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as vehicle load and speed increa- ses Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 578). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 601). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 601). Run Flat Indicator inoperative X Rectify tyre pressure The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 602). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 604). Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 268 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tyre pressures which are too low, harbour the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 578). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 602). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 578). Ryou Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. able X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tyre pressure mon‐ itor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To start engine, shift to either P or N You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Depress the brake pedal. Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of vehicle rolling Transmission not in P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). Without changing gear, consult workshop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. M The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Close the bonnet. Active bonnet mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction or because it has already been triggered. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. J The boot separator is open. X Close the boot separator (Y page 106). * The stowage space under the armrest is open. The interior motion sensor is not primed. X Close the stowage space under the armrest (Y page 545). Telephone No ser‐ vice Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. K You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the roof (Y page 104). K The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depressurised. X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 104). K The roof is not locked. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Push or pull the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed (Y page 104). Power steering mal‐ G WARNING function See Own‐ er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Close boot separa‐ tor Close centre com‐ partment Decrease speed Vario-roof lower‐ ing Open/close varioroof completely Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 272 Display messages Display messages K Start engine See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The on-board voltage is too low. Start the engine. X Repeat the opening/closing process after approximately ten seconds (Y page 104). X The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 104). Close rear side windows You leave the vehicle and at least one of the rear side windows is open. X Close the rear side windows (Y page 100). ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 566). Wiper malfunction‐ ing The windscreen wipers are defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ ing The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key  Change key batter‐ ies The key needs to be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 88). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. Key not detected (red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.  Key not detected (white display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X  Remove starting button, then insert key Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 273 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 274 Warning and indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts. tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59). warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59). tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases. warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the The red seat belt warn- same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly ing lamp flashes and an driven faster than 25 km/h. intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 59). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system G WARNING warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. Z 275 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 276 Warning and indicator lamps Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete on-board voltage may be insufficient ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Rthe G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a fault. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 277 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 278 Warning and indicator lamps Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 74). å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while ® ® the engine is running. If ESP is deactivated, ESP is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 74). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations (Y page 75). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and the adaptive brake lights are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 279 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 280 Warning and indicator lamps Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X 6 The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) is malfunctioning. Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System, see (Y page 51). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station. warning lamp is on while the engine is running. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 281 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 282 Warning and indicator lamps Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 565). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 175). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 565). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed The red distance warn- selected. ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance. the vehicle is in motion. · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185). Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 77). Z 283 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps On-board computer and displays 284 Warning and indicator lamps Tyres Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 578). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 602). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system may not be able to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 285 Useful information ............................ 286 Operating safety ............................... 286 At a glance ......................................... 288 System settings ................................ 310 Vehicle functions .............................. 316 Navigation ......................................... 323 Telephone .......................................... 387 Online and Internet functions .......... 432 Video .................................................. 501 Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 519 COMAND Online Audio .................................................. 462 286 Operating safety Useful information i These Operating Instructions describe all COMAND Online the standard and optional equipment of your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). diverted or the direction of a one-way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations. Bear in mind that, at a speed of only 50 km/h, your vehicle covers a distance of nearly 14 m per second. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND Online. COMAND Online calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights and give way signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations COMAND Online may give incorrect driving recommendations if the data on the digital map does not correspond to the actual conditions. For example, a route may have been Rstop The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the COMAND Online system which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Directive ECE-R 10. Correct use Observe the following information when using COMAND Online: Rthe safety notes in this manual rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rtraffic i Improper work on electronic components or other systems (e.g. radio, DVD changer) and their software may result in malfunction or failure. Even systems that have not been modified could be affected because Operating safety i The functionality of a roof aerial (tele- phone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carrier systems are used. Attaching metallised retrofit film to the windscreen may affect radio reception and have a negative impact on all other aerials (e.g. emergency aerial) in the vehicle interior. i Only have work or changes to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. This workshop should have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Protection against theft: this device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognising and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necesRservice Z COMAND Online the electronic systems are connected. Electronic malfunctions can seriously jeopardise the operational safety of your vehicle. 287 288 At a glance sary, under consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. COMAND Online Rdamage Qualified specialist workshop Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Owner's Manual. Copyright information General notes You can find information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components on the following website: http://www.mercedesbenz.com/opensource. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some COMAND functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or COMAND Online will display a message to this effect. At a glance Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. COMAND Online operating system Overview Features of your COMAND Online These operating instructions describe all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND Online system at the time of purchase. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your COMAND Online system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. : COMAND display (Y page 289) ; COMAND control panel with a single DVD drive or DVD changer = COMAND controller (Y page 296) At a glance 289 You can use COMAND Online to operate the following main functions: Rthe navigation system audio function Rthe telephone function Rthe video function Rthe system settings Ronline and Internet functions Rthe Digital Owner's Manual (availability depends on the vehicle model) You can call up the main functions: Rusing COMAND Online Rthe the corresponding function buttons Rusing the main function bar in the COMAND display the remote control Rusing COMAND display General notes ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperaturecontrolled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. If necessary, the display may temporarily switch off completely. Z 290 At a glance COMAND Online Display overview Example display for radio : Status bar ; Calls up the audio menu = Main function bar ? Display/selection window A Radio menu bar Status bar : displays the time, the current mobile phone network provider and the signal strength. If the traffic announcement function is switched on, the . symbol appears and when the sound is switched off, the , symbol is displayed. The main functions – navigation, audio, telephone and video – feature additional menus. This is indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items. Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function. When the main function is activated, it is identifiable by the white lettering. In the example, the radio mode is switched on within the audio main function, display/selection window ? is active. Menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions. At a glance 291 Menu overview Navi Audio Telephone Video System Route settings Radio Telephone TV Calls up the Calls up the system Digital Ownmenu er's Manual (availability depends on the vehicle model) Map settings Disc Address book Video DVD Calls up COMAND Online and Internet Personal POIs Memory card AUX Calls up the MercedesBenz Mobile website Travel guide MUSIC REGISTER Messages (street name announcements, acoustic information during calls, audio fadeout, reserve fuel level) USB memory O Activates/ deactivates alternative routes Media Interface Avoids an area Bluetooth® audio Shows the map ver- AUX sion Z COMAND Online Symbol ® 292 At a glance COMAND Online System menu overview System Time SplitView Consumption Seat Display off Display settings O Switches the automatic time settings on/off Operates COMAND functions from the passenger side Calls up the fuel consumption display Changes the driver/ frontpassenger seat settings Switches off the display Sets the text reader speed Sets the time zone LINGUATRONIC settings Switches to summer time Reversing camera Manual time setting Sets the language Setting the time/date format Favourites button O Activates/ deactivates Bluetooth® Automatic volume adjustment Imports/exports data Resets COMAND Online If equipped with the reversing camera: when the function is activated and COMAND Online is switched on, the image from the reversing camera is automatically shown in the COMAND display when reverse gear is engaged. System. i If the 360° camera menu item is displayed, Display off can be called up under System At a glance 293 Switching the COMAND display on/off X Press the W function button. or X Select System in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the system menu appears. To switch off: select Display off and press W to confirm. X To switch on: press one of the function buttons, e.g. W, Ø or the % back button. COMAND Online X Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the COMAND display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean the display screen, when necessary, with a commercially available microfibre cloth and cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage. Then dry the surface with a dry microfibre cloth. Avoid using alcoholic thinners, petrol or abrasive cleaning agents. These could damage the display surface. Z 294 At a glance COMAND Online COMAND control panel Function : ; = Switches to radio mode Switches wavebands Switches to DAB radio mode Switches to navigation mode Shows the menu system Press h repeatedly • Switches to the audio CD, audio DVD and MP3 mode • Switches to memory card mode • Switches to MUSIC REGISTER • Switches to USB storage device mode • Switches to Media Interface or audio AUX mode • Switches to Bluetooth® audio mode Page 462 464 Function ? 462 324 324 A 472 472 B 484 472 495 491 C Calls up the telephone basic menu: • Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface • Telephony via telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP-profile) Load/eject button 8 Single DVD drive V DVD changer Selects a station using the station list (FM and DAB radio mode) Sets a station using the station search function Rewinds Selects the previous track Disc slot • Loads CDs/DVDs • Ejects CDs/DVDs • Updates the digital map Page 394 421 469 469 464 465 476 475 469 470 382 At a glance D E F Selects a station using the station list (FM and DAB radio mode) Sets a station using the station search function Fast forward Selects the next track Delete button: • Deletes characters • Deletes an entry Number keypad • Selects stations via the station presets • Stores stations manually • Authorises mobile phone • Telephone number entry • Sends DTMF tones • Character entry • Selects a location for the weather forecast from the memory z Displays the current track being played g Selects stations by entering the frequency manually g Selects a track Page Function G Switches COMAND Online on/off Adjusts the volume 298 299 H SD memory card slot 472 I Calls up the system menu 310 J Accepts a call Dials a number Redials Accepts a waiting call 396 397 397 399 K Switches the sound on/off Switches the hands-free microphone on/off Cancels the text message read-aloud function Switches off the traffic and navigation announcements 298 Rejects a call Ends an active call Rejects a waiting call 396 400 399 464 465 476 475 307 307 465 466 391 397 398 305 447 Page L 398 410 298 478 466 475 Z COMAND Online Function 295 296 At a glance COMAND controller Overview Example of operation In the instructions, operating sequences are described as follows: Press the $ button. Radio mode is activated. X Select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Station list by pressing W. The station list appears. COMAND Online X Buttons on the COMAND controller : COMAND controller Overview You can use the COMAND controller to select the menu items in the COMAND display. You can: Rcall up menus or lists within menus or lists and Rexit menus or lists Rscroll Operation : ; = ? Back button (Y page 296) Delete button: (Y page 297) Seat function button (Y page 318) Favourites button (Y page 313) i If your vehicle does not have the seat function button, it will have two Favourites buttons. Example: operating the COMAND controller The COMAND controller can be: Rpressed briefly or pressed and held W clockwise or anti-clockwise cVd Rslid left or right XVY Rslid forwards or back ZVÆ Rslid diagonally aVb Rturned i For AMG vehicles: the COMAND Controller is configured with the : and ; buttons. Back button You can use the % back button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. At a glance Delete button X To delete individual characters: briefly press the j button. X To delete an entire entry: press and hold the j button. Seat function button You can use button T to call up the following seat functions: Rmulticontour seat (with 4-way lumbar support) Ractive multicontour seat (dynamic seat and massage function) Rbalance (seat heating distribution) More information on the seat functions (Y page 318). Favourites button You can assign predefined functions to the favourites button ; and call them up by pressing the button (Y page 313). Operating COMAND Online Selecting a main function Address entry menu : Main function bar Situation: switching from navigation mode (address entry menu) to the system settings. X To switch on navigation mode: press the Ø function button. To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Address entry and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears. X Slide Z V the COMAND controller and switch to main function bar :. X Select System in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The system menu appears. X Z COMAND Online To exit the menu: briefly press the % back button. COMAND Online changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press and hold the % back button. COMAND Online changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. X 297 At a glance 298 COMAND Online Selecting the menu of a main function Selecting a menu item X Select the station by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The station is set. Basic functions of COMAND Online Switching COMAND Online on/off X Example display for audio CD mode and audio menu (below) : To call up the audio menu If one of the navigation, audio, telephone or video main functions is switched on, triangle : appears next to the entry in the main function bar. You can now select an associated menu. The example shows how to call up the audio menu from audio CD mode (an audio CD is playing). X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Audio menu appears. The # dot indicates the currently selected audio mode. X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio Radio, by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Radio mode is activated. Press the q control knob. When you switch on COMAND Online, a warning message will appear. COMAND Online calls up the previously selected menu. If you switch off COMAND Online, playback of the current audio or video source will also be switched off. Switching the sound on/off Audio/video source sound X Press the 8 button on the COMAND controller or the multifunction steering wheel. The sound from the respective audio or video source is switched on or muted. i When the sound is switched off, you will see the , symbol in the status bar. If you change the audio or video source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Even if the sound is switched off, you will still hear traffic and navigation system announcements. At a glance Adjusting the volume for traffic announcements and navigation announcements You can adjust the volume of traffic and navigation announcements independently, relative to the volume of the audio or video source. During traffic or navigation announcements: X Turn the q control knob. or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. X To switch navigation announcements off: press and hold the 8 button during an announcement. Adjusting the volume for phone calls You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode during a telephone call. X To switch navigation announcements on again: switch COMAND Online off and then on again (Y page 298). or or X Start a new route calculation (Y page 329). or X To have the announcement repeated while the navigation menu is shown, select + and press W to confirm (Y page 355). X X Turn the q control knob. Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. Adjusting the sound settings Calling up the sound menu Adjusting the volume Adjusting the volume for the audio or video source X Turn the q control knob or X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. The volume of the currently selected audio or video source changes. You can also adjust the volume for the following: Rtraffic announcements announcements Rphone calls RLINGUATRONIC voice control (see the separate operating instructions) Rnavigation You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. This means that it is possible to set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD mode, for example. You can call up the respective sound menu from the menu of the desired mode. The example describes how to call up the sound menu in radio mode. Z COMAND Online Switching Traffic Programme and navigation announcements off and back on again X To switch Traffic Programme off: press and hold the 8 button until the . display disappears from the status bar of the display. A confirmation tone sounds. X To switch the Traffic Programme on again: press and hold down the 8 button until the . display in the status bar appears. A confirmation tone sounds. 299 At a glance 300 X Press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband selected. X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now set the treble, bass and balance for radio mode. COMAND Online Setting treble and bass The balance function is used to control whether the sound is louder on the driver's or on the front-passenger side. The fader function is used to control whether the sound is louder in the front or in the rear of the vehicle. You can adjust the fader depending on the vehicle model. Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound system: for the best sound focus, choose the setting 0. X Select Bal/Fad (balance/fader) in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Surround sound Setting the bass X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An adjustment scale appears. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The setting is saved. Setting balance and fader General notes If your vehicle is equipped with surround sound, you can use one of two sound systems: Rharman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround Sound system The harman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround Sound system allows you to set the optimum surround sound in the vehicle interior (Y page 301). RBang & Olufsen sound system (Y page 302) Both sound systems are available for the following operating modes: Rradio (FM only) radio Raudio CD Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby Digital audio formats) RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB storage device) RMedia Interface Roperation with Bluetooth® audio RDAB Setting the balance At a glance Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital audio formats) RAUX Because many DVDs contain both stereo and multichannel audio formats, it may be necessary to set the audio format (Y page 515). Discs which support the audio formats mentioned have the following logos: harman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround Sound system COMAND Online RTV 301 The example describes how to set the surround sound for radio mode. X To switch surround sound on/off: press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband selected. Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Surround and press W to confirm. X Select Logic7® on or Logic7® off by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on your selection, surround sound is switched on or off and the menu is exited. X To exit the menu without saving: press the % back button or slide XVY the COMAND controller. X Z 302 At a glance COMAND Online i Please note the following: for the opti- mum audio experience for all passengers when Logic7® is switched on, the balance should be set to the centre of the vehicle interior. You will achieve the best sound results by playing high-quality audio and video DVDs. MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s. Surround-sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as the medium wave range (MW) in radio mode. If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, you should switch off Logic 7®, as it may otherwise switch between stereo and mono and cause temporary sound distortions. On some stereo recordings, the sound characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback. i The Logic7® on function creates a sur- round sound experience for every passenger when playing stereo recordings, for example. It enables optimum playback of music and films on CD, audio DVD or video DVD with multichannel audio formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital. This results in sound characteristics as the sound engineer intended when the original was recorded. off, the sound sysi If you select Logic7® off tem plays the tracks as stored on the medium. Due to the design of the passenger compartment, an optimum audio experience cannot be guaranteed for all passengers. Bang & Olufsen sound system You can optimise the sound in the vehicle with the Bang & Olufsen sound system and the True Image Image™ sound technology. The Sound Mode function enables you to focus the selected sound setting within the vehicle. The example describes how to set the optimum sound for radio mode. Selecting the sound setting for True Image™ Press a number key, such as $. X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to confirm. A menu appears. A # dot marks the current setting for True Image™. X X Select reference or surround and press W to confirm. Rreference This setting provides a crisp, clear, luxury high-end sound setting for a studio atmosphere in your vehicle. Rsurround This setting enables a wide-ranging sound experience for playing music and videos. At a glance 303 When playing back music from an iPod®, the bit rate should also be at least 224 kbit/s. For optimum playback quality: : Current position of the sound setting For the optimum musical enjoyment, you can focus the sound image precisely on one seat. This means you are right at the centre of the listening experience, with all system parameters being precisely calculated for the selected position. The result is authentic music reproduction inside the vehicle. Focusing the sound setting Deactivate the "EQ" setting on the iPod®. Surround-sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as the medium wave range in radio mode. On some stereo recordings, the sound characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback. Character entry (telephony) Example: entering characters Press the $ button. X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to confirm. A menu appears. A # dot marks the current setting for Sound Mode. X Depending on the vehicle model series X Select left left, all or rear and press W to confirm. or X X Select left left, all or right and press W to confirm. To exit the menu: press the % back button or slide XVY the COMAND controller. i Please note the following: you will achieve the best sound results on your Bang & Olufsen sound system by playing high-quality audio DVDs and CDs. MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least 224 kbit/s. : * Switches the character bar to upper- case/lower-case letters ; p Switches the character bar from upper/lower-case letters to digits = B Changes the language of the char?F acter bar Deletes a character/entry The example describes how to enter the surname "Schulz". X Call up the input menu with data fields (Y page 404). X Select S and confirm W with the COMAND controller. S appears in the data field. Z COMAND Online X At a glance 304 Select c and confirm W with the COMAND controller. The letter c is added to S in the data field. X Repeat the process until the name has been entered in full. Other input menu functions: Option 2 RDeleting a character/entry (Y page 305) between upper/lower-case letters (Y page 304) RChanging the character set (Y page 305) RMoving the cursor to the next data field (Y page 305) X To enter a phone number: select the digits one by one in the corresponding data field by turning c V d and sliding Z V Æ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Saving an entry Switching data fields Changing the language of the character bar X COMAND Online RSwitching : Cursor in the next data field ; Saves an entry = 4 and 5 symbols to select a data field In the input menu, if you want to enter a first name after you have entered a surname, for example, proceed as follows to switch between the data fields: Option 1 X Select 4 or 5 in the character bar and press W to confirm. The input menu shows the data field selected. Slide Z V the COMAND controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears. X Select the data field by sliding ZVÆ and press W to confirm. X X After making an entry in the input menu, to create a new entry, for example (Y page 404): select the ¬ symbol in the character bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book. Further functions available in the character bar While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 404): X Select B and press W to confirm. X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switching the character bar to letters While making an entry in the input menu, to create a new entry, for example (Y page 404): X Select the * (upper case) or E (lower case) symbol and press W to confirm. At a glance Moving the cursor to the next data field X To delete an entry: press and hold the $ button on the control panel until the entire entry has been deleted. or X Select the F symbol and press and hold W the COMAND controller until the entire entry has been deleted. or X Press and hold the j button next to the COMAND controller until the entire entry is deleted. Character entry (navigation) General notes : Cursor (repositioned) ; 2 and 3 symbol to reposition the cur- sor While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 404): X Select the 2 or 3 symbol and press W to confirm. Deleting a character/entry While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 404): X To delete characters: press the $ button on the control panel. or X Select the F symbol by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the j button next to the COMAND controller. The following paragraphs describe how to enter characters using town input for BERLIN as an example. If you want to use the address entry menu to enter a town, a street or a house number, for example, COMAND Online offers you: Ra list with a character bar (option 1) Ra selection list (option 2) You can enter the characters using either the character bar or the number keypad. In the selection list, you select an entry to copy it to the address entry menu. Option 1: list of towns/streets with character bar Town list with character bar Z COMAND Online Changing the character set While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 404): X Select the p symbol and press W to confirm. RABC (upper/lower case) R123 (digits) ROther (special characters such as @, €, etc.) 305 At a glance 306 COMAND Online X Call up the town list with the character bar (Y page 327). The alphabetically sorted town list shows the first available entries. Character bar E shows the letters still available for selection in black D. These can be selected. In the example, the letter A is highlighted G. The characters available depend on the entry made by the user so far and the data contained in the digital map. Characters that are no longer available are shown in grey C. : Character entered by the user B ; Characters automatically added by COMAND Online AABE = List entry that most closely resembles the current entry by the user X ? To switch to the selection list A To delete an entry B To change the character set (Latin/CyrilC D E F G H lic) Characters not currently available Characters currently available Character bar To cancel an entry Currently selected character List Entering characters using the character bar X Select E, R, L, I, N in succession, confirming each by pressing W. Select B by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. List H shows all available town names beginning with a B. The list entry most closely resembling current entry by user = is always highlighted at the top of the list (BAABE BAABE in the example). All of the characters that have been entered so far are shown in black (letter B : in the example). Letters added by COMAND Online are shown in grey ; (AABE AABE in the example). Entering characters using the number keypad X To enter the letter B: press the l number key twice in quick succession. The character appears at the bottom of the display when the key is pressed. The first available letter is highlighted. You see which characters you can enter with that key. Each time the key is pressed, the next character is selected. At a glance X Rpress once = A twice = B Rpress three times = C Rpress X X Wait until the character display goes out. The entries matching your input are shown in the list. Enter E, R, L, I, N using the corresponding keys. Calling up the list as a selection list It is also possible to switch from the town list with character bar to the town selection list at any time during character input. X Further functions in the list with character bar X To delete characters: press the $ button on the control panel. or X X Press the j button next to the COMAND controller. X Select the F symbol in the character bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To delete an entry: press and hold the $ button on the control panel. Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the town list appears as a selection list. Select the desired town from the selection list. or X or To accept the first list entry: press and hold W the COMAND controller until the address entry menu appears. The accepted list entry is shown there. Select¬in the character bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If there are several entries for a town or if several towns of the same name are stored, then ¬ is highlighted in the character bar. X Press W the COMAND controller. Option 2: town list as selection list or X Press and hold the j button next to the COMAND controller until the entire entry is deleted. or X Select the F symbol in the character bar and press and hold W the COMAND controller until the entire entry is deleted. X To switch the character set: select the B symbol and press W to confirm. This will switch the character set from Latin to Cyrillic and back. X To cancel an entry: select the & symbol in the bottom left of the character bar and press W to confirm. or X Press the % back button. The address entry menu appears. COMAND Online either shows the selection list automatically or you can call up the selection list from the list with the character bar. The example shows the selection list after the town BERLIN has been entered. The entry is highlighted automatically. X Confirm BERLIN G by pressing W the COMAND controller. You see the available entries. Z COMAND Online Example: key l: 307 At a glance 308 COMAND Online RDifferent X Confirm BERLIN(1XXXX) by pressing W the COMAND controller. The address entry menu appears. Observe the information relating to destination entry (Y page 326). SPLITVIEW Operation SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use different COMAND Online functions on the front-passenger side and on the driver's side. Different content is seen depending on your perspective when viewing the display. The "Navi" function, for example, can be used from the driver's side while a video is watched from the front-passenger side. SPLITVIEW is operated with the remote control from the front-passenger side. To do so, use the cordless headphones. Using the headphones on the correct sides ensures an optimal sound. You can connect your own headphones to a special headphones jack. You can use the remote control to operate them. media can be used on the driver and front-passenger sides as long as they use different media sources. Example: if a medium from the DVD changer is being played on the driver's side, then another medium that is also played from the DVD changer cannot be played separately on the front-passenger side. However, other media can be used at the same time on the front-passenger side, including radio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media Interface, USB or AUX. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, you can both carry out the respective settings. RInternet use is only available at any one time to the driver or the front passenger. A corresponding message appears on the display. RInternet can only be used, if it is set and connected via a telephone on the driver's side. RThe multifunction steering wheel can only be used for functions which relate to the driver's side. Switching SPLITVIEW on/off Points to remember Switching on SPLITVIEW RYou Select System in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to off off. can only adjust the volume for the headphones supplied, directly on the headphones. ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio, TV, video and Internet, for example, may be used with SPLITVIEW. X At a glance 309 The front passenger sees the display of the function last activated. If the switch-on time was longer than 30 minutes previously, the display from the driver's side is shown. The front passenger can now call up the COMAND Online functions with the remote control. X Select ; in the menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol : disappears from the display. Display ; switches to on on. i If COMAND Online has already been switched on, you can also use the remote control to switch SPLITVIEW on and off. Make sure that the SPLITVIEW symbol is set on the remote control thumbwheel (Y page 520). The SPLITVIEW display remains on for approximately 30 minutes after the key has been turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. After this time or after the key has been removed, the settings on the front-passenger side are saved for approximately 30 minutes longer. After this period, reactivation on the frontpassenger side means that the settings from the driver's side will be used. Transferring the driver's website To switch on SPLITVIEW: select Settings from the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to off off. X X Select ® in the main function bar with the remote control. A menu appears with the following options: ROwner's Manual URL RInternet Favourites RMercedes-Benz Apps RInternet Radio RMercedes Mobile website RTransfer Driver's Website X Select Transfer Driver's Website with the remote control. You see the last website called up by the driver. REnter Transferring a destination to the driver Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination from the front-passenger side and transfer this to the driver's side. X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select System from the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the display, and display ; switches to off off. X Select ® in the main function bar with the remote control. A menu appears. X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps with the remote control. You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz Apps. Z COMAND Online Switching off SPLITVIEW System settings 310 Select Google Local Search with the remote control. Using a menu you can select a category for the destination. X Select At current position, position for example. Using a menu you can determine the type of search enquiry. X Select Enter search term: term:, for example. An input field appears. X Enter the destination with the remote control and confirm the entry with b. You see the results list from Google. X Select the exact destination with the remote control. An additional menu appears. X Select Navigate to. to X A window appears on the driver's side with the message: Accept the navigation data from Mercedes-Benz Apps? COMAND Online X Press W. Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display and press W to confirm. X Select Brightness and press W to confirm. X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X System settings Display design Features of your COMAND Online Your COMAND Online display features optimised designs for operation during daytime and night-time hours. You can customise the design by manually selecting day or night design, or opt for an automatic setting. X Press W. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display and press W to confirm. X Select Day design, design Night design or Automatic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A dot indicates the current setting. This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. Display settings Setting the brightness The brightness detected by the display light sensor affects the setting options for this function. Design Explanation Day design The display is set permanently to day design. Night design The display is set permanently to night design. Automatic If the Automatic setting is selected, COMAND Online evaluates the readings from the automatic vehicle light sensor and automatically switches between the display designs. Time settings General notes If COMAND Online is equipped with a navigation system and has GPS reception, COMAND Online automatically sets the time and date. You can change the time in minute increments. The date can also be changed. i If you adjust the time in minute incre- ments, any time zone settings and settings for changing between summer and standard time are lost. Switching between summer and standard time (Y page 311). i The following navigation system functions require the time, time zone and summer/ standard time to be set correctly in order to work properly: Rroute guidance on routes with timedependent traffic guidance Rcalculation of expected time of arrival i Use this function to set the time for all displays in the vehicle. Setting the time/date format X Press the W button. X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Format and press W to confirm. The # symbols show the current settings. X Set the format by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Abbreviation Meaning DD . MM . YY Day . Month . Year (date format, two digits) MM / DD / YYYY Month/Day/Year date format, year (all four digits) YY / MM / DD Year/Month/Day date format, year (two digits) HH : MM (24 hrs) Hours : Minutes (24 hour time format) HH : MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes (AM/PM time format) Adjusting the time zone and switching to summer time X Press W. X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Time zone and press W to confirm. A list of countries or time zones appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the country or time zone by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A time zone list may also be displayed, depending on the country selected. X Select the time zone and press W to confirm. The entry for the Automatic time set‐ tings is accepted. X Subsequent operation depends on whether the automatic changeover function to summer time is available. Z 311 COMAND Online System settings System settings 312 X To change manually: select ON or OFF and press W to confirm. X To change to automatic time: select Automatic and press W to confirm. The entry for the Automatic time set‐ tings is accepted. To switch the automatic time setting off/on: press the W button. X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Press W to confirm the Automatic time settings. settings Switch the automatic time setting off ª or on again O. To switch on: the menu item is switched on as the default setting. If the Automatic time settings is switched off and you switch it on again, the last settings for the time zone and summer time changeover are selected. To switch off: the time zone is deselected and the summer time is switched off. If Automatic is set for the summer time changeover, a prompt will appear asking whether this should be maintained. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. COMAND Online X Setting the time manually X X Press the W button. Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Set time manually and press W to confirm. X Set the time by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The time is accepted. X Text reader settings X Press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Text reader speed and press W to confirm. A list appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. LINGUATRONIC settings Opening/closing the help window The help window provides information in addition to the audible instructions during individualisation and during the subsequent voice control. X Press W. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Linguatronic and press W to confirm. X Select Help window and press W to confirm. You have switched the help window on O or off ª. Individualisation Using individualisation, you can fine-tune LINGUATRONIC to your own voice and thus System settings Bluetooth® settings ported by LINGUATRONIC, English will be selected. X Press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Language and press W to confirm. The list of languages appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND loads the selected language and sets it. General information about Bluetooth® Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transmissions up to approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth® allows, for example, the exchange of vCards. i If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do this, select Eng‐ lish (Arabic map) as the language from the list of languages. Navigation announcements are then made in Arabic. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® X Press the W button. The system menu appears. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Activate Bluetooth and press W to confirm. This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª. Setting the system language This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. If you change the system language, the language for LINGUATRONIC will also be changed. If the selected language is not sup- Assigning a favourites button To assign a favourites button: press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Assign as favourite and press W to confirm. The list of predefined functions appears. The dot # indicates the currently selected function. X Select the function by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The favourites button is assigned the selected function. X Example: to call up a favourite: press the g favourites button. This calls up the predefined function. X Z COMAND Online improve voice recognition. See the separate operating instructions. 313 314 System settings You can select the following predefined functions in a menu: COMAND Online RSplitView on/off: you can switch the on/off screen view for the front passenger on or off. RDisplay off/on: off/on you can switch the display off or on. RFull screen: 'Clock': 'Clock' you can call up the full screen with the clock. R® Menu Menu: you can call up the COMAND Online and Internet functions. R360° camera camera: you can call up the picture of the 360° camera. RFull screen: 'Map': 'Map' you can call up the full screen with the map. RSpoken driving tip: tip you can call up the current driving recommendation. RDisplay traffic messages messages: you can call up traffic reports. RNavigate to 'Home address': address' you can start route guidance to your home address if you have already entered and saved the address (Y page 330). RDetour menu: menu you can call up the Detour menu and then block a section of the route and recalculate the route (Y page 357). RCompass screen screen: you can call up the compass. Importing/exporting data General notes ! When data is being copied to the USB stick or the memory card, the stick or the card must not be removed under any circumstances. Doing so runs the risk of data loss. Using this function, you can: Rtransfer your personal COMAND data from one system/vehicle to another Rmake a backup copy of your personal data (export data) and load it again (import data). Rprotect your data from unwanted export by activating a pin prompt (presetting: deactivated ª). You can either use an SD memory card or a USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as temporary storage. Activating/deactivating PIN protection X Press the W button. The system menu appears. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Import/export data and press W to confirm. X Select Activate PIN protection and press W to confirm. Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protection. When activating PIN protection, you will be prompted to enter a PIN. X System settings 315 Importing/exporting data Enter a 4-digit PIN, select¬and press W to confirm. You will be prompted to enter the PIN again. X Re-enter the PIN, select ¬ and press W to confirm. The PIN prompt now protects your personal data from unwanted export. COMAND Online X i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you have forgotten your PIN, a MercedesBenz service station can deactivate your PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can deactivate PIN protection by resetting your personal COMAND data (Y page 316). X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). or Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory stick) (Y page 472). X Press the W button. The system menu appears. X X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Import/export data and press W to confirm. X Select Import data or Export data and press W to confirm. X Z Vehicle functions 316 COMAND Online mended before handing over or selling the vehicle, for example. Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted. You can also delete music files from the MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music files" function (Y page 486). X Press the W function button. If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt appears when you select Export data. data X Enter the PIN, select¬and press W to confirm. You can now proceed in the same way as if PIN protection was deactivated. X To select a preset: select Memory card or USB storage and press W to confirm. X Select All data and press W to confirm. This function exports all the data to the selected disc. or X X Select the data type and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous entry, select the data type for the export O or not ª. Select Continue and press W to confirm. i Personal music files in the MUSIC REGISTER cannot be saved and imported again using this function. Reset function You can completely reset COMAND Online to the factory settings. Amongst other things, this will delete all personal COMAND Online data. This includes the station presets, entries in the destination memory and in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system and address book entries. In addition, any activated PIN protection, which you have used to prevent unauthorised export of your data, will be deactivated. Resetting is recom- X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Reset and press W to confirm. A warning message and prompt appear asking whether you wish to reset. Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, a prompt will appear again asking whether you really wish to reset to the factory settings. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, a message will be shown. COMAND Online is reset and restarted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Vehicle functions Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. Vehicle functions i Calling up the climate status display is dependent on the climate control system in your vehicle. Example settings for the defrost function (top) and for the climate mode in automatic mode Example: the climate control status display in the COMAND display If you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. Overview of climate control systems, see separate vehicle operating instructions. The climate control status display appears when: X You turn the temperature control and set the temperature. or X You turn the control to set the airflow. or X You press one of the following buttons: K Increases air flow I Decreases air flow ¿ Switches climate control on/off á Switches the ZONE function on/off à Controls the air conditioning automatically ñ Sets the climate control style in automatic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE) _ Sets the air distribution M, P or O Sets the air distribution ¬ Turns on the defrost function X To hide the display: turn or press the COMAND controller. or X Press one of the buttons on COMAND Online. Fuel consumption indicator Overview Depending on the vehicle equipment and the installed engine variant, fuel consumption can be displayed in the COMAND display. If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and the installed engine variant supports it, you can call up other displays (see the separate operating instructions). Calling up/exiting the display Z COMAND Online Climate control status display 317 Vehicle functions 318 To call up the full-screen display: press the W button. X In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the Full screen option is selected. X Press W the COMAND controller. The system display is shown as full screen (without system menu). X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the fuel consumption indicator appears. The COMAND display shows the fuel consumption for the last 15 minutes of the journey. X To exit the full-screen display: press W the COMAND controller. The system menu appears. COMAND Online X Every bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute. The fuel consumption display may differ from the display in the FROM START trip computer in the Trip menu; see the vehicle Owner's Manual. Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control) General notes On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC), you can display some driving systems and additional information in the COMAND display. Calling up drive status regulator (ABC) Press W. In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the display/ selection window is selected. X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the drive status regulator (ABC) appears. The corresponding displays appear in the COMAND display. X X Details on the displays: Rfor vehicles except AMG vehicles; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual Rfor AMG vehicles; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual Exiting the display X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the desired display (clock or fuel consumption) is shown. Seat functions Overview Using the T button next to the COMAND controller or the Seat menu item in the system menu, you can call up different setting functions: The following settings depend on the type of seat and the vehicle model series: Rseat cushion length Rbackrest side bolsters Rlumbar Rbalance Rcushion side bolsters Rdriving dynamics Rmassage i You also can save and recall the current settings of a seat function using the memory button and the corresponding memory position switch; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. The massage function cannot be started or stopped using the memory button. Vehicle functions Selecting the seat 319 Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. X First select the seat which you wish to adjust. This function is not available for all vehicles. X Press the T or W button. X Select Seat and press W to confirm. X To switch to the lower line, for both options slide VÆ the COMAND controller. X Select Driver's seat or Front-pass. seat by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Adjustment functions Adjusting the seat cushion length The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series. This function allows you to adjust the height of the seat cushion. X Select the seat (Y page 319). X Select Seat surface by turning cVd the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. COMAND Online Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series. This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest (4-way lumbar support). X Select the seat (Y page 319). X Select Lumbar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A crosshair appears. You can make two settings: RVertical: to move the point of greatest lumbar support up or down RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of support X Slide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. Adjusting the sides of the seat backrest (backrest side bolsters) The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series. Z Vehicle functions 320 Select the seat (Y page 319). Select Seat sides by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. X Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. X COMAND Online X Select the seat (Y page 319). X Select Backr. sides by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. X Balance The availability of this function depends on the vehicle model series. i For vehicle model series with a dynamic multicontour seat: if the driving dynamics are activated and respond to a change of direction (e.g. when cornering), the backrest side bolsters cannot be temporarily adjusted. Adjusting the seat side bolsters The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series. This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the seat side bolsters. The balance function controls the distribution of heat on the seat backrest and cushion. The balance function influences the currently set heating level of the seat heating; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. X Select the seat (Y page 319). X Select Balance by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears and shows the current setting. Positive values indicate the heat output for the seat backrest, negative values indicate the heat output for the seat cushion. The intensity is indicated by an orange bar in the stylised seat above the scale. Vehicle functions R0 - backrest and seat cushion are heated equally to the maximum level to 3 - the heat output to the seat cushion is reduced in one-third increments R-1 to -3 - the heat output to the backrest is reduced in one-third increments X Slide cVd or turn XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. R1 Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm. The massage function runs for approximately 15 to 25 minutes, depending on the setting. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. X Setting the driving dynamics This function is available on vehicle model series with a dynamic multicontour seat. COMAND Online The values stand for: Massage function The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series. Select the seat (Y page 319). X Select Dynamic seat by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A scale appears. You can select: X Example display (M-Class or GL-Class) X X Select the seat (Y page 319). Select Massage by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A list appears. You can select different types of massage function: R0: Off Slow R2: Slow R3: Fast R4: Fast R1: and and and and 321 R 0: Off level 1 (medium setting) R2: level 2 (high setting) X Slide cVd or turn ZVÆ the COMAND Controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. R 1: gentle vigorous gentle vigorous Z Vehicle functions 322 COMAND Online Resetting all adjustments Select the seat (Y page 319). X Select Reset all by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A query appears. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. After you select Yes Yes, all seat adjustments are reset to the default values (factory setting). X Reversing camera The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. The image from the reversing camera is shown in the COMAND display when reverse gear is engaged if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a reversing camera RCOMAND Online is switched on Rthe Activation by R gear function is activated. If the function is activated, the COMAND display will automatically switch back to the previously selected display as soon as you shift out of reverse gear. i For further information on the reversing camera, see separate vehicle Owner's Manual. X Press the W function button. The system menu appears. X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Rear view camera and press W to confirm. X Select Activation by R gear and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. Night View Assist Plus On vehicles with Night View Assist Plus you can have the image from Night View Assist Plus shown on the COMAND display. X Switch on COMAND Online (Y page 298). X Activate Night View Assist Plus; see the separate operating instructions. The image from Night View Assist Plus appears in the COMAND display. To adjust the brightness: select Bright‐ ness by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Switching automatic activation on/off: select Night View Assist auto. acti‐ vation and press W to confirm. Switch the option on O or off ª. Option switched on: while using other functions e.g. the navigation system, Night View Assist Plus is active in the background. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds in excess of 60 km/h, the Night View image is automatically displayed as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected. Navigation To switch off the display: select Back and press W to confirm or press the % button. Navigation Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. Introduction Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND Online. COMAND Online calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and give way signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations COMAND Online may give incorrect driving recommendations if the data on the digital map does not correspond to the actual conditions. For example, a route may have been diverted or the direction of a one-way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over the system's driving recommendations. General notes Operational readiness of the navigation system In vehicles for certain countries, the navigation system is not operational immediately after delivery. The digital map is not preinstalled. If this is the case, the following message appears in the display after you switch to navigation mode: Please insert the map DVD to acti‐ vate navigation. navigation X To install the digital map: (Y page 382). The navigation system must determine the position of the vehicle before first use or whenever operational status is restored. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while before precise route guidance is possible. GPS reception Correct functioning of the navigation system depends, amongst other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or multi-storey car parks. i The functionality of a roof aerial (tele- phone, GPS) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. Entry restriction On vehicles for certain countries, there is a restriction on entering data. The restriction is active above a vehicle speed of approximately 5 km/h. The restriction is Z COMAND Online X 323 Navigation 324 deactivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops below approximately 3 km/h. When the restriction is active, certain entries cannot be made. This will be indicated by the fact that certain menu items are greyed out and cannot be selected. The following entries are not possible, for example: Rentering the destination town and street a destination via the map Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a town or via a name search Rediting entries Rdirect entry using the number keypad Other entries are possible, however, such as entering POIs in the vicinity of the destination or current position. COMAND Online Rentering Map without the menu; route guidance inactive : Current vehicle position ; Map orientation selected = Map scale selected i Route guidance active means that you have entered a destination and that COMAND Online has calculated the route. The display shows the route, changes of direction and lane recommendations. Navigation announcements guide you to your destination. Route guidance inactive means that no destination has been entered and no route has been calculated yet. Switching to navigation mode Showing/hiding the menu You can show or hide the menu on the map. To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full screen menu item is shown, press W to confirm. or X Press the % back button. The map can be seen in the full-screen display. X Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive : Status bar ; Main function bar = Current vehicle position ? Navigation menu bar Press the Ø function button. The map is displayed with the menu either shown or hidden. or X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The map is displayed with the menu shown. X X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller when the map is shown in fullscreen display. Navigation Setting route type and route options Route settings menu (start of menu) : To select the route type ; To set route options Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Route Settings and press W to confirm. The route settings menu appears. X Select a route type and press W to confirm. A filled circle indicates the current setting. X X Select the route option(s) and press W to confirm. The route options are switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. i If you change the route type and/or the route options while route guidance is active, COMAND Online will calculate a new route. If you change the route type and/or the route options while route guidance is inactive, COMAND Online uses the new setting for the next route guidance. Route guidance active: a destination has been entered and the route has been calculated. Route guidance inactive: no destination has been entered yet and no route has been calculated yet. You can select the following route types: RFast route: COMAND Online calculates a route route with the shortest (minimised) journey time. RDynamic route: route is the same route type as Fast route. route In addition, COMAND Online takes into account any live traffic information or RDS-TMC traffic reports that it receives during route guidance. The navigation system can help you avoid a traffic jam, for example. If a faster route is determined due to a received RDS-TMC traffic announcement, the navigation system changes the route. If possible, it will bypass blocked roads. REco route: route the Eco route (economical route) is a variant of the Fast route type. COMAND Online will attempt to minimise the journey distance at the expense of a slightly increased journey time. RShort route: route COMAND Online calculates a route with the shortest possible (minimised) route distance. i RDS-TMC is not available in all countries. i The route calculated may, for example, include ferry connections, even if the Avoid ferries route option is switched on. In some cases, e.g. when calculating particularly long routes, COMAND Online may not be able to take all the selected route options into account. i To avoid toll roads: route calculation is performed excluding sections (e.g. tunnels, stretches of motorway, inner cities) which require you to pay a fee (toll). To avoid routes requiring a special toll sticker: route calculation is performed excluding route networks (e.g. a country's motorway network) which require you to pay a fee (vignette). A vignette allows temporary use of the route network. Example time limits are 10 days, 2 months or 1 year. Z COMAND Online Basic settings 325 Navigation 326 X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. Destination entry COMAND Online Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. i You can only enter those towns, streets, postcodes etc. that are stored in the digital map. This means that for some countries, you cannot enter postcodes, for example. This step-by-step example of how to enter an address uses the following example data: Germany Berlin Unstrutstraße 1 You can of course enter any country, town, street and house number desired and enter, for example your home address (My address). Calling up the address entry menu You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND Online. Entering a destination by address Introduction Options for destination entry: Renter the country, town/postcode, street and house number Renter the country, town/postcode and street Renter the country, town/postcode and centre Renter the country, town/postcode, street and junction Renter the country and town Country and town are sufficient to start navigating. You can enter either a town or a postcode. By entering further address data such as the street and house number, you can specify the destination more precisely. i You can only enter a street, house num- ber, junction or centre once you have entered a country and a town or postcode. Address entry menu Calling up the address entry menu Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Destination in the lower menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Select Address entry and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears. If you have previously entered a destination, this will be shown in the display. Depending on the sequence in which you enter the address and on the data status of the digital map, some menu items may not be available at all or may not yet be available. Example: after country selection the Street Street, No., Centr. (centre), Junct. (junction), POI No. POI, Save and Start menu items are not yet avail- Navigation Entering the country, city, street, house number by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Slide ZV the COMAND controller once or twice. X Select GERMANY by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears again. GERMANY has now been entered. Entering a town Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Town in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the town list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). X Country list with character bar Enter country Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Country in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the list of countries with the character bar. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). X Town list with character bar Option 1: town list with character bar X Enter BERLIN BERLIN. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). Country list as selection list X To switch to the country list as a selection list: select ¬ in the character bar Z COMAND Online able. The Postcode menu item will not be available unless the digital map contains postcodes. 327 Navigation COMAND Online 328 List of towns as selection list Option 2: town list as selection list X Select BERLIN by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Entries with the G: icon cannot be uniquely assigned. Another selection list is shown. Street list with character bar Option 1: street list with character bar X Enter UNSTRUTSTRASSE UNSTRUTSTRASSE. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). Street list as selection list Option 2: street list as selection list X Select BERLIN(1XXXX) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears again. BERLIN(1XXXX) has now been entered. X Select UNSTRUTSTRASSE by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. UNSTRUTSTRASSE has now been entered. Entering a street Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Street in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the street list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). X Entering a house number Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select No. in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the X Navigation Starting route calculation Address entry menu with destination address : Destination address ; To start route calculation House number list with character bar Option 1: house number list with character bar X Enter 1. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). House number list as selection list Option 2: house number list as selection list X Select 1 by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. 1 has now been entered. You can now have COMAND Online calculate a route to the destination address you have entered, or you can save it. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X In the address entry menu, confirm Start by pressing W. If no other route has been calculated, route calculation starts immediately (option 1). If another route has already been calculated (route guidance is active), a prompt appears (option 2). Option 1 – no route guidance active: route calculation starts. While route calculation is in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Below this, you will see a message, e.g. Calculating fast route.... route... Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins. If the vehicle is travelling on a non-digitised road, the system displays the linear distance to the destination, the direction of the destination and the Off road message. In this case, the display will be greyed out. Option 2 – route guidance is already active: if route guidance is already active, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to terminate the currently active route guidance. Z COMAND Online COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the house number list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). 329 Navigation 330 X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, COMAND Online will stop route guidance and start route calculation for the new destination. If you select No No, COMAND Online will continue with the active route guidance. COMAND Online i Route calculation takes a certain amount of time. The time depends on the distance from the destination, for example. COMAND Online calculates the route using the digital map data. The calculated route may differ from the ideal route, e.g. due to roadworks or incomplete map data. Please also refer to the notes about the digital map (Y page 382). Entering and storing your home address You can either enter your home address for the first time (option 1) or edit a previously stored home address (option 2). X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a town, street and house number (Y page 326). X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Save in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save as "My address" and press W to confirm. COMAND Online stores your home address as My address in the destination memory. X Option 2: proceed as described under "Option 1". A prompt appears asking whether the current home address should be overwritten. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. After selecting Yes Yes, the Saving proce‐ dure successful message appears. Entering a postcode, centre and junction Entering a postcode Entering a postcode will delete a previously entered town. Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Postcode in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the postcode list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). X List of postcodes with character bar Option 1: postcode list with character bar X Enter a postcode. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). Postcode list as selection list Option 2: postcode list as selection list X Select the desired postcode by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. If COMAND Online can assign the postcode to one town unambiguously (e.g. 74172 for NECKARSULM), the address entry menu Navigation 331 appears again. You can now complete the address, e.g. by entering a street. If COMAND Online cannot assign the postcode unambiguously to a specific address, the address entry menu also appears again. The postcode is automatically entered. You can now enter the street for a more precise location. Only streets in the area covered by the entered postcode are available. Start route calculation (Y page 329). Entering a town centre Entering a centre will, for example, delete a previously entered street. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Centr. (centre) in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the centre list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). Centre list as selection list Option 2: centre list as a selection list X Select a centre by turning cVd the COMAND controller. For options 1 and 2: Confirm your selection by pressing W. The address entry menu appears again. The centre selected has been entered. X Start route calculation (Y page 329). X Entering a junction Entering a junction will delete a previously entered house number. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Junct. (junction) in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the junction list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). Town centre list with character bar Option 1: centre list with character bar Enter a centre. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). i In big cities, you can also enter the centres of districts. X Junction list with character bar Z COMAND Online X Navigation 332 Option 1: junction list with character bar COMAND Online X Enter a junction. Entering characters using town input as an example (Y page 305). COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From memory and press W to confirm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). Junction list as selection list Option 2: junction list as selection list Select a junction by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Entries with the G: icon cannot be uniquely assigned. Another selection list is shown. X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears again. The junction selected has been entered. X X Destination memory list with character bar Option 1: destination memory list with character bar X Enter a destination, e.g. "My address". Enter characters (Y page 305). Start route calculation (Y page 329). Selecting a destination from the destination memory An entry named "My address" can always be found at the top of the destination memory. You may wish to assign your home address to this entry, for example, and select it for route guidance. Further information on entering a home address (Y page 330). X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the Destination memory list as selection list Option 2: destination memory list as a selection list X Select My address by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. "My address" has been entered. Navigation X 333 To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins (Y page 329). i Further information on the "Last destinations" memory (Y page 371). Entering a destination using the map X Calling up the map COMAND Online : Starting route calculation To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Entering a destination from the list of last destinations Map with crosshair : Current vehicle position ; Crosshair = Details of the crosshair position ? Map scale selected X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. Last destinations X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Using map and press W to confirm. The map with crosshair is shown. X Select From last destinations and press W to confirm. X Select the desired destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears again. The destination address selected has been entered. Display = depends on the settings selected in "Map information in the display" (Y page 375). If the digital map contains the necessary data, the current road is shown. If the geo-coordinates display is switched on, the geo-coordinates of the crosshair are shown. Z Navigation 334 Moving the map and selecting the destination X Call up the destination entry via the map (Y page 333). X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. Entering a destination using geo-coordinates To set the map scale: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning anti-clockwise zooms in. COMAND Online X X X X To select a destination: press W the COMAND controller. If the crosshair lies outside the digital map, COMAND Online uses the nearest digitised road for route calculation. The The cross‐ hair is outside the digitalised area of the map message is shown. If the crosshair is located over a body of water, you will see the message: The destina‐ tion is located in a body of water. Please select another des‐ tination. Select OK and press W to confirm. If the destination is within the limits of the digital map, COMAND Online attempts to assign the destination to the map. If the destination can be assigned, you will see the address entry menu with the address of the destination. If not, you will see the Destination from map entry. To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Geo-coordinates input menu X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Using geo-coordinates and press W to confirm. The geo-coordinates input menu is shown. You can now enter the latitude and longitude coordinates with the COMAND controller or the number keypad (Y page 305). X To change a value: turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To move the selection within the line: slide XVY the COMAND controller. X To move the selection between lines: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. X To confirm the value: press W the COMAND controller. i If the selected position is outside the digital map, COMAND Online uses the nearest digitised road for route calculation. You will see the The co-ordinates are out‐ side the map message. If the selected position is located over a body of water, you will see the The destination is loca‐ ted in a body of water. Please Navigation Entering a destination using MercedesBenz Apps X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps and press W to confirm. If an Internet connection is established, you will see the message Do you want to accept the navigation data sent via Mercedes-Benz Apps? Street View X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the lower menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Address entry and press W to confirm. X Select icon : in the address entry menu and press W to confirm. If an Internet connection is established, you will see the Street View basic display. X To explore the view of the street: turn cVd or slide XVY, ZVÆ the COMAND controller. X To return to the navigation system: press the % button. X Entering waypoints Introduction You can map the route yourself by entering up to four waypoints. The sequence of the waypoints can be changed at any time. COMAND Online provides a selection of predefined destinations in eight categories for this purpose, e.g. FILLING STATION or COF‐ FEE SHOP. SHOP You can also use the destination entry options to enter waypoints. Creating waypoints Waypoint menu (with destination, without waypoint) X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Online select another destination. message. 335 Navigation 336 X COMAND Online X Select Way points and press W to confirm. The destination is entered into the waypoints menu. The waypoints are not yet entered. Selection Step From last desti‐ nations X Select a destination from the list of last destinations (Y page 333). From POIs X Select a POI (Y page 338). From personal POIs X Enter a destination from the personal POIs (Y page 347). Using map X Enter a destination using the map (Y page 333). Using geo-coor‐ dinates X Enter a destination using the geocoordinates (Y page 334). Confirm Add: by pressing W the COMAND controller. Select the category or Other by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. After selecting a category, the POIs which are available along the route and in the vicinity are displayed. COMAND Online first searches for destinations along the route. If there are no destinations available there, it then continues searching for destinations within a radius of approximately 100 km of the vehicle position. X After selecting Other Other, select one of the destination entry options from the list. X Selection Step Address entry X Enter a destination by address (Y page 326). From memory X Select a destination from the destination memory (Y page 332). X Select POI and press W to confirm. After selecting a POI or entering a destination, the address of the waypoint is displayed. After entering a destination using the map, the address entry menu is displayed. OK is highlighted. X X To accept the waypoint: confirm OK by pressing W. When you have accepted the waypoint, it is entered in the waypoint menu. To display the details: select Details by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To make a call: select Call with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online switches to telephone mode (Y page 397). i This menu item is available if the waypoint has a telephone number and a mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online (Y page 390). X To call up the map: select Map with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X You can move the map and select the destination. X X To store the waypoint in the destination memory: select Presets with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 370). Waypoint menu with two waypoint entries Editing waypoints You can: Rchange waypoints Rchange the sequence in the waypoint menu Rdeleted To change the sequence, at least one waypoint and the destination must be entered. X Select a waypoint in the waypoint menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Z 337 COMAND Online Navigation Navigation 338 To change a waypoint: select Edit from the menu and press W to confirm. X Change the address, e.g. the town and street, and confirm with OK OK. The waypoint menu appears and displays the modified waypoint. COMAND Online X You can change the sequence of the waypoints and the destination. X To change the sequence: from the menu, select Move by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and move the waypoint or destination to the desired position, then press W to confirm. X To delete waypoints: from the menu, select Delete and press W to confirm. Accepting waypoints for the route X Select Start in the waypoint menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The route is calculated with the entered waypoints. i Continue is displayed instead of Start when Calculate alternative routes is activated in the navigation menu (Y page 357). Searching for a filling station when the fuel level is low If the reserve fuel warning is displayed, you will see the message: Fuel tank reserve level. Do you want to start the search for filling stations?. stations? X Select Yes or No No. If you select Yes Yes, the filling station search starts. When the search is complete, a list of the filling stations available along the route or in the vicinity is displayed. If you select No No, the search is cancelled. X Select a filling station and press W to confirm. The address of the filling station is displayed. X Confirm Start by pressing W. The selected filling station is entered into position 1 of the waypoints menu. Route guidance begins. If the waypoints menu already contains four waypoints, a prompt will be displayed, asking you whether you wish to enter the filling station into position 1. If you select Yes, the filling station is transferred into the Yes list and waypoint 4 is deleted. Entering a POI Calling up the POI menu i If a waypoint has been passed during route guidance, the waypoint will be displayed in the waypoint menu with a green arrow. Once the route has been recalculated, the waypoint is deleted from the waypoint menu. Example: POI menu POIs are predefined destinations within categories, e.g. a filling station in the AUTOMO‐ TIVE category. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From POIs and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Choose one of the options and press W to confirm. Further steps are arranged in a table according to the option selected (Y page 340). 339 COMAND Online Navigation Z 340 Navigation COMAND Online Defining the position for the POI search Selection Characteristic Instructions Near destina‐ tion Entry is only possible when route guidance is active. X Current posi‐ tion The system looks for a POI in the vicinity of the current vehicle position. Select Current position in the POI menu and press W to confirm. X Select a POI category (Y page 341). Other town Option 1 After entering a town, the system looks for the X Select Other town in the POI menu and POI within the town. press W to confirm. X Select the country, if desired (Y page 327). X Enter the town. Proceed as described in the "Entering a town" section (Y page 327). X Select a POI category (Y page 341). Select Near destination from the POI menu and press W to confirm. X Select a POI category (Y page 341). X Option 2 X Enter a town in the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select POI and press W to confirm. Select a POI category (Y page 326). X Search by name You can call up all the POIs in the digital map or focus your search on the three previously selected positions. X Search by phone number This function gives you access to all POIs that have a phone number. Select Search by phone number and press W to confirm. You will see a list of phone numbers. X Proceed as described in the "POI list with character bar" section (Y page 342). Select Search by name in the POI menu and press W to confirm. X Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected positions. The POI list with character bar appears. X Proceed as described in the "POI list with character bar" section (Y page 342). X Navigation 341 Example: POI search near the current position POI category list Calling up the POI menu (Y page 338). After entering a town, the POI category list appears after choosing the menu item Near destination, destination Current position or Other town. town X Select a POI category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The G arrow behind an entry shows that other categories are available. X The POI search is cancelled when 50 POIs have been found. COMAND Online searches within a radius of approximately 100 km. Once the search is completed, the POI list is displayed. If COMAND Online does not find any POIs within this radius, it extends its search range to approximately 200 km. If COMAND Online finds one POI within this radius, it finishes the search. POI list Introduction FILLING STATION category selected X Select an entry and press W to confirm. The search for POIs begins in the vicinity of the selected position. Example: POI list The POI list displays the search results for the category in the vicinity of the selected position. Z COMAND Online Searching by POI category 342 Navigation The search results display the following information: arrow that shows the linear direction to the POI Rthe linear distance to the POI Rthe name of the POI X Ran COMAND Online i The arrow and linear distance to the des- tination are not visible if you have entered a POI after entering another town. The arrow is also not shown when searching for a POI in the vicinity of the destination. Depending on the POI selected, COMAND Online uses different reference points in determining the linear distance to the destination: Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis- tance is the distance from the current vehicle position to the POI. Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance is the distance of the POI from the destination entered. Selecting a POI Select the POI in the POI list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The full address of the POI selected appears. To start route calculation: select Start; and press W to confirm. Start X To store an address in the destination memory: select Save = and press W to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 370). X To show the detailed view: select Details ? and press W to confirm. X To make a call: select Call CallA and press W to confirm. COMAND Online switches to telephone mode (Y page 396). i This menu item is available if the POI has a telephone number and a mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online (Y page 390). X To call up the map: select Map B and press W to confirm. X You can move the map and select the destination (Y page 333). X POI list with character bar : POI with address ; To start route calculation = To store an address in the destination memory ? To display details A To make a call (when available) B To display a POI's position on the map Further information on searching via POI categories (Y page 341). Example: search by name in the vicinity of the destination If you have selected Search by name in the POI menu and then defined the position for the search (Y page 340), the POI list with character bar appears. Navigation X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. If there are POIs, you will see a message to this effect. i You also see this message if you have selected the No symbols menu item under "Map display" (Y page 374). X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller. X To select a POI: select Next or Previous and press W to confirm. X To show details for the selection: select Details and press W to confirm. X To change to the map: slide ZV the COMAND controller. You can move the map and select the map section. X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the POI should be used as the destination. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. Selecting a POI using the map i Continue is displayed instead of Start POI on the map You can select POIs that are available in the selected (visible) section of the map. The POI is highlighted on the map, you will see further information on the upper edge of the display. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Select Guide in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If POIs are available: Depending on the map scale selected, POI icons appear on the map. The scale at which the icons are displayed on the map varies according to the icon. You can select the icons that you want COMAND Online to display. when Calculate alternative routes is activated in the navigation menu (Y page 357). Personal POIs General notes i The use of personal POIs to display traffic monitoring installations is not permitted in all countries. Please observe the countryspecific regulations and always drive at a suitable speed. Z COMAND Online Depending on your selection, you can select all available POIs on the digital map or the POIs in the vicinity of the selected position. X Proceed as described in "Searching for a phone book entry" (Y page 402). If COMAND Online can assign the characters entered to one entry unambiguously, the address entry appears automatically. 343 Navigation 344 Settings Selection Calling up the "Personal POIs" menu ª Not Clas‐ Standard entry for personal POIs sified COMAND Online ª COMAND Online To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Personal POIs and press W to confirm. Displaying personal POIs on the map Explanation Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you have imported via the online function (Y page 446). If you have created your own categories (e.g. "Café", "Top 10"), they are also displayed (Y page 345). If you have created your own categories (such as "Taiwan"), they are also displayed (Y page 345). X Select a category and press W to confirm. The icon display is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. i The icons are shown in these map scales: R20 m m R100 m R200 m R500 m R50 Visual information for personal POIs The personal POIs are shown on the map with an icon according to their category. X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 344). X Select Display personal POIs on map in the menu and press W to confirm. You can select different categories. If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI, this is highlighted on the map. The display for the corresponding category must be activated for this. Navigation 345 Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 344). X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Vis‐ ual warning for personal POIs and press W to confirm. The menu displays the available categories. X Select a category and press W to confirm. This will switch the visual warning for all personal POIs of this category on O or off ª, depending on the previous setting. Acoustic notification for personal POIs A gong sounds when the vehicle is approaching a personal POI. The function for the corresponding category must be activated for this. X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 344). X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Acous‐ tic notification for personal POIs and press W to confirm. The menu displays the available categories. X Select a category and press W to confirm. This will switch the acoustic notification for all personal POIs of this category on O or off ª, depending on the previous setting. Managing categories for personal POIs To create a new category: select New and press W to confirm. X Enter the name of the category. Character entry (Y page 303). X Select the ¬ symbol and press W to confirm. A list with symbols appears. You can assign a symbol to the category. X X Select an icon by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You have created a new category with a name and icon. This category appears when selecting the display on the map or when selecting the destination. To rename a category, to change an icon: select Rename or Change icon and press W to confirm. X Proceed as described under "To create a new category". X To delete a category: select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the category should be deleted. i If you delete a category, all POIs of this category are also deleted. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the category will be deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 344). X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Man‐ age categories for personal POIs and press W to confirm. X Z COMAND Online X Navigation COMAND Online 346 Managing personal POIs X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 344). X Select Manage personal POIs in the menu and press W to confirm. X Select Not classified, classified COMAND Online or your own category and press W to confirm. X Select a personal POI and press W to confirm. The personal POI is displayed. Observe the additional information on managing personal POI categories (Y page 347): RRenaming RChanging the category RDeleting Saving personal POIs There are three ways of saving personal POIs. You must insert an SD memory card to do so. The No memory card message otherwise appears. Personal POIs and routes are saved on the memory card in the same data format in which the geographical data is stored. This format is based on the open GPX (GPS Exchange) format. Option 1 Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X Hide the menu to show the map in full screen mode (Y page 324). X Press W the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds. The current position of the vehicle is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card in the Not classified category. i The crosshair position is saved in the scrolling map function (Y page 373). X X Option 2 Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Select Save position as personal POI or Save crosshair pos. as personal POI ("Move map" function active) and press W to confirm. The list of personal categories appears. X Select a category and press W to confirm. X Enter the name for the personal POI. Character entry (Y page 303). X Option 3 Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Save from the address entry menu and press W to confirm. X Select Save as personal POI and press W to confirm. X Select a category. X Enter the name. The current address is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card. X X Importing personal POIs via the online function You can import personal POIs (destinations, routes) via the online function (Y page 446). When importing, you can choose whether to write files to the SD memory card or to file them in the address book. The imported personal POIs have their own icon and are filed in the COMAND Online category. Navigation 347 X X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From personal POIs and press W to confirm. The categories of personal POIs appear. Selection Explanation Not classi‐ fied Standard entry for personal POIs. COMAND Online Personal POIs which you have imported via the online function (Y page 446). Coffee shop Icon and category that you have created yourself (Y page 345). In the example, the COMAND Online category is selected. The personal POIs received are displayed. X Select a personal POI and press W to confirm. X To rename a personal POI: select Rename and press W to confirm. X To change the category: select Change category and press W to confirm. To change to the map: select Map and press W to confirm. The position of the personal POI is shown in the map. i An icon is displayed according to the "Displaying personal POIs on the map" setting (Y page 344). X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. If route guidance has been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to accept the personal POI as the destination. X Z COMAND Online Selecting as the destination Navigation 348 If route guidance has not been activated, route calculation for the personal POI will start immediately. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the personal POI is accepted as the destination. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. To make a call: select Call and press W to confirm. COMAND Online switches to telephone mode (Y page 398). i Call is available if the personal POI has a telephone number and a mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online (Y page 390). X To delete a personal POI: select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the POI. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the personal POI is deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. COMAND Online X You can download available updates from the Mercedes-Benz webshop. i You can also subsequently obtain travel guide data from the Mercedes-Benz Accessory webshop. The travel guide offers you tourist destinations and routes: Rin the vicinity of the current vehicle position Ralong the calculated route the vicinity of the destination Rthrough selection on the map Ron a specific topic, for example, Paris, the Alps or German wine routes You can select: Rin Rwhich travel guide data on the map can be shown and selected (e.g. restaurants and tourist routes) Rwhether information on tourist destinations is read out as you approach them Activating/deactivating travel guide data ViaMichelin travel guide Overview Categories for the display of travel guide data on the map If COMAND Online offers the ViaMichelin travel guide in navigation mode, you can select tourist destinations, including routes. In this case, the travel guide data is on a SD memory card. First place the SD memory card in the SD card slot (Y page 472). Travel guide data is stored in categories, such as e.g. restaurants or tourist routes. In the menu, you can select which travel guide categories are shown on the map, and therefore which can be selected. You can also determine whether available information on the tourist destination of a particular category is acoustically provided as you approach it. Navigation Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Travel guide and press W to confirm. X No destination has been entered yet: select Current position, position Using map or Topics. Topics X A route has already been entered: you can also select Along the route and Near destination. destination X Using the guide Calling up the travel guide Using destination entry Selecting search position for travel guide (using guide) To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu bar: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Guide in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Selecting search position for travel guide (using destination entry) To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu bar: press W the COMAND controller. X Z COMAND Online To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu bar: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Travel guide and press W to confirm. X Select Map icons or Acoustic announcement and press W to confirm. The menu displays the available categories. X Select a category and press W to confirm. Switch the category on O or off ª. If you selected Map icons and switched on a category, you can select the available tourist destinations of that category on the map. If you selected Acoustic announcement and switched on a category, you hear information as you approach a tourist destination. The information must be available as an audio file for this destination. X 349 Navigation 350 Select Travel guide and press W to confirm. X No destination has been entered yet: select Current position, position Using map or Topics. Topics X A route has already been entered: you can also select Along the route and Near destination. destination X COMAND Online Selecting topics You can choose from a variety of topics. Topics can be listed based on places (e.g.countryside) or on content (e.g. wine guide). X Call up the travel guide (Y page 349). X Select Topics Topics. A list appears. X Select a topic and press W to confirm. The system selects a map view that allows the tourist destinations and routes for the topic to be displayed. X Select a tourist destination or route on the map and press W to confirm. Selecting a destination or a route on the map Menu item Explanation Settings In the settings, you can select which selectable travel guide data is shown on the map. Prev. (previous) or Next Highlights the previous or next symbol on the map. Details Shows detailed information about the destination or route. You may also use further functions, e.g. calling the hotel or listening to an audio file about the place of interest (if available). Map Switches to the map with the crosshair. You can slide the crosshair and change the map scale. Start Begins route calculation for the selected destination. Exploring the destination or route Before the route calculation, you can call up useful information on the selected destination. i Not every tourist destination or route has images, texts or audio files available. To select tourist destinations/routes, first select the search position and then the corresponding symbol on the map. X Call up the travel guide (Y page 349). X Select a search position, e.g. Using map. map The map appears. X Select a menu item and press W to confirm (see table). Destination address is displayed (example) Navigation X Rplaying X Rcalling To display images: select Images and press W to confirm. One or more photos of the tourist destination are shown. X To display text information: select Info and press W to confirm. A short text provides interesting details about the tourist destination. X To play an audio file: select M and press W to confirm. You hear useful information about the tourist destination. X To stop playback, select ¯ and press W to confirm. X To call the destination: select Call and press W to confirm. If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online, the telephone function is activated and the call is connected (Y page 398). X an audio file up the destination X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Route guidance Important notes COMAND Online calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following, for example: If you have selected a tourist route, the map shows an overview of the route. Above, the following functions are described: lights and give way signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations COMAND Online may give differing driving recommendations if the data on the digital map does not correspond to the actual conditions, such as if the road layout has changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over system driving recommendations. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated (Y page 329). COMAND Online guides you to your destination by means of navigation commands in the form of audible navigation announcements and route guidance displays. The route guidance displays can be seen if the display is switched to navigation mode. If you do not follow the navigation announcements or if you leave the calculated route, COMAND Online automatically calculates a new route to the destination. If the digital map contains the corresponding information, the following applies: Rdisplaying Rduring X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. Example: tourist route is displayed Rshowing pictures text information Rtraffic Rstop route guidance, COMAND Online tries to avoid roads with restricted access. Z COMAND Online Call up the travel guide (Y page 349). Select a search position, e.g. Using map. map The map appears. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The destination address is shown. 351 352 Navigation Those roads, for example, that are closed to through-traffic. Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed on Sundays and public holidays) are considered for route guidance on days when they are open. For this purpose, the relevant times must be correctly stored in the database. COMAND Online Displaying during route guidance Changing direction Changes of direction have three phases: RPreparation phase phase RChange-of-direction phase Example: announcement phase : Next road ; Point at which the change of direction RAnnouncement = ? A B takes place (light blue dot, shown in both the left and right half of the display) Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction Change of direction (turn right here) Distance to the next change of direction Route (blue line, shown in both the left and right half of the display) i The filled-in section of visual display for distance = gets shorter the nearer you get to the announced change of direction. Example: preparation phase : Point at which the change of direction takes place (light blue dot) ; Next road = Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri- angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel) ? Current road Display ? depends on the setting selected under "Map information in the display" (Y page 375). COMAND Online prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced by the Prepare to turn right message. You see the full-screen map. COMAND Online announces the imminent change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced beforehand by the message: In 400 metres turn right onto the A81 . The display is now split into two sectors. In the left half, you see the normal map view. The right-hand half shows: Ran enlarged section of the area around the junction (crossing zoom) or Ra 3D image of the road's course with the route indicating the next change of direction Navigation 353 Example of a display without a change of direction angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel) ; Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction = Distance to the next change of direction COMAND Online announces the imminent change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced 40 metres before the change of direction with the Now turn right message. The display is split into two halves, as in the announcement phase. Once the change of direction is completed, COMAND Online automatically switches back to full-screen display. : ; = ? A COMAND Online Example: change-of-direction phase : Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri- Route (highlighted in blue) Current vehicle position Current road Map orientation selected Map scale selected Lane recommendations Example: lane recommendations : Point of the next change of direction ; Point of the change of direction after next = Direction display, number of junction and of motorway ? Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction Example display: roundabout A Distance to the next change of direction B Recommended lane (dark blue) C Next change of direction (in this case, exit to the right) D Possible lanes (light blue) Z 354 Navigation E Non-recommended lanes (light brown or light grey) F Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri- COMAND Online angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel) On multi-lane roads, COMAND Online can display lane recommendations for the next change of direction. The corresponding data must be available on the digital map. COMAND Online displays lane recommendation B based on the next two changes of direction. The number of lanes applies to the point at which the next change of direction is required. i The multifunction display also shows lane recommendations. Only the recommended lanes are displayed here; see separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Display and description of lane recommendations Lane Day design Night design Recommended lane Dark In this lane, you will blue be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. Light blue Possible lane Light In this lane, you will blue only be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane. Dark blue Non-recommended lane In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane. Light Grey brown or light grey i The colours used in the lane recommen- dation display vary depending on whether day or night design is switched on. : New lane (dark blue) Navigation Example: day design : The displayed lane recommendations Navigation announcements Repeating navigation announcements Navigation messages should guide you during the journey without distracting you from traffic conditions or driving. Always use this function as a guide instead of the map display. The symbols or the map display could distract you from traffic conditions and driving. If you have missed an announcement, you can call up the current announcement at any time. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X apply to this position (light blue circle) Select + in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switching navigation announcements off/on X To switch off: press the 8 button during an announcement. You will briefly see the message: The guidance instructions have been muted. X Example: night design To switch on: press W the COMAND controller. Select + in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i COMAND Online automatically switches the navigation announcements back on when: X Rit receives traffic reports using live traffic Example: lane recommendations at a motorway junction Observe the route guidance information shown in the multifunction display, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. information or RDS-TMC during dynamic route guidance and recalculates the route accordingly (Y page 363) Ryou calculate a new route Ryou switch COMAND Online on again or start the engine Z COMAND Online During the change of direction, additional lanes may appear. These are displayed differently. 355 Navigation 356 COMAND Online Switching announcements and audio fadeout on/off X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Announcements and press W to confirm. A menu appears. You can activate/deactivate the following functions: street names Street names are announced during route guidance. RAudible info during a phone call During a phone call, navigation announcements and traffic reports are audible in the background. RAudio fadeout The volume of an active audio or video source is automatically reduced during a navigation announcement. RReserve fuel level Once you have reached reserve fuel level, you will see a query asking whether you wish to start the search for a filling station (Y page 338). X Select the function and press W to confirm. Switch the function on O or off ª. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Announce street names and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. RAnnounce Setting the volume manually Adjust the volume using the q control knob during a navigation announcement. or X Select + in the map view with the menu shown and adjust the volume using the q control knob. X Announcing street names If this function is switched on, the name of the street into which you should turn is announced. Announcements are not made in the chosen language in all countries. They are made when relevant street names for the selected language are available in the database. Street names may be announced in the following languages: RDanish RGerman REnglish RFrench RDutch RPortuguese RSwedish Ending route guidance Cancelling or continuing route guidance X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Dest. in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To cancel route guidance: select Cancel route guidance and press W to confirm. or X To continue route guidance: select Con‐ tinue route guidance and press W to confirm. COMAND Online calculates the route. Navigation i The total length of the section that can be blocked is defined by the digital map. The menu items are available accordingly. X To start route calculation: select Start and press W to confirm. X Influencing route guidance Avoiding a section of the route blocked by a traffic jam : Length of the blocked route section ; Name of route section = Blocked route section This function blocks a section of the route ahead of you. You can set the length of the blocked route section. If possible, COMAND Online calculates a detour around the blocked section of the route. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Detour and press W to confirm. X To block a section of the route: select Longer or Shorter repeatedly and press W to confirm until the desired section has been selected. X To delete the blocked section: select Delete while the message is shown and press W to confirm. COMAND Online calculates the route without the block. Selecting an alternative route With the "Alternative route" function, routes other than the original one can be calculated. Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current settings for the route type and route options and are shown with a dark blue line (Y page 325). Route 4 is the economic route (eco route) and is shown with a green line. On the right-hand side, you will see information on the currently selected alternative route, e.g. distance, estimated remaining driving time and estimated time of arrival. Route sections used (e.g. motorways, tunnels) are displayed as symbols. Option 1 X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Alternative route and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Online Destination or area of destination reached When you reach your destination, COMAND Online displays a chequered flag and route guidance is automatically ended. If the destination is not in close proximity to a digitised street, the Area of destination reached message appears when the destination is reached. 357 Navigation 358 X To start route guidance using the selected alternative route: select Start and press W to confirm. COMAND Online begins route guidance on the selected alternative route. Route information COMAND Online Displaying destination information Example: destination information Examples for route 1 (above) and route 4 (eco route) Option 2 X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Calculate alternative route and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. Function activated: alternative routes are calculated directly after the destination is entered. Menu functions X To select the next or previous alternative route: select Next or Previous and press W to confirm. The example shows information on distance, estimated time of arrival and estimated remaining driving time to the O destination and two way points. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Destination information and press W to confirm. Destination information is displayed. X To call up further destination information: turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To close the destination information: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the % back button. i You can display destination information for the destination, for both way points and the intermediate stop, if they are part of the route. Navigation Route overview You can use the route overview to move along the active route section by section and view information and details about each section of the route. You can see information relevant to the section of the route, such as the length of the road section you will be driving along and the road name. The highlighted route section is marked in white with a red border on the map. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Route browser and press W to confirm. X To close the route overview: select Back and press W to confirm. Route demonstration You can see the route before starting your journey. This function is only available when the vehicle is stationary. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Route demonstration and press W to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears. X To get to the destination: press W to confirm the highlighted symbol. X To stop the route demonstration: confirm the Ë symbol by pressing W. To view the next or previous route section: select Next or Previous and press W to confirm. i If the first or last route section is highlighted, you cannot select Previous or Next. Next X To zoom in or out of the map: select N or M and press W to confirm. X Z COMAND Online If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online and a phone number is included in the destination information, you can call it (Y page 390). 359 Navigation 360 This is often the case with routes which are drawn up using other map data and imported via the online function, e.g.: Rroutes from the Google™ Local Search (Y page 442) Rroutes from the destination/route download (Y page 446) COMAND Online Calling up the Routes menu Example: route demonstration stopped : Display of street name and city when route demonstration is paused ; Distance of the crosshair from current vehicle position X To get to the current vehicle position: press W to confirm the symbol for the current vehicle position. To change the map scale: select Scale and press W to confirm. The scale bar appears. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Recording the route X X Notes If you have activated COMAND Online and the SD memory card has been inserted, you should not take it out of the slot. You can store up to 100 routes. When you record a route, COMAND Online uses so-called support points and displays the route as a series of lines. If the route is then calculated, COMAND Online attempts to align the recorded route with the digital map. The support points of the route may not be on a digitised road. X X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Routes Routes. Starting/ending recording : Recording (REC is red) Navigation X X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 360). To start recording : select Start recording in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The route is recorded and entered in a list. # REC is displayed in red :. To view a demonstration of the route on the map: select Demo by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears. X Proceed as described in the "Route demonstration" section (Y page 359). To end recording: select Stop recording in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Displaying and editing the recorded route Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 360). X Select List in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Previously recorded routes are displayed. X X Select a route and press W to confirm. The map appears with a menu. The recorded route is shown on the map with a blue dotted line. To begin route calculation: select Start in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online attempts to align the recorded route with the digital map. Changing route names and icons X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To change the route name: select Rename and press W to confirm. i The name cannot be changed while the vehicle is in motion. X To change the icon: select Change Icon and press W to confirm. X Please see further information on managing categories for personal POIs (Y page 345). To change direction for route calculation: you can set the icon for the route to the starting point or to the destination, thereby changing the direction for route calculation. During route calculation, one-way streets or turn restrictions, for example, are taken into account. Therefore, the outward and return routes may differ from each other. Z COMAND Online X 361 Navigation 362 X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Route guidance to a destination that is not on a digitised road To delete a route: select Delete in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the route should be deleted. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the route will be deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. COMAND Online X Scanning the memory The SD memory card is inserted. X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 360). X Select Memory Info in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A message such as Off-road route mem‐ ory 90% full. is displayed. Off-road and off-map Notes The navigation system may guide you to offroad routes that your vehicle cannot drive on without causing damage to the tyres or wheels or the vehicle itself. The driver alone is responsible for determining the suitability of the route. The condition of the off-road routes may vary, and their drivability may be affected by different factors such as time of day, season and current weather conditions, which the navigation system cannot judge or take into account. Example: route guidance to an off-road destination : Off-road destination ; Off-road route section (dashed blue) = Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri- angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel) COMAND Online can guide you to destinations which are within the area of the digital map, but which are not themselves recorded on the map. These destinations are known as off-road destinations, which you can enter using the map, for example. In these cases, COMAND Online guides you for as long as possible with navigation announcements and displays on roads known to the system. Shortly before you reach the last known point on the map, you will hear the "Area of destination reached" announcement. The display shows a direction arrow with the linear distance to the destination. Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination If the vehicle position is within the area covered by the digital map, but the map does not contain any information about that location, the vehicle is in an off-road location. COMAND Online is also able to guide you to a destination even from an off-road location. At the start of route guidance, you will see the Off road message, an arrow and the dis- Navigation Route guidance from an off-map location to a destination If the vehicle position is outside the area covered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in an off-map location. COMAND Online is also able to guide you to a destination even from an off-map location. At the start of route guidance, you will see the Off road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the destination. The route is highlighted blue from the nearest road known to the system. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way. Off-road during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle position on the digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an offroad position. In the display, you will see the Off road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the destination. As soon as the system can assign the vehicle position to the map again, route guidance continues in the usual way. Dynamic route guidance Traffic report services You can receive traffic reports from Live Traffic Information or RDS-TMC and take them into consideration for dynamic route guidance. The simultaneous use of both services is not possible. Traffic reports from Live Traffic Information Conditions: Requipped with COMAND Online module with activated, integrated SIM card This service can be used to receive up-to-date and accurate traffic information via the Internet connection available in the vehicle. Data roaming is also available in selected European countries. Advantages of Live Traffic Information Rcommunication Rgenerates and transmits a large number of traffic reports Rtraffic data is available shortly after starting the vehicle Rtraffic situation is updated every two to three minutes Raccurate information ensures optimum route guidance and reliably predicted arrival times Live Traffic Information is a subscription service. If your vehicle is equipped with COMAND Online, this service is available for free for the first three years from the date of manufacture on selected European markets. The Live Traffic Information logo will appear in the top right of the display if your subscription is valid and a server connection is available. To call up the subscription status, see the description below. The communication module automatically connects to the Internet once the ignition has been switched on. i No traffic data can be received unless wireless network coverage is available. Z COMAND Online tance to the destination. The arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination. The route is highlighted blue, starting from the last recognised street the vehicle was on before it left the map. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way. 363 Navigation COMAND Online 364 The traffic information is provided by a traffic data supplier and is based on various sources and data. It is necessary to regularly transmit information on your vehicle's position to Daimler AG if you wish to use Live Traffic Information. This data is then made anonymous and forwarded to the traffic data suppliers. This anonymous data is used to transmit all traffic reports to the vehicle that are relevant for the current vehicle position. On the other hand, as the vehicle acts as a traffic flow sensor, the quality of the traffic reports is enhanced (source for Floating Car Data). The anonymous data is not stored permanently. i If you do not wish to send your vehicle's positions, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Please note that by switching off this function, Live Traffic Service will also be automatically deactivated. Calling up subscription information To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Traffic in the navigation bar by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Subscription information by pressing the W COMAND controller. The displayed messages depend on the subscription status. Subscription is valid: Your subscrip‐ tion is valid until: No subscription available: You have no valid subscription. Please refer to the Owner's Manual for further information. X To confirm with OK OK: press W the COMAND controller. X Extending or entering a subscription X X Call up the online shop (App Store). Enter data. Traffic reports via FM RDS-TMC An RDS-TMC radio station transmits RDSTMC traffic reports in addition to the radio programme. COMAND Online can receive RDS-TMC traffic reports and take them into consideration for dynamic (traffic-dependent) route guidance. This means the navigation system can guide you around a traffic jam, for example. There may also be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. The respective traffic data being received appears on the top right of the display with the symbol "TMC". If there is no reception, no symbol is displayed. i FM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries. Switching dynamic route guidance on/off If Dynamic route or Eco route is selected as the route type, traffic reports are taken into account for route guidance. The Fast route and Short route route types do not take traffic reports into account for route guidance. Selecting route type (Y page 325). i COMAND Online calculates a new route if you change the route type setting with route guidance active. If you change the route type setting when route guidance is inactive, COMAND Online uses the new setting for the next route guidance. Navigation Traffic reports on the map X 365 To set the map scale: turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired map scale is set. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning anti-clockwise zooms in. Displaying traffic reports Calling up traffic reports To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. Example: traffic reports on the map RDS-TMC symbols : Traffic jam on the route ; Slow-moving traffic on the route = Road blocked ? Road blocked A Slow-moving traffic (yellow vehicles along X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If network coverage is not available for Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC, or there are no traffic reports, you will see a message to this effect. X To close the message: confirm OK by pressing W the COMAND controller. Traffic symbol information the affected route) B Traffic jam (red vehicles along the affec- ted route) i The display shows the entire affected route section with the corresponding symbols, regardless of how long the incident actually is. The symbols are placed on the side of the carriageway affected by the incident. COMAND Online can show certain traffic incidents on the map. The displays can be shown in map scales of 50 m to 20 km. Example display : Affected section of motorway ; Symbol for incident (traffic jam in the example shown) = Symbol display for the section of route affected X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. Z COMAND Online X Navigation 366 X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Select Traffic in the navigation system menu by turning the c COMAND controller Vd and press W to confirm. X Select Traffic symbol information and press W to confirm. X To show the next/previous incident: select Next or Previous (if available) and press W to confirm. X To show the detailed view: select Details and press W to confirm. X To scroll the map: select Map and press W to confirm. You can move the map to enable further traffic reports to be displayed (Y page 373). COMAND Online X : ; = ? A Traffic jam Slow-moving traffic Warning message Road blocked Construction site X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Displaying reports on the route Select Traffic in the navigation system menu by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Messages on the route and press W to confirm. The traffic report is displayed. If there is more than one traffic report for a section of the route, this is indicated by 1/2, for example. X : Country designation, road number, direc- tion and number/total number of reports for the affected road (1/2) ; Section of the road to which the traffic report applies = Traffic report ? Type of traffic report (warning) X To scroll within a report or to access the next report: turn c Vd the COMAND controller. X To exit the report: slide XVY the COMAND controller once or several times. Navigation Displaying all traffic reports 367 You can select from the following text reader properties: Rlanguage (Y page 313) reader speed (Y page 312) X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. Example: list showing all currently available traffic reports X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display all messages and press W to confirm. A list is shown containing all roads, areas or regions affected by traffic reports. Roads, areas or regions not on the route also appear in the list. X To show a traffic report: select a road, an area or a region and press W to confirm. The traffic report is displayed. If there is more than one traffic report for a section of the route, this is indicated by 1/2, for example. You can find an example of a traffic report here: (Y page 366). X To exit the report: slide XVY the COMAND controller once or several times. Reading out traffic reports on the route Calling up traffic reports The text reader function is only available when route guidance is active. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Read out all messages on route and press W to confirm. COMAND Online reads out the messages in sequence. i The Read out all messages on route menu item has no function if there are no reports relating to the route. X To cancel the read-aloud function: select Cancel read-aloud function and press W to confirm. The current traffic report is read out to the end and then the function is deactivated. or X Briefly press the 8 button. The function is deactivated immediately. i COMAND Online interrupts the readaloud function automatically as it recalculates the route following a new RDS-TMC traffic report. X Automatic read-aloud function You can have TMC traffic reports on your route read aloud automatically. Announcements are made as you approach traffic incidents. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X To switch the automatic read-aloud function on/off: select Traffic in the navigation system menu bar by turning the Z COMAND Online Rtext Navigation 368 cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Option 1: destination memory list with character bar Select Read traffic messages auto‐ matically and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. Destination memory COMAND Online Home address (My address) Entering the home address via address entry X Proceed as described under "Adopting an address book entry as a home address" (Y page 368). Confirm My Address by pressing W. X To enter the home address for the first time: confirm New entry by pressing W. X To change the home address: select Change in the menu showing the home address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm New entry by pressing W. X In both cases, enter the home address as a destination, e.g. as a town, street and house number (Y page 327). Then, save the home address (Y page 330). Adopting an address book entry as a home address X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From memory and press W to confirm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). : Entry containing data that can be used for navigation ; To call up options X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the destination memory list appears as a selection list. Option 2: destination memory list as a selection list The My Address entry is listed as the first entry in the destination memory. X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i If you have not yet entered any characters, My Address is automatically highlighted in the selection list. If no home address has been stored yet, you can now assign an address book entry. If a home address already exists, it is displayed and you can alter it. Navigation offered the option of entering the home address for the first time. You can then save the home address without having to start route guidance. X To enter the home address for the first time: select Assign to address book entry and press W to confirm. X Select Home Home, Work or Not classified and press W to confirm. To change the home address: select Change and press W to confirm. X Select Assign to address book entry and press W to confirm. entry you are also i If you select New entry, offered the option of changing the home address by entering an address. You can then save the home address without having to start route guidance. X X Select Home Home, Work or Not classified and press W to confirm. In both cases, you will see the address book either with the character bar or as a selection list. Select the address book entry (Y page 413). X To select: press W the COMAND controller. If there is no existing home address, COMAND Online saves the entry. You will see a message and then the address menu with the selected address. Start is highlighted automatically. If a home address has already been stored, you will see a prompt asking you whether the My Address entry should be overwritten. X X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, COMAND Online overwrites the destination. You will see a message and then the address menu with the selected address. Start is highlighted automatically. If you select No No, the list will appear again. Selecting the home address for route guidance X Proceed as described under "Selecting a destination from the destination memory" (Y page 332). Saving a destination General notes This function also stores the destination in the address book. When the address book is full, no destinations can be saved in the destination memory. You must first delete address book entries (Y page 413). After destination entry The destination has been entered and is shown in the address entry menu (Y page 326). X Select Save by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 370). X During route guidance To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save destination and press W to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 370). From the list of previous destinations To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Online entry you are also i If you select New entry, 369 Navigation COMAND Online 370 X Select From last Destinations and press W to confirm. The list of previous destinations appears. X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The destination address is shown. X Select Save and press W to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 370). Selecting storage options Once you have chosen one of the following options for storing a destination, you can specify storage options: destination entry (Y page 369) route guidance (Y page 369) Rfrom the list of previous destinations (Y page 333) Example: saving a destination with a name : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar X To save the destination with a name: select Save with name and press W to confirm. X Select a category, e.g. Home Home, and press W to confirm. The input menu appears with data fields and the character bar. Rafter Rduring Proceed as described under "Character entry (navigation)" (Y page 305). X Then select ¬ and press W to confirm. COMAND Online stores the destination under the name entered. X Storage options X To save the destination without a name: select Save without name and press W to confirm. COMAND Online stores the destination in the destination memory and uses the address as the destination name. An address with complete address data that is suitable for navigation can be assigned to a pre-existing address book entry. X To assign an address to an address book entry: select Assign to address book entry and press W to confirm. X Select a category, e.g. Home Home, and press W to confirm. You will see the address book either with the character bar or as a selection list. X Select the address book entry (Y page 413). COMAND Online stores the data if the address book entry selected does not yet contain navigable address data. If the selected address book entry already contains navigable address data, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing data. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, COMAND Online stores the data. You can now start route guidance to this address directly from the address book (Y page 415). To save the destination as My address: select Save as "My Address" and press W to confirm. COMAND Online stores the destination in the destination memory as My Address. Address If the selected address book entry already contains address data that can be used for navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing data. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the entry is overwritten. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X To save the destination as a personal POI: insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). X Select Save as personal POI and press W to confirm. X Select a category. X Enter the name. The current address is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card. X Deleting a destination or the home address X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From memory and press W to confirm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2). X Option 1: destination memory list with character bar: enter characters using the character bar (Y page 305). X Option 2: destination memory list as selection list: select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the address data of the selected entry. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the destination. Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, COMAND Online deletes the destination. You will see a message to this effect. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned to an address book entry, COMAND Online will also delete this data from there. If the corresponding address book entry does not contain any further data, such as telephone numbers, COMAND Online deletes the entire address book entry. X Last destinations Introduction COMAND Online automatically stores the previous destinations for which route calculation has been started. If the memory is full, COMAND Online deletes the oldest destination. You can also save a destination from the list of previous destinations in the destination memory. It will be stored there permanently. Z 371 COMAND Online Navigation Navigation 372 Storing a destination permanently in the destination memory X Proceed as described in the "From the list of previous destinations" section (Y page 333). Storing the vehicle position in the list of previous destinations To switch on navigation mode: press the Ø function button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save vehicle position and press W to confirm. COMAND Online stores the current vehicle position as a destination in the list of previous destinations. COMAND Online X Storing the crosshair position in the list of previous destinations A crosshair appears on the map if you have moved the map manually (Y page 373). You can store the crosshair position as a destination in the list of previous destinations. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save crosshair position and press W to confirm. Deleting a previous destination To switch on navigation mode: press the Ø function button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the X COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select From last destinations and press W to confirm. The list of previous destinations appears. X Select the desired destination and press W to confirm. The destination address appears. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry should be deleted. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the entry is deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. Map operation and map settings General notes Company logos displayed on the map are trademarks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself. Setting the map scale : Currently set map scale expressed as a number with unit, in this case 500 m ; Currently set map scale as indicated by the needle on the scale bar = New map scale ? Scale bar Unit of measurement : in the COMAND display depends on the selection made in the Navigation instrument cluster; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full screen menu item is shown, press W. Hiding the crosshair and centring the map on the vehicle position or destination X Press the % back button twice. The crosshair disappears and the map is set to the vehicle position. To call up the scale bar: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale bar ? appears. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. X Centring the map on the vehicle's position To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Vehicle position map and press W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, press the % back button. This hides the crosshair. Moving the map Showing the crosshair Map with crosshair : Current vehicle position ; Crosshair = Details of the crosshair position ? Map scale selected X X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full screen menu item is shown, press W. To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. A crosshair appears on the map. If you slide it again, the map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair. Display = may be the name of a street, for example, provided the digital map contains the necessary data. It shows the geo-coordinate position of the crosshair if the Geocoordinates display is switched on (Y page 375). Centring the map on the destination position This function requires that a route to a destination has been calculated. If the route has way points and an intermediate stop, the map can also be set to these positions. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Destination position map and press W to confirm. The crosshair is centred on the corresponding destination. Map settings Calling up the map settings menu To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Online X 373 Navigation 374 X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. Map orientation Setting the map orientation X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. Select Map orientation and press W to confirm. X Select North up, up Heading up, up Bird'seye view or 3-D map by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A # dot indicates the new setting. COMAND Online X Example: map orientation : Current map orientation (0 or ¤) Possible map orientations: R0 North orientation (the map view is displayed so that north is always up) R¤ Heading orientation (the map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The direction of travel is always at the top, the orange-coloured tip of the symbol points north.) R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The map projection reproduces the curvature of the earth's surface, the orange-coloured tip of the symbol points north.) R¤ 3D map (the map view is aligned to the direction of travel. At a scale of 1 km the map displays elevation, the orange-coloured tip of the symbol points north.) Map orientation menu Selecting POI symbols Setting the POI symbol display You can set the POIs you wish to have displayed as symbols on the map. POIs are, for example, filling stations, hotels, cinemas and restaurants. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. Navigation RStandard symbols Symbol display determined by the factory settings. RPersonal symbols You can determine the symbols yourself. RNo symbols The map does not show any symbols. X Select Standard symbols, symbols Personal symbols or No symbols. symbols If you select Personal symbols, symbols the POI list appears. To switch the symbol display on/off: select a POI by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous state of the symbols, they will either be shown O or hidden ª. You can switch on the icon displays for more than one POI. X To switch all personal symbols on/off: select All and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status of the symbols, they will either be shown O or hidden ª. If the function is switched on O, the individual POIs are greyed out and the previously selected settings remain unchanged. If the function is switched off ª, you can reselect the individual POIs. This displays the previous settings. i The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all counX tries. However, not all POIs are available in all countries. As a result, certain POI symbols may not be displayed on the map, even if the symbol display is switched on. X To exit the menu: press the % back button. Selecting map information Map information in the display During route guidance, you can have map information displayed at the bottom edge of the display. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. X Select Text information on map and press W to confirm. A # dot indicates the current setting. Select Current street, street Geo-coordi‐ nates or None and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller. X Road display : Road name or designation Z COMAND Online Select POI symbols on map and press W to confirm. The following settings are possible: X 375 376 Navigation Compass view on the map Geo-coordinate display : Current height above average sea level (rounded to the nearest 10 m) COMAND Online ; Current vehicle position: latitude coordi- nates = Current vehicle position: longitude coor- dinates ? Number of GPS satellites currently being used There must be sufficient GPS reception for all displays to be shown. If this is not the case, the display will be greyed out. Height display : may vary from the actual value, because the navigation system uses the GPS signals for the calculation. During the "Move map" function, you will see the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position. Height display : and number of satellites used ? are not displayed. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. X Select Compass on map and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Never Never, When off-road or When route guidance inactive and press W to confirm. The selected setting is accepted. Switching additional information on/off Display switched off : Current map orientation While moving the map, you will see additional data depending on the crosshair position if the digital map supports this data. A street name, for example, can be shown here (Y page 373). Example: topographic map Switching the topographic map on/off X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. X Select Topographic map and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off ª. The topographic map uses different colours to depict elevation. The colour key generally reflects the topography's dominant vegetation or the ground's perceived colour when seen from the air, for example: X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. X Select Motorway information and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off ª. Rgreen (grass) for lowland brown (woodland) for hills Rgrey (stone) and white (snow) for mountains Ryellow, Example: city model Example: motorway information Switching motorway information on/off Switching town view on/off When the city model is switched on, the map shows buildings as 3D models. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. When driving on the motorway, you can see the following information on the right of the display: X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Rthe X Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. X Select City (3D) and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off ª. nearest filling stations nearest rest areas, etc Rand their distance from the current vehicle position The entries show the number of the motorway and the motorway exits as well as their distance from the current vehicle position. The name of the motorway exit continues to be displayed. Rthe i The city model is only shown in the bird'seye view and 3D maps. Z 377 COMAND Online Navigation Navigation 378 It is available for the 50 m and 100 m map scales. The data required for displaying buildings is not available for all towns. Speed Limit Assist Information and requirements If COMAND Online supports Speed Limit Assist and the function is switched on in COMAND Online, it can show the permissible speed limit in the COMAND display. i The display appears if Speed Limit Assist COMAND Online detects traffic signs stating the maximum permissible speed. Speed Limit Assist detects these traffic signs using a camera; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Restricted speed limits may also be displayed. Restrictions include: RWhen wet – applies only if the road is wet icy – applies only if the road is slippery (due to cold) RIn fog – applies only in foggy weather RTemporary – applies only at certain times RLimited – COMAND Online cannot identify the type of restriction If the corresponding data is available, you see the information at the bottom left of the COMAND display. You might see "120" or "80 when wet", for example, directly above the map scale indicator. The displays also appear in the multifunction display in the Assistance menu; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. RWhen Example: intersecting roads on city routes/motorways Showing/hiding intersecting roads If route guidance is not active, intersecting roads can be displayed at the upper edge of the display. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X X X i The speed limits displayed may be incorrect if: Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Map settings and press W to confirm. The map settings menu appears. Select Next intersecting street and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off ª. Rthe data is outdated. camera has failed to identify a traffic sign correctly. Rthe Switching Speed Limit Assist on/off X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Navigation Select Speed Limit Assist and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off ª. Additional settings Avoiding an area General notes COMAND Online enables you to avoid areas you do not wish to drive through. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is active, COMAND Online will calculate a new route. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is inactive, COMAND Online will use the new setting for the next route guidance. Select Using map, map From memory or From personal POIs and press W to confirm. If you select Using map, map the map with the crosshair appears. If you select From memory or From per‐ sonal POIs, POIs either the destination memory or the list of categories for POIs appears. RDestination memory (Y page 332) RList of categories for personal POIs (Y page 347) X Select the desired destination or personal POI and press W to confirm. X When the destination address is displayed, select Continue and press W to confirm. The map appears. X i Motorways within blocked areas are always included in the route calculation. Defining an area for the first time X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Avoid area and press W to confirm. If you have not previously blocked an area, a menu appears. The crosshair marks the centre of the area that is to be avoided. X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning anti-clockwise zooms in. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. X To apply a block: press W the COMAND controller. A red square appears on the map. Z COMAND Online X 379 Navigation 380 i Available positions in the list are named Empty and are shown in grey. COMAND Online X X To adjust the size of the square: turn cVd the COMAND controller. The square is enlarged or reduced. X To confirm the settings: press W. The list appears. The previously selected area to be avoided has been added and activated. You can define additional areas that you would like to avoid (Y page 380). Defining further areas X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Avoid area and press W to confirm. If you have already selected one or more areas to avoid, a list of areas appears. Example: list of areas Select Avoid new area by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Select Using map, map From memory or From personal POIs and press W to confirm. If you select Using map, map the map with the crosshair appears. If you select From memory or From per‐ sonal POIs, POIs either the destination memory or the list of categories for POIs appears. RDestination memory (Y page 332) RList of categories for personal POIs (Y page 347) X Select the desired destination or personal POI and press W to confirm. X When the destination address is displayed, select Continue and press W to confirm. The map appears. X Navigation X 381 To confirm the change: press W the COMAND controller. The list appears and the change is entered. Deleting a set area Call up the area list (Y page 380). X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Slide VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A query appears asking whether the entry should be deleted. : New area to be avoided, the size of which can still be adjusted ; Area currently being avoided X To avoid a new area: call up the area menu again (Y page 379). The illustration shows an example with two areas that are to be avoided. Switching an avoided area on/off Call up the area list (Y page 380). X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The avoided area is switched on O or off ª depending on the previous status. X Displaying and changing an avoided area X Call up the area list (Y page 380). X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Slide VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display / Change and press W to confirm. The area to be avoided is indicated on the map. X To change the location of the area: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. The area is moved on the map. X To adjust the size of the area: turn cVd the COMAND controller. The area is enlarged or reduced. X Select Yes or No No. If you select Yes Yes, the entry is deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. Compass function In the compass view, you can see the current direction of travel, the current height above sea level and the co-ordinates of the vehicle position, for example. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Compass and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Online X Navigation 382 X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Country information and press W to confirm. When the connection has been made, the available country information appears. X To return to navigation: press the % button. COMAND Online X Example: compass : Current direction of travel ; Current elevation above average sea Showing the map data version level, rounded = Current vehicle position: longitude coor- dinates ? Number of GPS satellites currently being used A Current vehicle position: latitude coordi- nates B Currently set steering angle of the front wheels i To display current elevation ;, the sys- tem must be able to receive at least four satellites. Steering angle B can be a maximum of 35° in both directions. X To show the map data menu: press W the COMAND controller. X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Map version and press W to confirm. The map data version number is shown. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a MercedesBenz Service Centre. To exit the display: confirm Back by pressing W or press the % back button. Country-specific information You can call up information on the traffic conditions in the country you are currently driving in via the COMAND Online Internet and online function. The availability of information is countrydependent. Information can include maximum speeds, driving with dipped-beam headlamps or legal alcohol limits, for example. X To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button. X X To show the menu: press W the COMAND controller. Updating the digital map Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. ware updates for your vehicle are available at your Mercedes-Benz partner. Introduction The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conventional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-todate map software. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can have the digital map updated there with a DVD, or you can update it yourself. In some countries, it is possible to update the map data for COMAND Online free of charge for a period of 3 years. Information on the availability of this service for your vehicle can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the free update is not available in your country, please read the "Updating process" section. Updating at the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre If an update for your map software is available, you will receive it free of charge at your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre during your vehicle's annual service. You can arrange a separate appointment for this at your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre on request. The update is performed only by a MercedesBenz Service Centre for European map data. The map software is not provided on a data medium. Entitlement to the free update For the first three years after your vehicle is registered, you are entitled to all available updates to the map software for COMAND Online. They are usually installed during a regular vehicle service. After this period, you can purchase further updates from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The free updates relate to the vehicle and not to an individual. If there is a change of ownership within 3 years of first registration, the new owner is entitled to the map software updates. Availability of free updates Enter your e-mail address at http:// www.mercedes-benz-accessories.com/ comand-infomail. You will receive a one-off email containing information on how to update the map software. Please also visit http:// www.mercedes-benz-accessories.com/ navigation-updates to find out if map soft- Carrying out the update yourself i The update process may take some time (over an hour), depending on the size of the digital map. During this time, you will only be able to switch on radio mode and to accept incoming calls. The update will be completed more quickly if the vehicle is stationary. If you start the update with the engine switched off and the starter battery has insufficient power, COMAND Online may automatically switch off. This preserves the battery. If this occurs, restart the update with the engine running. Insert the DVD: Rin the single DVD drive (Y page 469) Rin the DVD changer (Y page 469) COMAND Online checks whether the digital map on the DVD is compatible with the navigation system and system software. A prompt then appears asking if you want to install the database. Versions of the database currently installed and the database that is to be installed are displayed. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. After selecting Yes Yes, an activation code must be entered when installing a database for the first time. You will receive the activation code when you buy the navigation DVD. X Z 383 COMAND Online Navigation Navigation COMAND Online 384 If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Enter the activation code. After entering the activation code correctly, COMAND Online starts updating the digital map. Once the update is finished, you will see a message. X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller. X Take the DVD out of the slot. While the update is running, you will see a message to this effect and a progress bar. The navigation system is not operational until the update is complete. i You cannot eject the DVD during the update. If you switch off COMAND Online during the update, the update is interrupted. It then continues from where it was interrupted when the system is restarted. COMAND Online may prompt you to change the DVD during the update. X Press the V (for DVD changer) or 8 (for single DVD drive) load/eject button. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Insert the requested DVD. Once the update has been successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect. X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller. X Take the DVD out of the slot. The update is complete. If the update is not successfully completed, you will see a message that the map update is not possible. X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller. X Take the DVD out of the slot. Navigation 385 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions COMAND Online is unable to continue route guidance after the journey has been interrupted. Route guidance is cancelled if you interrupt the journey for more than two hours. "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND Online back on and driving on. X Continue route guidance (Y page 356). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions COMAND Online is unable to determine the vehicle's position. COMAND Online has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the vehicle has been transported. Examples: Rafter transporting the vehicle by ferry transporting the vehicle by motorail Rafter the vehicle has been towed X Start the vehicle and pull away. COMAND Online determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the driving situation, this may take some time. Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the vehicle's position. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with navigation announcements and route guidance displays. Rafter Z COMAND Online Problems with the navigation system 386 Navigation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions COMAND Online has an integrated hard drive on which the digital The Navigation unavailable message map is stored. appears. To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND Online deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation system will then be temporarily unavailable. X Let the vehicle and COMAND Online cool down. X To hide the message: switch COMAND Online off and then on again. COMAND Online If an area of the hard disk has a fault, COMAND Online can no longer access the map data in this area. This may occur when calculating a route, for example. X To hide the message: switch COMAND Online off and then on again. The navigation system will be operational again until it has to access the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The message will then reappear. X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You see a message The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update. informing you that the X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller. DVD containing the digital map is incompatible X Eject the DVD. X Have the system database checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service with the system softCentre. ware. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The map software update has failed. The DVD is dirty. X Clean the DVD. X Restart the update. The DVD is scratched. X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Telephone Problem 387 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle interior. X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down. X Restart the update. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions COMAND Online asks The digital map is secured with an activation code. for an activation code X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. during the map update. Telephone Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. General notes Important safety notes G WARNING Operating communications equipment integrated into the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in an improper way, its electromagnetic radiation can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if: Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial This can jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aerial. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. There is scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risks posed by electromagnetic fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exterior aerial. Z COMAND Online COMAND Online's integrated hard disk is defective. X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. COMAND Online 388 Telephone Therefore, only use mobile communication equipment if it is connected to the exterior aerial of the vehicle. Call disconnected while the vehicle is in motion Introduction Rthere is insufficient GSM network coverage COMAND Online allows you to use two different modes of telephony: Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface (standard equipment): Rpermanently installed/SAP telephony (only in conjunction with a data-enabled MB SAP module) In telephony via Bluetooth® interface mode, the mobile phone is connected directly to COMAND Online via Bluetooth®. Enhancing this operating mode with the optional mobile phone bracket allows you to: Rconnect the mobile phone to the exterior aerial on the vehicle Rcharge the mobile phone In the permanently installed/SAP telephony mode, the optional data-enabled MB SAP module is inserted into the fitting in the armrest designed for housing the mobile phone bracket. When connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the contacts are automatically downloaded to COMAND Online. If your mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile), COMAND Online can receive and display text messages. Further information on the following topics can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect: Rsuitable mobile phones Ravailable mobile phone brackets Rconnecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to COMAND Online Roverview of the functions for the operating modes A call may be disconnected if: in certain areas move from one GSM or UMTS transmitter/receiver area (GSM/UMTS cell) into another and no channels are free Ryou use a SIM card that is not compatible with the network available Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is logged into the network at the same time Ryou Operating options You can operate the telephone: Rusing the COMAND controller: turn c V d slide XVY or ZVÆ press W Rby using the 6 or ~ button and the telephone keypad on COMAND Online Rby using the 6 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rby using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate LINGUATRONIC operating instructions) Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and illustrations in this section refer to COMAND Online. Function restrictions You will not be able to use the telephone, will no longer be able to use the telephone, or you may have to wait before using it in the following situations: Rif the mobile phone is switched off Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off in COMAND Online Telephone the mobile phone while you are using Bluetooth® interface telephony Rif the mobile phone is not logged into a mobile phone network i The telephone automatically tries to log on to a network. If no network is available, you may not be able to make a 999 or 112 emergency call. If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the No service message will appear for a short while. If you switch COMAND Online off during a call in hands-free mode, the call will be terminated. You can prevent this as follows: X Switch the mobile phone to private mode before switching off COMAND Online (see the mobile phone operating instructions). 999 or 112 emergency call The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call: Rthe mobile phone must be switched on network must be available Ra valid and operational SIM card must be inserted in the mobile phone Rthe PIN must have been entered If you are unable to make an emergency call, you must arrange rescue measures yourself. Ra i The 999 or 112 emergency call number is a public service. Any misuse is punishable by law. Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface Conditions For telephony via COMAND Online's Bluetooth® interface, a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone is required. On COMAND Online X Activate the Bluetooth® function in COMAND Online (Y page 313). On the mobile phone Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN when prompted to do so (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X Activate Bluetooth® functions and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X The battery of the mobile phone should always be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent malfunctions. In preparation for telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface, you should check the following items on your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions): RHands-Free Profile The mobile phone must support HandsFree Profile 1.0 or above. RBluetooth® visibility On certain mobile phones, the device itself must be made "visible" to other devices, as well as activating the Bluetooth® function (see the mobile phone operating instructions). This visibility is for restricted periods of time on some mobile phones. RBluetooth® device name Every Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth® device name. This device name is freely definable, but can be identical for all devices from the same manufacturer. It is therefore recommended that you change this name so that you can easily recognise your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. Further information on suitable mobile phones and mobile phone brackets can be obtained at your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on Z COMAND Online Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on 389 390 Telephone the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect. Searching for a mobile phone i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) depend on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile. COMAND Online Connecting a mobile phone General notes Before using your mobile phone with COMAND Online for the first time, you will need to: Rsearch for it (Y page 390) and then Rauthorise (register) it (Y page 391). Device-specific information on authorising and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones can be found on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect. When you authorise a new mobile phone, it is connected automatically. You can authorise up to 15 mobile phones. If the mobile phone supports PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile), the following contacts and messages are downloaded into COMAND Online when connecting: Empty Bluetooth® telephones list Conditions for searching Rthe phone book call lists Rtext messages (SMS) Further information on the conditions for connecting (Y page 389). Rthe Bluetooth® telephones list after the search has finished Press the % function button on COMAND Online. X Select Connect device from the telephone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Telephone external authorisation may be necessary (Y page 392). X i When you call up the phone list again, deauthorised devices will be removed from the list. In this case, start a new search to update the Bluetooth® telephone list. Authorising (registering) a mobile phone COMAND Online Select Search for phones and press the W button to confirm. A message appears. X Select Start search and press the W button to confirm. The Searching for Bluetooth phones... message appears. COMAND Online looks for Bluetooth® telephones within range and adds them to the Bluetooth® telephones list. If a new phone is found, it appears in the list with the Ï symbol. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth® telephones within range and their characteristics. Symbols in the Bluetooth® phone list Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone in range, but not yet authorised Y Authorised mobile phone # Currently connected mobile phone Ñ Mobile phone in range and authorised Ñ (grey) Mobile phone not in range, but already authorised Passkey entry The Bluetooth® phone list shows all mobile phones within range and all previously authorised mobile phones, whether or not they are in range. i Mobile phones that are connected to the optional data-enabled MB SAP module are shown in a separate phone list. You can call this up using the MB SAP module entry (Y page 421). i If the Bluetooth® telephones list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorise a mobile phone (Y page 393). If COMAND Online does not find your mobile phone, 391 Telephone basic menu Option 1: using the passkey (access number) X Select the mobile phone with the Ï symbol from the Bluetooth® telephones list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The input menu for the passkey appears. The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit number combination which you can choose yourself. You must enter the same number combination in COMAND Online and in the Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). Z Telephone 392 i Some mobile phones require a passkey with four or more digits. i If you want to re-authorise a mobile phone following de-authorisation, you can select a different passkey. If the COMAND Online display shows the Authorisation failed message, you may have exceeded the prescribed time period. Repeat the procedure. i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisation in COMAND Online and on the mobile phone (Y page 393). Subsequent authorisation may otherwise fail. COMAND Online X To enter a passkey in COMAND Online: press the number keys in turn. or X X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. ¬is highlighted after the first number has been entered. In both cases, select ¬ and press W to confirm. To enter the passkey on the mobile phone: if the Bluetooth® connection is successful, you will be requested to enter the passkey (access code, passkey; see the mobile phone operating instructions). X Enter the same passkey in the mobile phone as the one already entered in COMAND Online. The Connecting Bluetooth pro‐ files... message appears. The Authorisation successful message appears once authorisation is completed. X Option 2: using Secure Simple Pairing To connect via Secure Simple Pairing, the mobile phone (or Bluetooth® audio equipment) must support Bluetooth® Version 2.1. COMAND Online creates a six-digit code, which is displayed on both devices that are to be connected. X If the code is the same on both devices, confirm Yes by pressing W. If you select Yes Yes, authorisation is continued and the mobile phone is connected. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Confirm the message on the mobile phone. External authorisation The mobile phone is authorised and connected to COMAND Online. You can now make phone calls using the COMAND Online handsfree system. i After entering the passkey, you may also need to enter a confirmation in your mobile phone in order to make calls. Please check your mobile phone display. On some mobile phones, this confirmation can be saved. In this case, you do not need to enter it again. If COMAND Online does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. In this case, you can test if your mobile phone can Telephone Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile phone; see the mobile phone operating instructions. X Select COMAND Online (MB MB Bluetooth) Bluetooth on the mobile phone. X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter the passkey first on the mobile phone and then in COMAND Online. X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on the mobile phone and in COMAND Online (Secure Simple Pairing). With both options, you see the prompt Do you want to authorise ? on the COMAND display. X If you select Yes Yes, the mobile phone will be authorised. The messages Waiting for to be con‐ nected... and Connecting Bluetooth profiles... are displayed. If the connection is successful, you see the telephone basic menu and the connected mobile phone is entered. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Reconnecting automatically COMAND Online always searches for the last connected mobile phone. If no connection can be made to the most recently connected mobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone that was connected before that one. Switching between mobile phones If you have authorised more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. X Select the mobile phone from the Bluetooth® phone list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The selected mobile phone is searched for and connected if it is within Bluetooth® range and if Bluetooth® is activated. Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the Bluetooth® phone list. i You can only switch to another authorised mobile phone if you are not currently making a call. De-authorising (de-registering) a mobile phone Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisation in COMAND Online and on the mobile phone. Subsequent authorisation may otherwise fail. X Press the % function button on COMAND Online. X Select Connect device from the telephone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Bluetooth® telephones list appears(Y page 390). X Select the desired mobile phone in the Bluetooth® phone list. Z COMAND Online find COMAND Online. The Bluetooth® device name of COMAND Online is "MB MB Bluetooth Bluetooth". Please note the following: some mobile phones require that you establish the connection to COMAND Online again once you have entered the passkey (see the mobile phone operating instructions). The mobile phone cannot otherwise be authorised. X Press the % function button on COMAND Online. X Select Connect device from the telephone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Bluetooth® phone list appears. X Select Search via telephone and press W to confirm. The message on the left appears. 393 Telephone 394 Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select De-authorise and press W to confirm. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to de-authorise this device. X Select Yes or No No. If you select Yes Yes, the device will be deleted from the Bluetooth® telephones list. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. COMAND Online X Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) Basic menu display i Before re-authorising the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth® list. Displaying connection details Press the % function button on COMAND Online. X Select Connect device from the telephone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Bluetooth® phone list appears. X Select the desired mobile phone in the Bluetooth® phone list. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth® name RBluetooth® address Ravailability status (shown after a new search) Rauthorisation status X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller. X Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) : Network provider's name (depends on the connected phone) ; Signal strength of mobile phone network Ä Receiver icon ¢ or ¡ To display call lists Character bar Bluetooth® name of the currently connected mobile phone C To display the COMAND phone book = ? A B Press the % function button. The telephone basic menu appears when the connected mobile phone is ready for use. i Displays : and ; are shown, depending on the mobile phone connected. Bars ; show the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If there are no bars, there is very poor reception or none at all. The receiver symbol shows whether a call is active/being connected ¡ or not ¢. X Displaying text messages in the telephone basic menu The SMS menu item is only available if the Bluetooth® phone supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile). The downloading of text messages from the Bluetooth® phone must have been completed. The menu item is otherwise greyed out. Further information on text messages (Y page 409). If you have an unread text message, the 1 mail symbol is displayed. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message. The ú mail symbol is displayed as soon as the text message memory is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one text message. Switching on and changing telephony operating modes Overview If your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony, COMAND Online starts the telephony mode depending on whether a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) is inserted in the fitting or not. If neither a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) nor a mobile phone bracket is inserted, COMAND Online immediately starts the telephony via the Bluetooth® interface. message appears. Approximately two minutes after switching on COMAND Online, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to switch to Bluetooth® telephony. If you confirm by selecting Yes Yes, the Ready for Bluetooth telephony... message will appear. COMAND Online will search for the two mobile phones last connected via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile phones is found, the telephone basic menu for Bluetooth® telephony appears (Y page 394). If neither of the mobile phones is found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐ ephony... message remains in the display. You can now connect your mobile phone (Y page 390). If you choose No No, the Ready for SAP con‐ nectivity... message reappears. Activating without a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) If a telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) is inserted, COMAND Online starts the SAP telephony. Bluetooth® telephony is started COMAND Online starts telephony via the Bluetooth® interface and searches for the last two mobile phones to have been connected via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile phones is found, the telephone basic menu for Bluetooth® telephony appears (Y page 394). If neither of the mobile phones is found, the Ready for Bluetooth tel‐ ephony... message remains in the display. You now have to connect your mobile phone (Y page 390). i If no telephone module with Bluetooth® i If you do not connect another mobile Activating with inserted telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) (SAP profile) is inserted, COMAND Online checks whether a mobile phone bracket is inserted and, if so, which type. i You must set up your »telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)« before first use so it is recognised by COMAND Online (Y page 420). If no mobile phone is connected to the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile), the Ready for Bluetooth telephony... phone via the phone list, the Bluetooth® connection with the mobile phone remains active until the next time COMAND Online is switched off. While the Bluetooth® connection is active, only the Bluetooth® interface functions are available to you. Switching between modes of telephony If your vehicle is equipped with an optional data-enabled telephone module with BlueZ 395 COMAND Online Telephone Telephone 396 tooth® (SAP profile), you can switch the telephony mode. You can change the mode of telephony in the Bluetooth® phone list by selecting either a Bluetooth® telephone or an SAP telephone. X Call up the phone list (Y page 390). X To select the mobile phone with the controller: turn and press the controller. COMAND Online i SAP telephony: mobile phones which are connected to an optional data-enabled telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) are shown in the telephone list under the title Telephones of the SAP module. By selecting an SAP telephone, module you change to SAP telephony. Reception and transmission volume Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Reception volume or Transmis‐ sion volume and press W to confirm. X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X To close the setting scale: press W or slide X V Y. X i Incorrect settings may have an impact on the quality of calls. Telephone operation Incoming calls Accepting a call Once the mobile phone has been authorised, you can optimise the transmission and reception volume settings. To find out about the best possible settings for your mobile phone, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or visit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect. Example: incoming call X To accept: confirm Accept by pressing W. or Press the 6 button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. i You can also accept the call by voice command using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions). Once you have accepted the call, you can use hands-free mode. The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 299). Other functions during a call (Y page 398) If the phone number of the caller is transferred, it appears in the display. X Press the % function button. Select Connect device in the telephone basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select an authorised mobile phone from the list by turning cVd. X X Telephone i You can also accept a call as described above when another main function is switched on in COMAND. Once you have accepted the call, the display switches to telephone mode. After the call is finished, you see the display of the previous main function again. The display does not switch to the telephone display if you: Rpress the % back button next to the COMAND controller and then Raccept the call using the 6 button on the multifunction steering wheel Rejecting a call X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the ~ button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. Making a call Using the number keypad X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). X Enter the digits using the number keypad. X To connect the call: press the 6 button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. Using the telephone basic menu Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). X Select the digits one by one by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X To make a call: select ° in the character bar and press W to confirm. or X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. Redialling X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). X Select ° in the character bar and press W to confirm. or X If the telephone basic menu is displayed, press the 6 button on COMAND Online. In both cases, the calls dialled list appears. The most recently dialled number is at the top. To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To connect the call: press W the COMAND controller. X For redialling using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Using the call list or COMAND phone book Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 405). or X Call up the COMAND phone book and select an entry (Y page 402). X X To make a call: press W the COMAND controller or the 6 button. Select and place a call using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Using speed dial presets to make a call The speed dial list contains stored entries from the phone book (Y page 407). Z COMAND Online If there is an entry for the caller in the phone book, you will also see the name. If the phone number is not transferred or the "Hide data" function is activated, Unknown appears in the display. 397 Telephone 398 Option 1: X Press one of the number keys for longer than two seconds. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialling. Option 2: Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Speed dial preset list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears. X Select the preset and press W to confirm. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialling. COMAND Online X Switching the hands-free microphone on/ off This function is also available during an active phone call. X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). To switch off: select Mike off and press W to confirm. If the microphone is switched off, the display shows the Q icon, and the The microphone is off message appears for a short period. X To switch on: select Mike on and press W to confirm. The Q symbol disappears. You will briefly see the The microphone is on message. X Sending DTMF tones Functions available during a call Overview Telephone operation with a single call : Person you are calling ; Icon for active telephone connection = Switches the hands-free microphone off/ on (Y page 398) ? Sends DTMF tones (not possible with all mobile phones) (Y page 398) A Ends the call This function is not supported by all mobile phones. Answering machines or other devices can be controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query functions. X If you would like to listen to the messages on your answering machine, for example, select the corresponding number. X To transmit individual characters: once a connection has been established to the answering machine, select the desired Telephone or Press the corresponding key on the COMAND Online number keypad. Every character selected will be transmitted immediately. X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF sequence: select Name by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select the desired phone book entry and press W to confirm. The entry is sent as a DTMF character string. X X To return to the call display: select Back and press W to confirm. i DTMF tones can also be transmitted using LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions. Calls with several participants Rejecting or accepting a waiting call The mobile phone network provider must support and activate the call-waiting function. Depending on the mobile phone used, the system behaviour differs when accepting a call. If you have a call in progress and receive another call, a new window appears in the display. You also hear a tone. You can accept or reject the call. X To reject: select Reject and press W to confirm. or X Press the ~ button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. X To accept: select Accept and press W to confirm. or X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. The system behaviour after accepting the incoming call depends on your mobile phone. RThe mobile phone supports the call waiting function (via Bluetooth®) when: the previously active call is held. You can then switch back and forth between both calls (call waiting) (Y page 400). RThe mobile phone does not support the call waiting function (via Bluetooth®) when: the previously active call is ended. This is also the case if you accept the waiting call using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions). Valid in both cases: if you accept the waiting call using the mobile phone, the active call is put on hold. You then have two calls. The call you have just accepted is active. The COMAND display changes. If you continue to operate functions on the mobile phone, the COMAND Online display may differ from that of the mobile phone. Making a second call If the following requirements are met, you can make another call while on the phone with someone else: RThe mobile network must permit this function. RThe mobile phone must allow you to make a second call via Bluetooth®. This action puts the previous call on hold if the mobile phone supports this function. RThe corresponding setting must be activated on the mobile phone. Z COMAND Online characters in the character bar, pressing W to confirm each of them. 399 Telephone COMAND Online 400 : Symbol for making a second call X Select symbol : by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online. X Enter the phone number: Rmanually (Y page 397) Rusing the phone book (Y page 402) Rusing the call lists (Y page 405) Rusing speed dial (Y page 397) Call waiting and conference calls You can switch back and forth between two calls with the call waiting function. The function is available if your mobile phone supports the toggling function (via Bluetooth®). You can interconnect various callers to create a conference call with the Conference function. You can use the function if you are answering a second call or making a second call while talking to someone else. : Active call ; Call on hold = Interconnects the call on hold and the active call to create a conference call. To switch between the active call and the call on hold (call waiting): X Select call on hold ; and press W to confirm. or X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. The previous call on hold is activated. X To end the active call: select ¢ in the telephone basic menu and press W to confirm. or X Press the ~ button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. The call on hold is active. Interconnecting the call on hold and the active call to create a conference call: X Select Conference and press W to confirm. Telephone Calling other participants: X Select symbol : and press W to confirm. You can now switch between the new participant and the conference call or add the participant to the conference call. 401 In addition, MB Contact is listed as the first entry. This allows you to place a call to the Mercedes-Benz Service hotline (Y page 427). The phone book of the mobile phone is automatically downloaded to COMAND Online after connection. In the telephone book, you can: Rsave phone numbers (Y page 404) for entries (Y page 402) Rdelete entries (Y page 403) Rimport contacts (Y page 417) Rdelete contacts (Y page 418) Rreceive vCards (Y page 418) i The stored phone book and the vCards remain in COMAND Online even if you use COMAND Online with another mobile phone. The entries can be viewed without a mobile phone. For this reason, you should delete any phone book entries before handing over or selling the vehicle. Switching between a new participant and the conference call: X Select Conference call and press W to confirm. You will change to a conference call. The new participant is placed on hold. Adding a new participant to the conference call: X Select Conference and press W to confirm. Transferring a call If you want to continue a call in private mode, you will need to carry out the necessary steps on the mobile phone. See the mobile phone operating instructions for further information. Using the phone book Calling up the phone book Opening the phone book Press the % function button. X Select Name in the telephone basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If the phone book contains entries, they will be displayed in alphabetical order. The character bar at the bottom of the display is active. The character bar is used for fast selection of an entry. Enter the character using the character bar (Y page 303). X Introduction The phone book displays the names and phone numbers of all address book entries saved in the COMAND address book. If an address book entry does not have a telephone number, it does not appear in the phone book. Z COMAND Online Rsearch Telephone 402 COMAND Online Sym- Explanation bol à Contact imported from a mobile phone that supports PBAP ¯ Entry which has been imported from the SD memory card or USB device ® Entry imported via the Bluetooth® interface i You can also call up the telephone book with the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Closing the phone book X Select the & symbol in the main function bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the % button. Searching for a phone book entry Searching with the character bar You determine the first letter of the entry you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Using the multifunction steering wheel Use the = or ; button to select the Tel menu. X Use 9, : or 9 to call up the phone book. X Symbol overview Sym- Explanation bol Æ Address book entry that has been entered or changed via COMAND Online Imported contact that has been saved in the phone or address book \ Address book entry with voice tag These entries have also been assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are available in vehicles with LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions). Select a character by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The first entry in the list that starts with the letter selected is highlighted. If there are similar entries, the next different character is shown. For example, with entries such as Christel and Christine Christine, the beginnings of the names are similar. In this case, you will be offered a choice between E and I. Select the characters of the entry you are searching for one by one and press W to confirm. When the selection is clear, COMAND Online switches automatically to the selection list. X To complete the search: slide VZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and hold W until the character bar disappears. The selection list appears. X Information about character entry (Y page 303) Telephone Searching with the number keypad You determine the first letter of the entry you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Press the corresponding number keys in rapid succession. X More information on entering characters using the number keypad (direct entry) (Y page 305). Directly from the list You can switch to the list at any time during character entry. X Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and hold W until the character bar disappears. or X Select¬and press W to confirm. X To select an entry: turn c V d the COMAND controller until the desired entry is highlighted and press W to confirm. To select a phone number: the G symbol indicates that an entry contains more than one phone number. X Select a phone book entry with the G symbol and press W to confirm. The sub-entries appear. The G symbol changes to I. Phone book entry with several entries X Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and press W to confirm. To return to the phone book using the character bar: select & in the list and press W to confirm. or Press the % button. Using the multifunction steering wheel X Dialling a number from the telephone book; see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Displaying the details of an entry Select an entry in the selection list by turning c V d the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Select Details and press W to confirm. The detailed display appears. X To close the detailed display: slide XVY repeatedly until the entry is highlighted again. or X Press the % back button. Deleting an entry from the phone book If the entry contains only phone numbers, it is deleted from the phone book and address book. If it contains additional data, such as a navigable destination, the entry is deleted in the phone book. However, the entry is retained in the address book. X Select an entry in the selection list by turning c V d the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry should be deleted. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the entry is deleted in accordance with the rules described above. Z COMAND Online X 403 Telephone 404 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is created in the phone book and in the address book. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. Creating a new entry in the phone book COMAND Online Adding to a phone book entry Slide Z V the COMAND controller repeatedly in the phone book until the selection list appears. X Select the list symbol on the right in the selection list by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select New entry and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home Home, and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and press W to confirm. Mobile X Select Continue and press W to confirm. The input menu with data fields appears. X You can add telephone numbers to an existing phone book entry. X Select an entry in the selection list by turning c V d the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Add telephone no. and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home Home, and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and press W to confirm. Mobile X Select Continue and press W to confirm. COMAND Online stores the data if there are fewer than five numbers assigned to the entry you are searching for in the selected number category. If five numbers are stored for the entry in the selected number category, a prompt will appear. You can then choose whether to overwrite one of the existing numbers. Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, a selection list will appear containing the five existing numbers. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Select the number to be overwritten by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An input menu appears. The data field for entering the new phone number is highlighted. X : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar Character entry (Y page 303) X To save an entry: select the¬symbol in the character bar by turning c V d the X X X Character entry (Y page 303) Save the entry (Y page 304) Telephone Introduction While the telephone is being used, COMAND Online stores individual lists for both incoming and outgoing calls (including missed calls). Call lists are not available unless a mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online. COMAND Online supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile. For this reason, note that the system behaviour differs, especially when telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface: with PBAP Bluetooth® profile The call lists are downloaded automatically from the mobile phone by COMAND Online as soon as the mobile phone is connected to COMAND Online. RBluetooth® telephone without PBAP Bluetooth® profile: The call lists are created and displayed by COMAND Online. Opening the call list and selecting an entry X X Press the % function button. Select Call lists in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. COMAND Online Using call lists Rphone i For Bluetooth® telephones without the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists in COMAND Online are not synchronised with those on your mobile phone. These calls may or may not be listed on your mobile phone, depending on the model. i If no mobile phone is connected, then the Call lists menu item is greyed out and cannot be selected. If you connect a mobile phone other than the previous one to COMAND Online, the previously available call lists and their entries will be deleted automatically. These are still available on the mobile phone itself. i You will only be able to select the respective menu items once calls have been received or dialled from COMAND Online. Displaying missed calls in the COMAND display is not supported by all mobile phones. 405 Example: list of selected phone numbers : To close the list ; Date/time (if available), symbols (if assigned) and telephone number of the entry highlighted = To call up options X Select Incoming calls or Calls dial‐ led by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The corresponding list appears. i You can also call up the list of dialled calls by pressing the 6 button when the telephone basic menu is shown. In this case, the list will only show phone numbers. Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X To dial a phone number: press W. X X To close the list: select the & symbol and press W to confirm. or X Press the % back button. Z Telephone 406 COMAND Online Displaying details from a list entry COMAND Online can also show a shortened list entry in full. X Select a list entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the controller and press W to confirm. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The detailed display appears. X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeatedly until the list is highlighted. Storing a phone number New address book entry For incoming calls from a person who is not in the address book, COMAND Online displays the phone number in the call list. You can save this entry. X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 405). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save and press W to confirm. X Select New entry and press W to confirm. Select a category for the number, e.g. Home Home, and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and press W to confirm. Mobile X Number category Display (phone book and address book) Not classified No symbol Home ¸ Work · Phone category Display (phone book and address book) Not classified ; Landline ¬ Mobile Ï Car ´ X Select Save and press W to confirm. An input menu with data fields is shown. The data field for the telephone number is filled in automatically. : Data field with cursor ; Telephone number and symbol for the phone category are automatically entered = Character bar Adding information to an address book entry For incoming calls from a person who is not in the address book, COMAND Online displays the phone number in the call list. You can save this entry. X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 405). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save and press W to confirm. Telephone entry has already been saved. X Select Add telephone no. and press W to confirm. Select a category for the number, e.g. Home Home, and press W to confirm. X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and press W to confirm. Mobile X Select Save Save. The search menu for address book entries appears. X Search for the desired entry (Y page 402). X Press W when you have finished searching. COMAND Online stores the data if there are fewer than five numbers assigned to the entry you are searching for in the selected number category. You will see a message to this effect. If five numbers are stored for the entry you are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, a selection list with the five existing numbers is displayed. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Select the number to be overwritten in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online overwrites the selected number with the new data. Select Call lists in the telephone basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete call lists and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete all call lists. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the call lists are deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X i If you delete these call lists from the mobile phone; see the separate mobile phone operating instructions, COMAND Online updates the call list display the next time it connects. X Deleting call lists If you are using a Bluetooth® phone that does not support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists are generated and managed by COMAND Online. You can delete these call lists in COMAND Online. If you download call lists from a Bluetooth® phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, you cannot delete them from COMAND Online. Using the speed dial list Storing an entry You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 to 9) in the speed dial list. There are two options available for this purpose. Option 1: Search for a phone book entry in the phone book (Y page 402). X If an entry has several phone numbers, select the desired number by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Speed dial by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Z COMAND Online i Save is shown in grey if the selected list 407 Telephone 408 Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Assign speed dial preset and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears. The selected phone book entry appears at the top. The next free speed dial preset is highlighted. COMAND Online X Speed dial menu X Select Assign speed dial preset and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears. The selected phone book entry appears at the top. The next free speed dial preset is highlighted. X Select the speed dial preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The phone book entry is saved in the speed dial preset. Using speed dial presets to make a call X Select the speed dial preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The phone book entry is saved in the speed dial preset. The speed dial list contains stored phone book entries (Y page 407). Option 1: X Option 2 Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Speed dial preset list and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears. X Press one of the number keys for longer than two seconds. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialling. Option 2: Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 394). X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears. X Telephone Deleting a speed dial preset X To delete a speed dial number: select Delete speed dial preset in the "Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial preset is deleted. To delete all speed dial numbers: select Delete all speed dial presets in the "Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will be asked if you would like to continue. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, all speed dial presets will be deleted from the speed dial list. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X pears once you have read the text message. The ú mail symbol is displayed if the text message memory is full. The symbol is no longer displayed once you delete at least one text message. i Telephony via a data-enabled MB SAP module (Y page 421). i COMAND Online may not load all of the most recent text messages: This may occur in exceptional cases, for example when using certain mobile phones/brackets and if the mobile phone inbox holds a large number of text messages. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect. Displaying the text message (SMS) inbox Calling up the inbox Text messages Information and requirements In order to be able to use the text message function, the mobile phone has to support Bluetooth® Profile MAP (Message Access Profile). When the mobile phone is connected, the 30 most recent text messages that are currently stored on the phone are loaded to the COMAND Online text message inbox and displayed. If the above conditions are met, new incoming text messages appear in the COMAND Online text message inbox. The / symbol appears in the status bar. The symbol disap- Text message (SMS) inbox X X Press the % function button. Select SMS in the telephone basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The text message inbox appears. Z COMAND Online Select Speed dial preset list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears. X Select the preset and press W to confirm. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialling. X 409 Telephone 410 Reading a text message (SMS) Call up the text message (SMS) inbox (Y page 409) X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The text message appears. X To scroll through the display or select phone numbers in a text message: turn cVd the COMAND controller. The display scrolls up or down line by line, or skips to the next or previous telephone number and automatically highlights it. X To return to the list: select the & symbol and press W to confirm or press the % back button. COMAND Online X Text message read-aloud function Settings for the read-aloud function: RLanguage (Y page 313) page 312) X Press W while a text message is being displayed, select Read aloud and press W to confirm. COMAND Online reads out the text message. RSpeed (Y X To cancel the read-aloud function: press the 8 button. or X by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display text and press W to confirm. The view changes. X To switch to the sender display: select the list symbol to the right of the text message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display sender and press W to confirm. The view changes. X Displaying details and phone numbers COMAND Online can also show a shortened sender display in full. X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the text message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The detailed display appears. X To close the detailed display: slide XVY the COMAND controller. X Press W, select Cancel read-aloud function and press W to confirm. Sender or text display You can switch between displaying the text message sender or the text message content. The sender display shows the sender of the text message. If the sender is stored in the COMAND phone book, the name is displayed. The text display shows the first few words of a text message. X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X To switch to the text display: select the list symbol to the right of the text message To return to the telephone basic menu: press the % button. To return to the telephone basic menu: press the % button. Managing text messages (SMS) Calling a text message (SMS) sender X Press W the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed. X Select Call sender and press W to confirm. The telephone makes the call to the sender. Telephone : Usable numerical sequence Numbers in text messages that are highlighted in red can be used. X Select a usable number when the text message is displayed. Press W the COMAND controller and select Use Use. X Select Call Call. The telephone makes the call. X i It is possible that a highlighted numerical sequence may not contain a telephone number. i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no." functions to save this telephone number or to add it to an existing entry. Storing the sender of a text message in the address book This function is not available if the sender’s telephone number is already stored in the address book. X Press W the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed. X Select Save number and press W to confirm. X Select New entry and press W to confirm. X Store the phone number (Y page 406) Adding the sender of a text message to an address book entry X Press W the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed. X Select Save number and press W to confirm. X Select Add telephone no. and press W to confirm. X Proceed from the step "Selecting a number category" (Y page 404). Deleting a text message (SMS) Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the text message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A deletion prompt appears. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the text message is deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X i This delete function is not supported by all mobile phones. The Delete failed message appears. Using the address book Introduction The address book organises and stores entries that are entered from different sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB device, COMAND telephone book, navigation system). You can use these entries to make telephone calls and to navigate. i Number of contacts in the address book: the address book can store a total of 4,000 contacts. Z COMAND Online Using phone numbers in the text 411 Telephone 412 1,500 entries each are reserved in the address book for: Rcontacts from the mobile phone that you create in COMAND Online or import from other sources The remaining 1,000 entries are assigned by COMAND Online as necessary. Rcontacts COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Address book from the menu and press W to confirm. i Display of mobile phone contacts: con- COMAND Online tacts downloaded from the mobile phone remain in the address book even if you disconnect the mobile phone from COMAND Online. Contacts that have previously been available can be displayed as soon as the mobile phone is reconnected. COMAND Online downloads the contacts again so that any new contacts that have been added to the mobile phone can be displayed. As soon as you connect a new mobile phone to COMAND Online all the contacts from the previous mobile phone are replaced by those from the new phone's address book. Address book entries remain stored if the mobile phone is disconnected. For this reason, delete your personal data using the reset function before selling your vehicle, for example (Y page 316). Calling up the address book Using the function button: Press the % function button. You see either the telephone basic menu or the address book, depending on which was last active. X If the telephone basic menu is displayed, press the % function button again. X Using the telephone basic menu: X When the telephone basic menu is displayed, select Tel by sliding VZ the Address book with ¥ address book entry and L navigable data To browse in the address book: turn cVd the COMAND controller. X To close the address book: press the % button. X i An address book entry can contain the following information: Rname Rfirst name Rcompany Rtwo addresses Rgeo-coordinates Rup to five telephone numbers Telephone 413 Search menu with character bar : ¥ Address book entry ; L Complete address data from the nav- igation system = Character bar ? d Phone book entry on the mobile phone A Entry with voice tag For more symbols, see the symbol overview (Y page 402) X Find entry (Y page 402) Creating a new entry in the address book You can enter address data directly into the address book. If you store telephone numbers in the COMAND phone book, these are also saved in the address book. If you store a navigation destination, COMAND Online creates an address book entry which includes the complete navigable address data. X Call up the address book (Y page 412) X Input menu with data fields : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar X X Enter characters (Y page 303) Save the entry (Y page 304) Deleting an address book entry X Option 1: select Delete by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Option 2: search for an address book entry (Y page 402). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt will appear. X X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the entry will be deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. Select New in the address book by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An input menu with data fields appears. Z COMAND Online Searching for an address book entry Telephone 414 Displaying details for an address book entry Selecting an entry Showing the details of an address book entry X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The display is shown in full. COMAND Online X To close the detailed display: press the % back button. Changing an address book entry Option 1: search for an address book entry (Y page 402). X Make a selection from the selection list by turning c V d the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Detailed display of address book : Back to the previous menu ; \ Business details = List symbol (to call up options) Search for an address book entry (Y page 402) X Make a selection from the selection list by turning c V d the COMAND controller. or X Call up the address book (Y page 412) X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller. The detailed display appears. X Starting route guidance to an address Select the address data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The route to the destination address is calculated and route guidance starts (Y page 329). X Calling a telephone number X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. This initiates dialling and you can then make your call (Y page 398). X Select Edit and press W to confirm. Option 2: call up the detailed view for an address book entry (Y page 414). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Edit and press W to confirm. In both cases, the input menu containing data fields appears. X Information about character entry (Y page 303) Telephone Calling a number stored in an entry Conditions The mobile phone must be connected via the Bluetooth® interface (Y page 390). Dialling a number X Display details for an address book entry (Y page 414). X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller to confirm. or X Select the list symbol to the right of the data field by sliding VY the COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller to confirm. X Select Call and press W to confirm. The telephone makes the call. The display switches to telephone mode. Storing a phone number as a speed dial number Display details for an address book entry (Y page 414). X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select the list symbol to the right of the data field by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Speed dial and press W to confirm. You can now store the number in one of the ten speed dial presets (Y page 407). X Starting route guidance to an entry Address book entry with navigable data This function is available as soon as you have stored a destination in the destination memory (Y page 369). X Search for an address book entry with the L symbol and select it from the list (Y page 413). Display details for an address book entry (Y page 414). X Select the address data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Route guidance begins. or X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Navigate and press W to confirm. Route guidance begins. X Address book entry without navigable data Route guidance can also be started for an address book entry without the L symbol. If the address data or designations do not match the digital map, COMAND Online prompts you to re-enter the address. Z COMAND Online Changing the category of a telephone number data field X Display details for an address book entry (Y page 414). X Select the telephone number data field. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Change category and press W to confirm. X Select a number category, e.g. Home Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Mobile. X If desired, select Preferred and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off ª. The phone number is displayed as the first number in the phone book and can be dialled immediately. X Select Save and press W to confirm. The new category is stored. 415 Telephone 416 Enter the destination address (Y page 326) X Start route guidance. The navigable address is added to the address book entry automatically. X COMAND Online i This will provide you with an address book entry that is suitable for navigation. Once you have altered the address data in the address entry menu, the altered address in the navigation system will be used the next time the system is started instead of the postal address. Therefore always ensure that the destination address is indeed the required destination when navigation starts from the address book. Voice tags Introduction You can enter voice tags via LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an address book entry, you can vocally call up this entry and dial a phone number, for example. You can add one voice tag per address book entry. Adding or changing a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with or without a voice tag (¦) (Y page 413). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm. X Select Add or Change and press W to confirm. Subsequent operation is voice-controlled. LINGUATRONIC guides you through the dialogues. Deleting a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 413). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Select Voice tag and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A deletion prompt appears. X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, COMAND Online deletes the voice tag. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X Listening to a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 413). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm. X Select Listen and press W to confirm. You hear the voice tag. Importing phone book entries This function allows you to store phone book entries from the mobile phone in the address book. Possible sources are: Rthe mobile phone memory card Rthe USB device Rthe Bluetooth® interface Imported phone book entries are indicated in the phone book by different symbols (Y page 402). X Search for an entry in the phone book on the mobile phone d (Y page 402). X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Save entry and press W to confirm. The Data saved message appears. The phone book entry is now saved as an address book entry. Rthe Telephone Importing contacts Information and requirements You can import contacts (vCards) from the memory card and from a USB device into the address book, or receive vCards via Bluetooth®. i Up to 2,500 entries can be imported into the address book. A message notifies you when the maximum number is reached. You then have to delete existing entries in order to import new entries (Y page 413). Depending on the source of the contact data, different requirements apply: Source The USB device is inserted into the USB port (Y page 472). It contains importable contact details. Requirements for receiving vCards via Bluetooth® You can receive vCards from devices (e.g. from a PC) that support the sending of vCards via Bluetooth®. It is not necessary to authorise the device in COMAND to do so. Please bear the following in mind: RBluetooth® RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main directory or in folders. COMAND Online allows you to select the relevant folders directly. RvCards must have the ".vcf" file extension. i One vcf file may contain several vCards. COMAND Online supports vCards in versions 2.1 and 3.0. X Select Address book in the address book or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Import contacts and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select From the memory card or From USB device in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Conditions Memory card The SD memory card is inserted (Y page 472). It contains importable contact details. USB device Importing from the memory card or USB device Entries imported from the memory card or from a USB device have the ¯ symbol. The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to import vCards: must be activated in COMAND and on the Bluetooth® device; see the operating instructions for the device. Rthe Bluetooth® device must be able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see the operating instructions for the device). Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle must be switched on. Select Add or Overwrite and press W to confirm. Add imports the entries from the memory card or USB device into the address book. Overwrite imports the entries from the memory card or USB device and overwrites all entries in the address book with the ¯ symbol. The previous entries are then no longer available. After the contact data has been imported successfully, you will see a message to this effect. The address book or the respective telephone basic menu is displayed. i You can select Overwrite if the address book already contains corresponding entries. A message notifies you if the address book is full. X Z COMAND Online The d symbol is replaced by the ¥ symbol. 417 Telephone 418 COMAND Online Receiving vCards via Bluetooth® Select Address book in the address book or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Import contacts and press W to confirm. X Select Receive business cards in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. This interrupts the Bluetooth® connection between COMAND Online and your active mobile phone. COMAND Online is, however, ready to receive vCards from another Bluetooth® device (PC, mobile phone). X Start the data transfer on the external Bluetooth® device (see the operating instructions for the device). The number of vCards received is displayed. X To end reception: press W or the % back button. COMAND Online then reconnects to the mobile phone. Deleting contacts X Select Address book in the address book or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Delete contacts and press W to confirm. X Select one of the following options: RInternal contacts RContacts from storage device RReceived business cards RDelete all A prompt corresponding to your selection appears. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the contacts are deleted according to your selection. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. Switching import of contacts on/off X Received vCards are identified by the ® symbol in the address book. i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the reception of vCards will be terminated. You can choose to have contacts downloaded automatically when a mobile phone is connected with COMAND Online or to have this function suppressed. Connect the mobile phone (Y page 390) Telephone Proceed as follows if you do not want to have sensitive contacts saved in the address book: Connect the mobile phone with COMAND Online. The contacts are automatically downloaded to the address book. X Delete the sensitive contacts in the address book. X Switch off the Import contacts from function ª. Then no contacts will be downloaded and therefore no new ones will be added when your mobile phone is reconnected with COMAND Online. X Switching the display of contact details on/off (privacy) Using the Hide data setting, you can decide whether the phone and address book data are to be visible on the screen. You can therefore, for example, prevent a passenger from seeing the name of a caller. Activating the function has the following effects: RPhone book and address book data from the mobile phone are hidden. Therefore, you cannot use the data to make a call, send text messages or navigate. You still have access to the phone and address book data saved in COMAND Online. RDuring incoming calls, the caller's name is not displayed even if there is an address book entry for the number that is calling. RDuring outgoing calls where the number is entered manually, the recipient's name is not displayed, even if there is an address book entry for the entered number. RThe call list is hidden. RRedialling is not possible. RThe received text messages list is hidden. There is still a notification for incoming text messages. For this to be the case, the connected mobile phone must support the MAP profile. However, it is not possible for the passenger, for example, to view the phone number or quickly access the data. COMAND Online Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Import contacts from and press W to confirm. You can allow O or suppress ª the automatic download. X 419 Connecting the mobile phone (Y page 390) X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X To hide details: select Hide data from and press W to confirm. You can allow ª or prevent O access to address data. Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) Introduction The module can be used as a permanently installed telephone with its own SIM card (Y page 421) or in conjunction with a mobile phone (Y page 421). If you wish to use the module in conjunction with your mobile telephone, the mobile phone must support the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile). Z Telephone 420 The following functions are available in COMAND Online when the module is used: Rhands-free mode modem mode (Y page 423) Rsending and receiving text messages (Y page 425) Raccess to the phone book of the mobile phone (if supported by the mobile phone) (Y page 424) Rloading a mobile phone via the mini USB connection (Y page 426) When the module is installed, the vehicle's exterior aerial is used for reception. This ensures optimal language quality and Internet connectivity. COMAND Online Rdata Installing the module X Slide module ; into bracket : until it audibly engages. Activating the module COMAND Online: press the % repeatedly until the telephone basic menu appears (Y page 394). X Module: to install (Y page 420). X Press and hold button ;. X As soon as indicator lamp : starts flashing yellow, release the button. The indicator lamp continues to flash yellow. X COMAND Online: slide V¬ the controller. The menu bar is displayed. X To select Connect device: device turn the controller and press to confirm. The device list appears. X To select Connect MB SAP module: module turn the controller and then press it. A message is displayed: To connect your MB SAP module, please ensure that it is connected and activated. X To select Start search: search press the controller. The Searching for an active MB SAP module... message appears. If the module has been found and the connection made, the MB SAP module con‐ nection successful message appears. The module is now connected. A menu appears in which you can begin with the authorisation of a mobile telephone for the module. X If you wish to authorise a mobile phone, select Start search and follow the instructions from COMAND Online. Further information on authorising mobile phones (Y page 391). or X If you do not wish to authorise a mobile telephone, select &. The COMAND device list display is shown. X i You can activate the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) on up to eight vehicles that have COMAND Online. The settings remain stored on the module. If you wish to change the module, you have to remove it first. The module does not need to be deactivated to do this. Deactivation is only useful if you do not intend to use the module again with COMAND Online. Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) in SIM card mode Inserting a SIM card mobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone that was connected before that one. You can authorise up to 15 mobile phones. Only one mobile phone can be connected to the module and COMAND Online at any one time. You can configure the mobile phone PIN to be stored in the module (Y page 423). When establishing a Bluetooth® connection, reentering the PIN is only necessary if the SIM card PIN has been changed. Conditions You can authorise and connect your mobile phone to the module, if: Rthe X With the contact surface facing down, insert SIM card : into the SIM card slot until it engages. After a SIM card is inserted in the module, a Bluetooth® connection with another mobile phone is no longer possible. Any existing Bluetooth® connection is ended upon SIM card insertion. Removing a SIM card X Press the SIM card and then release it. The SIM card is pushed out slightly and can then be removed. Connect the mobile phone General notes When you use your mobile phone with the module and COMAND Online for the first time, you must search for and authorise it. If your mobile phone has already been authorised, it will be connected automatically. COMAND Online always searches for the last connected mobile phone. If no connection can be made to the most recently connected module is installed (Y page 420) and activated in COMAND Online (Y page 420) Rno SIM card is inserted in the module Rthe mobile phone has no active Bluetooth® connection to another device Rthe mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile) Depending on the type of mobile phone, different settings must be changed on the mobile phone (see the operating instructions for the mobile phone). RBluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and must be made visible to other devices. RThe Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile of the mobile phone must be activated. RYou must know the Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. A list of mobile phones which are compatible with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Z 421 COMAND Online Telephone COMAND Online 422 Telephone Searching for a mobile phone X To call up the telephone basic menu in COMAND Online: press the % button one or more times. X To switch to the menu bar: slide V¬ the controller. X To select Connect device: device turn the controller and press to confirm. The device list appears. X Select Search for phones. phones You will see the prompt: Do you wish to connect to a Bluetooth phone or an SAP phone? X Select SAP telephone. telephone You will see the message: Before start‐ ing the search, ensure that your phone is switched on, Bluetooth is activated, the SAP function is activated and your device is visi‐ ble. ble X Select Start search. search The list of retrieved SAP telephones appears. You can now authorise and connect the mobile phone. Authorising and connecting a mobile phone X To select the mobile phone that is to be authorised and connected in the COMAND device list under Phones found on the MB SAP module: module turn and press the controller. A prompt asking you to enter the 16-digit PIN appears in the display. X Enter any 16-digit PIN and confirm your entry. X When prompted to do so, enter the same 16-digit PIN on the mobile phone within 20 seconds and confirm. X Depending on the mobile phone used, you may have to confirm a module connection request on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). X In COMAND Online, enter the PIN of the SIM card and confirm, if necessary. i Follow any prompts on your mobile phone. If necessary you will be asked to confirm further profile requests. Switching between mobile phones If you have authorised more than one mobile phone on the module, you can switch between the individual phones. X To select the required mobile phone in the COMAND device list under Phones found on the MB SAP module: module turn and press the controller. The selected mobile phone is searched for and connected if it is within Bluetooth® range and if Bluetooth® is activated. X Confirm the module's connection request on the mobile phone (see the operating instructions for the mobile phone). X In COMAND Online, enter the PIN of the SIM card and confirm, if necessary. Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the Bluetooth® phone list. i You can only switch to another authorised mobile phone if you are not currently making a call. Connecting manually If the connection between the module and the mobile phone has been terminated, you can connect to an authorised mobile phone manually. Telephone To select Connect device in the basic telephone menu: turn and press the controller. X Select SAP telephones. telephones You will see the Bluetooth® names of mobile phones that are already authorised. X Select the desired mobile phone. X To select the list symbol on the right-hand side next to the message: slide VY and press the controller. X Enable (PIN is saved) or disable (PIN is not saved) the Store PIN checkbox. 423 X Briefly press button ; on the module. Indicator lamp : flashes blue. In the COMAND Online display, a message appears which informs the user that the telephone is being activated. COMAND Online always searches for the last connected mobile phone. If no connection can be made to the most recently connected mobile phone, the system searches for the mobile phone that was connected before that one. Data modem mode X Connect the mobile phone to the module (Y page 421). or Insert the SIM card into the integrated SIM card reader on the module (Y page 421). X Before connecting for the first time, select the network provider in COMAND Online (Y page 434). Use as a data modem is automatically activated. X To activate/deactivate data roaming (Y page 424). X Settings Storing/deleting the SIM card PIN If you store the SIM card PIN in the module, it is not necessary to enter it when logging in again. Setting the ringtone Incoming calls are indicated on the module by an audible signal. You can select one of ten ringtones. X To select Connect device in the basic telephone menu: turn and press the controller. X Select the MB SAP module phones menu. X Select the desired mobile phone. X To select the list symbol to the right of the mobile phone names: slide VY the controller and press to confirm. X Select the Ringtones menu. A menu appears. X Select a ringtone. The selected ringtone is played. X Press the % button. COMAND Online accepts the setting and exits the menu. Activating/deactivating phone number transmission Prerequisite: the module is connected with the mobile telephone (Y page 421) or is being used in SIM card mode (Y page 421). If you activate phone number transmission, the caller you are speaking with can see your phone number. In the standard setting, the system accepts the settings used by the mobile phone network provider. These may vary and can be Z COMAND Online X Telephone 424 obtained from the mobile phone network provider. Activating phone number transmission: Enter the number "00031" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. The phone number will be transmitted in future. X COMAND Online Deactivating phone number transmission: Enter the number "00030" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. The phone number will no longer be transmitted in future. X Activating/deactivating data roaming Prerequisite: the module is connected with the mobile telephone (Y page 421) or is being used in SIM card mode (Y page 421). If you activate data roaming, you can receive and send data abroad via the module. Data roaming is deactivated in the standard setting. To activate data roaming: Enter the number "00061" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. Data roaming is activated. X To deactivate data roaming: Enter the number "00060" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. Data roaming is deactivated. X Activating/deactivating network provider restriction Prerequisite: the module is connected with the mobile telephone (Y page 421) or is being used in SIM card mode (Y page 421). When you activate network provider restriction, the module will not log into foreign networks. You will then be unable to conduct telephone calls or send and receive text messages when abroad. Network provider restriction is deactivated in the standard setting. To deactivate network provider restriction: Enter the number "00070" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. Network provider restriction is deactivated. X To activate network provider restriction: Enter the number "00071" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. Network provider restriction is activated. X Adjusting the brightness of the indicator lamp Situation-related dimming: Enter the number "00082" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. The LED is dimmed as long as the user does not perform any actions (press a key etc.). X No change to brightness: Enter the number "00083" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. The LED is always bright regardless of any user actions. X Transferring the phone book In order to use the phone book of the mobile phone via COMAND Online, the phone book must be transferred using the module. The data transfer may take up to ten minutes. Transmission occurs automatically after a Bluetooth® connection is automatically established. i If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the system Telephone A list of mobile phones which are compatible with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Speed-dial keys You can assign numbers as speed-dial numbers as desired (Y page 407). Text messages General notes Special considerations for receiving text messages when using the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile): the Bluetooth® SAP profile, you only have access to the text message memory on the SIM card. RIncoming text messages are stored on the SIM card by the Bluetooth® SAP profile. RDepending on the mobile phone, these text messages are not directly visible. They must first be selected (see the operating instructions for the mobile phone). RIf the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® MAP profile (Message Access Profile), the module will download the telephone text messages. The text messages are then transferred to COMAND Online. On condition that the downloading function for text messages has been activated. RThe text messages stored on the SIM card have the word "SIM:" in front of them. RThe SIM card can only store a limited number of text messages. When the memory is full, no more text messages can be received. Deleting text messages stored on the SIM card via COMAND Online (Y page 411). RWith A list of mobile phones which are compatible with the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Conditions The module is connected with the mobile phone (Y page 421) or is being used in the SIM card mode (Y page 421). The mobile phone must support the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile). Activating/deactivating text message downloading from the mobile phone Downloading of text messages can be deactivated when the module is connected to a mobile phone. Only text messages that are saved on the SIM card will then be transferred. Deactivating the downloading of telephone text messages Enter the number "00080" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. Only text messages from the SIM card will be downloaded. X Activating the downloading of telephone text messages Enter the number "00081" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. Text messages on the SIM card and from the telephone memory will be downloaded. X Call lists General notes If you use the module to make calls, the calls made are not entered in the mobile phone call list. All telephone functions are transferred to the module via the SAP profile. If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PBAP profile (Phone Book Access Profile), the module will download existing call lists. Z COMAND Online gives priority to loading phone book entries from the phone memory. If there are no entries in the phone memory, the phone book entries from the SIM card are imported. 425 Telephone 426 COMAND Online Deleting call lists X Enter the number "0002" in the telephone basic menu. X Press the 6 button. The call lists stored in the module are reset and will no longer appear starting with the next phone book transfer. The call lists of the connected mobile phone are not deleted. Deleting the call lists of the mobile phone (see the operating instructions for the mobile phone). Deleting call lists from COMAND Online (Y page 407). i In SIM card mode, the Delete call lists menu item is available in COMAND Online. Terminating the connection between the mobile phone and the module Automatic disconnection Once outside the receiving range, the Bluetooth® connection between the mobile phone and the module is automatically terminated. Charging a mobile phone Slide cover ; on the module in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X Connect the mobile phone with a mini USB data cable to USB socket :. X Resetting the module The module can be reset to its factory settings. This way, all stored information for authorisation of mobile phones, as well as the stored phone book, will be deleted. Manual disconnection X Terminate the Bluetooth® connection on the mobile phone (see the operating instructions for the mobile phone). Re-establishing a connection X You can re-establish the Bluetooth® connection after disconnecting manually (Y page 421). Press and hold button ; on the module until indicator lamp : lights up orange. X Release button ;. Indicator lamp : flashes back and forth between yellow and red. X Press button ; again. The module is reset to factory settings. All settings are deleted. X Telephone Deactivation makes sense if you do not intend to use the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) again with COMAND Online. X COMAND Online: press the % repeatedly until the telephone basic menu appears (Y page 394). X To switch to the menu bar: slide V¬ the controller. X To select Connect device: device turn the controller and press to confirm. The device list appears. X Select Disconnect MB SAP module. module Removing the module All important vehicle data is sent via mobile phone to ensure that you receive optimum support. The mobile phone must be connected to COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface. The following data is transmitted: Rthe vehicle identification number total distance recorder reading Rthe vehicle position Rthe telephone number Rthe service code (only when required for maintenance) Rthe i Please note that Mercedes-Benz Contact is a Mercedes-Benz customer service. In emergencies, always call the national emergency services first, using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. i Currently, this service is available for vehicles from the following European countries: RBelgium RGermany RFrance RUnited Push release button : in the direction of the arrow. X Slide module ; in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X Kingdom RIreland RItaly RLuxembourg RNetherlands RAustria RPoland Mercedes-Benz Contact Introduction Mercedes-Benz Contact offers fast assistance at the touch of a button – around the clock. For any queries about the vehicle, Mercedes-Benz Contact offers a fast and easy connecting call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You can request an appointment, or call for help in the event of a breakdown. RSwitzerland RSlovakia RSpain RCzech Republic RHungary Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the Z COMAND Online Deactivating the module 427 COMAND Online 428 Telephone vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND Online. X Call up the COMAND phone book (Y page 401). X Select MB Contact by turning cVd the COMAND controller. There are two ways to contact the MercedesBenz Customer Centre: X Press W the COMAND controller to confirm. or X Press the 6 button on COMAND Online. This initiates a call. When the call is connected, a voice message prompts you to confirm the data transmission by pressing the stated number on the COMAND Online keypad. After confirmation, COMAND Online sends the required vehicle data. i Alternatively, you can initiate a call using the multifunction steering wheel (see the vehicle Owner's Manual). During data transmission, you will see a corresponding symbol in the display. This may take a moment. Then, you can select the desired service and be connected to a specialist from the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Contact your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information on Mercedes-Benz Contact, the range of services offered and on using the function. Demand-actuated service message To attain the optimal level of support in maintaining your vehicle, you can arrange a service appointment directly with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. As well as a warning in the instrument cluster, a window appears in the COMAND display. Here, a message actively indicates that a service is required and this message enables you to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre directly. You will see the message: is due soon. Would you like to make a workshop appointment? X To arrange a service appointment: select Call Now by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. After your confirmation, the vehicle data is sent via Mercedes-Benz Contact, and a Customer Centre employee personally deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. They will then contact with you within 24 hours to confirm the following details: Rscope Rlength of service of stay Rprice To arrange a service appointment later: select Call Later and confirm with W. The window is hidden, then reappears after a certain amount of time. X To not arrange a service appointment: select No and confirm with W. The window is hidden and does not show this maintenance requirement again. X Mercedes-Benz Contact Accident Assistance Mercedes-Benz emergency call system active Mercedes-Benz Contact Accident Assistance is a supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (Y page 429). If an emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre has been triggered following an accident, a voice connection with an operator is established. Depending on the accident situation, the operator may then suggest that you forward the call to Mercedes-Benz Contact Accident Assistance. This will enable you Telephone Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Overview The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can help to decisively reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It can also help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to see. The emergency call can be made automatically or manually and is transmitted to the Europe-wide private Mercedes-Benz emergency call number. The vehicle position data is simultaneously transmitted by text message and DTMF to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre transmits the vehicle position data to one of the Europe-wide public emergency call centres. In almost all countries, the voice connection can be made in the respective country's language. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system function is operational, you see the SOS READY display message in the basic telephone menu (Y page 432). Information on service availability in Europe (Y page 429). i Note that manual emergency calls should only be used if you or others are in need of rescue, not e.g. in the event of a breakdown. Operation costs (e.g. for rescue teams) incurred by a falsely triggered manual emergency call, must be paid for by the vehicle owner. Service availability in Europe The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is available for your vehicle for 15 years after the initial date of production, if: Rit is equipped with COMAND Online Rit was originally produced for the European market You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect_ecall. Conditions Equipment requirements You need: Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone which, if possible, supports the MAP profile (Message Access Profile) for sending text messages, or Rif the vehicle is equipped with permanently installed/SAP telephony, a SIM card or a suitable mobile phone Functional requirements The vehicle has GPS reception. Check the following: Ra RCOMAND Online is switched on using the Bluetooth® interface, the mobile phone must be authorised for and connected with COMAND Online, and logged into a mobile phone network Rwhen Z COMAND Online to make arrangements to have the vehicle towed to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X To forward the call: press the g key on the number keypad. The voice connection to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre is ended and the call is automatically forwarded to Mercedes-Benz Contact Accident Assistance. After your confirmation, the vehicle data is sent via Mercedes-Benz Contact. An employee of Mercedes-Benz Contact Accident Assistance will then make the necessary arrangements with MB Service 24h to have your vehicle towed to a MercedesBenz Service Centre. 429 COMAND Online 430 Telephone Connecting the mobile phone (Y page 390) Reconnecting the mobile phone automatically (Y page 393) If your vehicle is equipped with permanently installed/SAP telephony, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: i Before using this function, make sure that Rin "telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP Automatic emergency call profile)", a SIM card has been entered and is logged into the mobile phone network. SAP (SIM Access Profile) Ra suitable SAP-capable mobile phone is connected to "telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile)" via the SAP profile and is logged into the mobile phone network. i Telephony via the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) (Y page 421). i If your vehicle is equipped with a mobile phone bracket, the bracket should be inserted and the mobile phone should be placed in the bracket. This provides you with the following advantages: Rthe mobile phone is protected from any mechanical damage in the event of an accident. Rthe mobile phone remains charged. Rin most cases, the transmitting and receiving power of a mobile phone is better if the mobile phone is placed in its bracket. If the mobile phone is connected, you see the SOS READY display message in the basic telephone menu in front of the name of the mobile phone (Y page 432). i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be obtained from a MercedesBenz Service Centre or at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. your mobile phone contract: Rpermits calls, text messages and roaming from both your country of residence and from abroad, and Rthat these functions have been activated ! If an emergency call has been made: pro- vided the road and traffic conditions at the accident site allow it, remain in the vehicle until the voice connection with the operator at the emergency call centre has been established. On the basis of the call, the operator can decide whether it is necessary to deploy rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. i Depending on the severity of the acci- dent, it can take between one and three minutes until the operator can speak with you. Requirement: the ignition is switched on. If restraint systems have been triggered during an accident, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can automatically dial the Europe-wide private Mercedes-Benz emergency call number. Restraint systems include, for example, airbags or belt tensioners. The emergency call system can establish a voice connection between the vehicle occupants and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The accident data is sent to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre by SMS and DTMF while the voice connection is operating. The accident data contains metre-precise GPS positioning data for the moment it is sent, as well as the type of vehicle involved in the accident. i If your vehicle is equipped with an SOS button in the overhead control unit, it flashes until the emergency call has been completed. Telephone emergency call. i In the following cases, you see a corresponding message on the COMAND display: i In the following cases, you see a corre- Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre could not be made Rnor has a call been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre In such circumstances, dial the emergency number 112 on your mobile phone. sponding message on the COMAND display: Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre could not be made Rnor has a call been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre In such circumstances, dial the emergency number 112 on your mobile phone. Manual emergency call ! If an emergency call has been made: provided the road and traffic conditions at the accident site allow it, remain in the vehicle until the voice connection with the operator at the emergency call centre has been established. On the basis of the call, the operator can decide whether it is necessary to deploy rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. i Note that manual emergency calls should only be used if you or others are in need of rescue, not e.g. in the event of a breakdown. Operation costs (e.g. for rescue teams) incurred by a falsely triggered manual emergency call, must be paid for by the vehicle owner. Vehicles equipped with an SOS button If your vehicle is equipped with the SOS button in the overhead control unit: X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second. The manual emergency call is triggered. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes until the emergency call is concluded. In the address book Call up the address book (Y page 412). The 1st entry, Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call, call is highlighted. X Press W the COMAND controller. The emergency call to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is triggered. X i If you have accidentally made a manual emergency call, you can end it in the following ways: Rby pressing the ~ button on COMAND Online Rby pressing the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel i In the following cases, you see a corresponding message on the COMAND display: Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre could not be made Rnor has a call been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre In such circumstances, dial the emergency number 112 on your mobile phone. Transmitted data Depending on how the data is transmitted (text message or DTMF), different data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. Text messages transmit the following: Rthe vehicle's GPS position data direction of travel Rthe vehicle identification number Rthe Z COMAND Online i It is not possible to end an automatic 431 432 Online and Internet functions Ra Mercedes-Benz Contact coding indication of whether the call was triggered automatically or manually Ra time stamp Rthe language settings on COMAND Online DTMF sends a reduced data package that does not contain the vehicle identification number and time stamp. Ran COMAND Online Displays in the COMAND display : Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is operational If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call is available, you see the SOS READY display message in the basic telephone menu. If a Mercedes-Benz emergency call is triggered either automatically or manually, you also see the Mercedes-Benz emergency call active display message. If position and vehicle data are sent to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre, you see the Mercedes-Benz emergency call Sending data display message. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call connects with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre, you see the Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call Connected display message. Online and Internet functions Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. General notes Conditions for access G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND Online. The COMAND Online Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access are available via the Bluetooth® interface or via the data-enabled MB SAP module. In order to use the functions, the following conditions are necessary: RThe mobile phone supports the DUN Bluetooth® profile (Dial-Up Networking) and is connected to COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface (Y page 390). The DUN Bluetooth® profile enables the mobile phone to establish a dial-up connection to the Internet. RYou need a valid mobile service contract with a data option, which is used to calculate the associated connection costs. RThe access data of the mobile phone network provider must be set on COMAND Online for the connected mobile phone (Y page 434). Online and Internet functions i If the connected mobile phone supports Function restrictions i You can obtain more detailed information You will not be able to use the mobile phone, will no longer be able to use the mobile phone, or you may have to wait before using it, in the following situations: about suitable mobile phones on the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect or from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i If you use incorrect access data, addi- tional costs may be incurred. This can happen when you use details that are different from the contract or details from another contract/data package. i The availability of individual MercedesBenz Apps may vary depending on the country. i The terms of use are shown when COMAND Online is used for the first time and then once a year thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of use when the vehicle is stationary. i Internet pages cannot be shown on the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion. Connection difficulties while the vehicle is in motion The following could be the cause of call disconnection: Rinsufficient GSM/UMTS network coverage Rthe vehicle has moved into a GSM cell with no free channels SIM card used is not compatible with the network available Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is logged into the network at the same time. Rthe Rif the mobile phone is switched off Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off in COMAND Online Rif the Bluetooth® function is switched off on the mobile phone while you are using Bluetooth® interface telephony Rif the mobile phone is not logged into a mobile phone network Rif neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a phone and an Internet connection i It is possible that you may not be able to receive calls when an Internet connection is active. This depends on the mobile phone and the mobile phone network used. Roaming When you are driving your vehicle in a different country and using the COMAND Online Internet and online functions, you may incur additional costs (roaming fees). When you are in a different country, your SIM card must be enabled for data roaming. If your mobile phone network provider does not have a data roaming agreement with the roaming partner, it may not be possible to establish an Internet connection. Deactivate this function on your mobile phone if you want to avoid data roaming when you are in a different country. Setting access data Introduction To use online and Internet functions, you need Internet access data for the connected mobile phone. You can obtain this from your mobile phone network provider. Z COMAND Online the PAN Bluetooth profile (Personal Area Network), you can use the automatic configuration function (Y page 435). 433 434 Online and Internet functions A selected/manually set mobile phone network provider is only valid for the mobile phone connected when the selection/setting is made. The mobile phone network provider is set automatically upon reconnection. i When you are driving your vehicle in a dif- ferent country and using the online and Internet functions on COMAND Online, you may incur additional costs (roaming fees). COMAND Online i While initialising the mobile phone for the Internet connection, access data which is already on the mobile phone may be overwritten. You should therefore check the settings on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions). i Adjust the access data settings when the vehicle is stationary. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Selecting/setting Internet access data X Select Settings by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. When you connect the mobile phone to COMAND Online for the first time, there is no mobile phone network provider preset (Y page 390). Provider: is followed by the words not selected. selected If a mobile phone is connected and a mobile phone network provider has been selected, the name of the mobile phone network is shown after Provider: Provider:. X Press W the COMAND controller. The list of mobile phone network providers appears. Calling up the list of mobile phone network providers X Select the ® icon in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. Online and Internet functions 435 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see a message informing you that automatic configuration is possible. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. X List of mobile phone network providers (empty) In order to set the access data of the mobile phone network provider you can: Rselect the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider (Y page 435) Rfor automatic configuration – this option only appears in the list of providers if the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PAN (Personal Area Network) profile (Y page 435). Rmanually set the access data of the mobile phone network provider (Y page 437) In the list of mobile phone network providers, select Autom. configuration by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 434). The configuration data is transferred from the mobile phone. If the configuration is successful, a # dot appears in front of Autom. configuration . Selecting access data of the mobile phone network provider Configuring access data automatically Searching for providers X Requirement: your telephone must be connected to COMAND Online via Bluetooth® and must support the Bluetooth® PAN profile. Option 1 if your telephone is not yet configured for Internet access: X Select the ® icon in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cV d the Select Search for providers in the mobile phone network providers list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 434). A list of countries appears. Select the country of your mobile phone network provider, e.g. Germany Germany, and press W to confirm. The list of available mobile phone network providers appears. i The access data for the mobile phone network provider is selected once for the mobile phone connected and is loaded X Z COMAND Online Option 2: Online and Internet functions 436 again each time the mobile phone is connected (Y page 434). X To edit the access data: proceed as described for manually entering the access data (Y page 437). When you confirm the edited access data, the list of mobile phone network providers appears and displays the selected provider. If, after selecting a mobile phone network provider, several access settings are displayed: COMAND Online X i You must set the access data of the mobile phone network provider who provides the SIM card and the associated data package (access settings) for the connected mobile phone. The access data remains the same if you are in a different country (roaming). The access data of another network is not selected. There are mobile phone network providers who offer multiple access data. This depends on the data package used, for example. The mobile phone network provider only has one access setting X Select the mobile phone network provider by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. To check preset access data: select Edit and confirm with W. The list of access data appears (Y page 437). X Check the access data. X If the access data is correct: press the % reset button or the & symbol and press W to confirm. You can now accept the access data of the mobile phone network provider. X Select Save and press W to confirm. The list of mobile phone network providers appears; the access data of the provider has been accepted. X Select the appropriate access setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. To check access settings: select Edit and press W to confirm. The list of access data appears (Y page 437). X Check the access data. X If the access data is correct: press the % reset button or the & symbol and press W to confirm. You can now accept the access data of the mobile phone network provider. X Select Save and press W to confirm. The list of mobile phone network providers appears; the access data of the provider has been accepted. X X To edit the access data: proceed as described in "Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider" (Y page 437). When you confirm the edited access data, the list of mobile phone network providers appears and displays the selected provider. Online and Internet functions Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider Explanation of the access data Input field Meaning Provider: Name of the provider to be displayed in the list of mobile phone network providers. The name can be freely selected. The standard entry is provider . Ph. number: Access number for establishing the connection. i The access number depends on the mobile phone used. For GSM/ UMTS mobile phones, *99***1# is used as a standard. Access point: APN network access point (Access Point Name). You can obtain this information from your mobile phone network provider. i Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers and mobile phones. List of access data (new provider) The user identification can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Calling up the list of access data i Entry is not necessary User ID: X Confirm Create new provider in the list of mobile phone network providers by pressing W the COMAND controller. The list of access data appears. The standard name provider is automatically entered into the Provider: field. You can now make the entries. i The access data of the mobile phone net- work provider is set once for the connected mobile phone. for all mobile phone network providers. Password: The password can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. i Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers. Z COMAND Online The currently selected access settings (# dot in front of the entry) are used for the connected mobile phone. X To return to the carousel view: press the % back button twice. or X Press W the COMAND controller and then the % back button. 437 Online and Internet functions 438 Input field COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The input menu for the phone number appears. Meaning DNS address: The DNS addresses (Domain Name Service) can be negotiated automatically or entered manually. The required information can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. COMAND Online i Most mobile phone network providers support the Automatic function. If you selected the Manual option, you are usually required to enter a DNS address. DNS1: DNS2: Fields for entering the DNS server addresses manually. The address can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider. Entering access data X Enter the telephone number. To enter the access data: in the list of access data, select the Access point: input field and confirm by pressing W. X Enter the access data. X To enter the user ID: in the list of access data, select the User ID: input field and confirm by pressing W. X Enter the user ID. X X In the list of access data, confirm the Pro‐ vider: input field by pressing W (Y page 437). An input menu appears. To enter the password: in the list of access data, select the Password: input field and confirm by pressing W. X Enter the password. X Enter the provider (Y page 303). X X To enter the phone number: in the list of access data, select the Ph. number: input field by sliding ÆV or turning cVd the X To set the DNS address: select Auto‐ matic or Manual with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Automatic: the DNS address is set autoAutomatic matically. Online and Internet functions Manual: uses the entries in DNS 1 and DNS Manual 2. 439 Managing access data of the mobile phone network provider Overview The access data of the mobile phone network provider can be: Redited Rcopied, then edited and accepted for a new provider name i Changes that you make to the access data of a mobile phone network provider apply to all mobile phones that use this access data. Entering the DNS1 Entering the example DNS After selecting Manual Manual, select the DNS1 input field with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Enter 172.28.4.81 172.28.4.81, for example. X Internet access data for other mobile phones If the access data is already available in the list of mobile phone network providers, you can use it for additional mobile phones. The following prerequisites are required for this: additional mobile phone must be connected. Rthe access data must apply to the mobile phone contract of the currently connected mobile phone. X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 435). After you select the provider, the list of mobile phone network providers is closed. The selected provider is entered. i When the Internet connection is active, you cannot edit or delete the access data of the currently set mobile phone network provider. Editing the access data X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller (Y page 435). X Select the symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Rthe Confirm Edit by pressing W. The access data is displayed. X Edit the access data. A description of the entry can be found under "Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider" (Y page 437). X Z COMAND Online Rdeleted Online and Internet functions 440 Saving access data under a new provider name X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller (Y page 435). X Select the symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. been used, COMAND Online automatically disconnects from the Internet. X Select Settings in the carousel view by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Disconnect automatically after: and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting. Confirm Copy provider entry by pressing W. The access data is displayed. X Edit the access data. A description of the entry can be found under "Making entries" in the "Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider" section (Y page 437). X COMAND Online X Deleting the access data of the mobile phone network provider X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller (Y page 435). X Select the symbol to the right of the entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Confirm Delete by pressing W. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the access data. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. X Selecting the length of time for automatic disconnection from the Internet If a preset time has elapsed during which neither the online functions nor the Internet have Select 5 min, min 15 min or Off and press W to confirm. Off switches the function off. An active Internet connection is identified by the double arrows on the top right of the display. Establishing/ending the connection Establishing the connection The conditions for establishing a connection are described in "General notes" (Y page 432). X Option 1: select the ® icon in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller until the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel or a favourite is brought to the front, if these have been previously created (Y page 459). X Option 2: enter a web address (Y page 454). Online and Internet functions 441 Ending the connection X Press the ~ button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Select the scissors symbol on the bottom right of the carousel view and press W to confirm. cancelled, COMAND Online tries to reconnect. You should therefore always close the connection on COMAND Online or via the multifunction steering wheel. Google™ Local Search Calling up the Local Search menu X For both options, press W the COMAND controller. The Internet connection is established. An active Internet connection is identified with symbol :. The example shows the menu in the Google™ Local Search (Y page 442) function. X To cancel the connection: while the connection is being established, confirm Can‐ cel by pressing W. or Press the ~ button on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel. i If a phone call is made at the same time as the active Internet connection, the ¡ symbol is displayed in :. The Internet connection remains active depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network used. X Select the ® icon in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A list with active Mercedes-Benz Apps appears. X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears. X Press W to confirm the Google Local Search entry. The Google Local Search menu appears. X To exit the menu: select Back by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Z COMAND Online i If the mobile phone Internet connection is Online and Internet functions 442 Searching Selecting a search position Entry restriction It is only possible to enter a search term in the input menu when the vehicle is stationary. COMAND Online Entering a search term After a search term has been entered and confirmed, a menu appears. COMAND Online searches for available POIs for the search term entered: Rnear the current vehicle position Ralong the calculated route If a destination has previously been entered, the function is available. Rnear the destination If a destination has previously been entered, the function is available. Rnear an address X After selecting Near destination, destination enter an address and confirm. The search results are displayed. X Input menu X Confirm Search in the Google Local Search menu by pressing W. The input menu appears. To enter using the character bar: enter the search term. X To enter characters using the number pad: press the number keys in rapid succession. The character appears when the key is pressed. The first available character is highlighted. X Example: search results X After entering the search term, select ¬ by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Here, you can select where the destination search should begin. X Select an entry in the list of search results by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X To show the detailed view: confirm Details by pressing W the COMAND controller. The address of the selected entry is displayed. To use a search result as the destination: select Navigate to by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation (Y page 329). You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation. i The search result is stored in the "Last destinations" memory at the same time (Y page 371). You can take the destination from this memory and save it permanently in the destination memory (Y page 369). X 443 To call up a destination: select Call with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You then switch to the telephone function and make the call (Y page 397). You then switch to the telephone function and make the call. i If there is no phone number available, the menu item cannot be selected. X To import a destination: select Import with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can choose whether you want to save the POI as a personal POI on the SD memory card or in the address book. i If there is no SD memory card in the slot, the Save as personal POI menu item cannot be selected. X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). COMAND Online Using search results Online and Internet functions X To save as a personal POI: confirm Save as personal POI by pressing W the COMAND controller. The entry is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card. i You can use a personal POI in navigation mode for route calculation (Y page 347). If the personal POI is saved on the SD memory, you can also use it for route calculation in another vehicle. X To save to the address book: select Save to address book by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book. X Z Online and Internet functions COMAND Online 444 Popular searches Search history This function allows you to search using predefined search criteria. X Bring Popular searches in the local search menu to the front by turning cVd (the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu displays the available search criteria. This function offers you the previous search queries. X Bring Search history in the Local search menu to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The previous search queries are shown with the most recent at the top. Example: popular searches Select the search criteria and press W to confirm. X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the search position" section (Y page 442). If the vehicle is stationary, the search results can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel Adler". Select the search criteria and press W to confirm. X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the search position" section (Y page 442). If the vehicle is stationary, the search results can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel Adler". X X Destination/route download Introduction You can send destinations and routes from Google™ maps to the server and download these via this function. You can use the des- Online and Internet functions 445 Bring the Destination/route download panel to the front and press W to confirm. Exit, you quit the destination/route i With Exit download. With Options Options, you set the options for the destination/route download (Y page 452). X Confirm the Destination/route down‐ load panel by pressing W. Available routes and destinations are shown in the list. COMAND Online tinations and routes for route guidance and save them for further use. Sending destinations to the server Call up the website for Google™ Maps on the Internet. X Enter a destination. X Click "More" at the destination. X Click on "Send". X Click "Send to vehicle". X Select Mercedes-Benz as the vehicle brand. X Enter the vehicle identification number. X Click on "Send". The destination is sent to the server. i The vehicle identification number (VIN) is preset at the factory as identification for download. Instead of the vehicle ID, you can also enter your e-mail address here. The availability of the destination/route download function is country-dependent. In order to be able to use the download, you first have to register COMAND Online. This is done in the vehicle by entering your name and e-mail address once and confirming the general terms and conditions. X Downloading destinations from the server Proceed as follows to use destinations/ routes that have been sent to the server: Select the ® symbol in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears. X X You can save up to 20 routes and 50 destinations for your vehicle on the server and display these in the list. If you send further routes or destinations to the server, the existing entries are deleted from the list. i The routes/destinations sent from Goo- gle™ maps to the server are automatically deleted from there after seven days. Using destinations Calling up a menu X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Displaying details Confirm Details in the menu by pressing W the COMAND controller. The route or destination is displayed. X Z Online and Internet functions 446 To call up a POI: confirm the entry by pressing W. i You can use the function if: X Ra mobile phone is connected (Y page 390) Rthe destination address contains a telephone number Using as a destination Select Navigate to in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation (Y page 329). i A route can only be stored as a personal POI on an SD memory card or taken directly for route calculation (Y page 446). COMAND Online X Placing a call at the destination X Select Call in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You then switch to the telephone function and make the call (Y page 397). Importing a destination/route When importing, you can choose whether you want to save the destination as a personal POI on an SD memory card or in the address book. You can only save routes as personal POIs to an SD memory card, but not in the address book. X Select Import in the menu with the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i If there is no SD memory card in the slot, the As personal POI menu item is greyed out. X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 472). To save as a personal POI: confirm As personal POI by pressing W the COMAND controller. The entry is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card. i You can use a personal POI in navigation mode for route calculation (Y page 347). You can also use a personal POI in another vehicle for route calculation. X To save to the address book: select To address book by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book. X Deleting a destination/route from the server X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A query appears asking whether the destination or the route should be deleted. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. Weather Introduction COMAND can receive weather forecasts anywhere in the world via online connection and display them in an information chart (current day, 5-day forecast) or in the weather map. The weather map can display the following weather data with symbols: Rhazard icons (e.g. storms, slippery conditions) Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow) Rweather overview Rtemperatures Rcloud cover Rwind direction and speeds Online and Internet functions To switch on: select the ® icon in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until Mercedes-Benz Apps is brought to the front and press W to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps carousel view appears. X X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until Weather is brought to the front and press W to confirm. The information chart shows the current weather at the current vehicle position (factory setting). You can change the default view and the default location in the Options menu (Y page 451). You see the following information: Rthe time of the current weather report Rthe current temperature Rinformation on the weather (e.g. cloudy, rain) Rthe maximum daytime temperature Rthe minimum daytime temperature Rthe probability of rain Rthe forecast for the current day (three time intervals) X To switch to a five-day forecast: confirm 5-day by pressing W. The information chart displays the forecast for the next five days in the currently selected location. X To return to the current weather information: confirm Current by pressing W. A menu appears. X To deactivate: press the % back button. or X Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, the carousel view will appear. Displaying additional information In addition to the current temperatures, you can also display information such as humidity and air quality (if the information is available). X Select Info in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The information chart displays information for the selected location. Selecting the location Introduction You can select the following options for the weather forecast: Rthe current vehicle position destination Ra winter sports area Ra location anywhere in the world You can select the location in the information chart (option 1) (Y page 447) or in the map (option 2) (Y page 448). Weather information is supplied by the nearest weather station. Rthe Option 1: selecting the location in the information chart X Select Position in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X To select the current vehicle position: confirm Current position by pressing W. X To select the destination: select Near destination by turning cVd the Z COMAND Online Switching the weather display on/off 447 Online and Internet functions 448 COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i If a route has been calculated, you can COMAND Online select Near destination (Y page 329). The menu item is otherwise greyed out. X To select a winter sports area: select In winter sports areas in the menu and press W to confirm. A list of countries appears. X Select a country, e.g. ANDORRA ANDORRA, and press W to confirm. The available winter sports areas are displayed. X X X Select a winter sports area from the menu and press W to confirm. The information chart shows information on: Rtype of skiing Rsnow conditions Rtemperatures To select the location: select Other location in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An input menu appears. Enter the search area. Character entry (Y page 305). The information chart with the weather forecast appears when the search area has been entered. Entry Example Postcode 100621 City Beijing Address Capital Airport Option 2: selecting the location in the weather map X Call up the weather map and move to the desired location (Y page 448). X Press W the COMAND controller. The menu bar is shown. X Press W the COMAND controller again and confirm Display weather. weather The information chart displays the current weather for the selected location. Weather map Calling up the weather map Select Map in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The map appears in a scale of 100 km. X To display the crosshair: slide ZV the COMAND controller. X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller. The weather map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair. X To change the map scale: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. X i The data is downloaded again from the server for these functions. This can delay the display of the weather map. Showing/hiding the menu in the weather map X To show: press W the COMAND controller in the weather map. X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND controller. Online and Internet functions Weather characteristic Display in the map Hazard icons Shows warnings Weather radar Displays the rain radar as a coloured area on the map Atmospheric pressure Shows the weather overview with information islands Temperatures Displays the temperatures Cloud cover Displays the cloud cover Winds Displays wind direction with an arrow and wind speed with colouring To switch back to the information chart: display the menu on the weather map. (Y page 448) X Select Display weather and press W to confirm. X Memory functions Storing a location in the memory You can save locations that are called up frequently in ten preset positions (0, 1 - 9). X Select the location (Y page 447). X Press and hold a number key. When the location is saved, the number of the selected preset comes before the name of the place in the caption. Selecting a location from the memory X Quick select: when the weather display (COMAND Online) is switched on and an entry is available, press a number key, e.g. l. The information chart appears and displays the weather information. From the weather memory: select Posi‐ tion in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Presets and press W to confirm. X Select a preset position that has an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The information chart appears and displays the weather information. X i The hazard icon display is preset in the factory. This presetting can be changed in the Options menu (Y page 451). X Select a weather characteristic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates which weather characteristic is currently displayed on the map. You can select one weather characteristic at a time. Legend Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 448). X Select View by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Legend and press W to confirm. The legend is displayed in accordance with the currently selected weather characteristic. X Options Introduction You can select options for the following Mercedes-Benz Apps on COMAND Online: RLocal Search (Y page 450) page 451) RDestination download (Y page 452) RWeather (Y Z COMAND Online Switching to the weather information display in the map X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 448). X Select View by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. 449 Online and Internet functions 450 You can reset the selected options to the default settings (Y page 452). X Confirm the entry after Search radius: by pressing W. The # dot indicates the currently selected search radius. X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The selected setting is accepted. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Calling up the Options menu Select the ® symbol in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online X Selecting a service provider Selecting options for the local search Setting the search radius X Select Local Search in the Options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The menu shows the current settings. X Select the entry after Service provider: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the currently selected service provider. i If the entry is greyed out, you cannot select the service provider. X Select Local Search in the Options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The menu shows the current settings. X Select an entry and press W to confirm. The selected service provider is accepted. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Deleting/saving search queries Select the Delete all searches entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to delete the search queries. X Select Weather in the options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 450). The menu shows the current settings. X Select the entry after Default location: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the currently selected default location. X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The selected location is accepted. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. Selecting options for the weather display Setting the default view You can specify which view is called up after activating the weather display (Y page 447). You can make the following settings: Rcurrent weather forecast Rinfo view Rlast view X Select Weather in the options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 450). The menu shows the current settings. Rfive-day X Confirm the entry after Default view: by pressing W. The # dot indicates the currently selected default view. X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The selected view is accepted. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Setting the default location You can make the following settings: RCurrent Rcurrent RPresets Selecting weather data for the map view The weather map can display the following weather data: Rhazard icons (e.g. storms, slippery conditions) Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow) Ratmospheric pressure Rtemperatures Rcloud cover Rwind direction and speeds You can select one feature each for the map view. The availability of weather information is country-dependent. X Select Weather in the options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 450). The menu shows the current settings. X Select the entry after Default map view: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the currently selected feature. X Select an entry and press W to confirm. The selected feature is accepted. position destination Z 451 COMAND Online Online and Internet functions Online and Internet functions 452 X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online Setting options for destination/route download Specifying the ID for the download You can replace the vehicle identification number (ID) with your e-mail address. The vehicle identification number is usually entered. X Select Destination/route download in the Options menu by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 450). The menu shows the current settings. X Confirm the entry next to ID: by pressing W. An input menu appears. Enter an e-mail address. Character entry (Y page 303). X After entry, select ¬ and press W to confirm. The e-mail address is entered in the menu. An e-mail will be sent to your e-mail address shortly afterwards. You must confirm it within 48 hours. Otherwise, your previous ID will continue to be used. X To complete the settings, check your mailbox and follow the link in the e-mail. X X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Setting the type of import You can choose between manual and automatic importing. X Select the entry after Import: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Manual or Automatic and press W to confirm. The setting is accepted. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Deleting/keeping POIs after they have been imported to the server X Select the entry after Import & delete: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. The setting is accepted. Yes deletes the POIs after importing to the server. No does not delete the POIs on the server. X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i Routes and destinations are automatically deleted on the server after seven days. Resetting the settings The reset function resets all Mercedes-Benz Apps settings to the factory settings. After resetting, routes and destinations can only be sent to the vehicle identification number (ID) once you have activated your e-mail address again (Y page 452). X Select the ® symbol in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Online and Internet functions Additional services Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website For individual Mercedes-Benz Apps, it may be necessary to pay licence fees before using. Use is then limited to a certain period of time. Licence fees must be paid again for use beyond this time period. The COMAND Online functions contain the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website as a predefined favourite. X Select the ® icon in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web‐ site panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz home page appears. i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website panel. Further Mercedes-Benz Apps You can call up additional Mercedes-Benz Apps, such as Facebook, or Google™ services, such as Street View or Panoramio here. The following examples show how to call up a Mercedes-Benz App, for example Facebook, and generally how to call up Google™ services. Calling up Facebook: Select the ® icon in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu appears. X Select Facebook by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Facebook homepage appears. X To call up Google™ services: this is done through Google™ Local Search (Y page 444). i Facebook is a social networking website. This App allows you to log in from your vehicle and use Facebook's many functions. Google™ Street View allows you to view streets in 360-degree panoramas. Google™ Panoramio expands Google Local Search to include photos at the selected position. X Internet radio General notes A good Internet connection is required to transmit audio data efficiently. To ensure the best-possible reception, your mobile phone should be connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the phone bracket (optional). Bear in mind that a relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using the Internet radio. An average 128 kbit per second data transfer rate can transfer 56MB of data in one hour. Z COMAND Online Select Reset and press W to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to reset. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. X 453 Online and Internet functions 454 The data transfer rate of a station is displayed while receiving data. Calling up the Internet radio Manually re-establishing a connection: X Select ; (play) again in the Internet radio menu and press W to confirm. Ending data transfer: X Select É (stop) in the Internet radio menu and press W to confirm. or COMAND Online X Change to another audio source, for example Disc Disc. If you change to a main function that is not an audio source, e.g. navigation, the data connection remains on. You can continue listening to the set station. Select the ® icon in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cV d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. X Bring the Internet radio panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Internet radio menu appears. X Searching for stations Select Search in the Internet radio menu. A list with search criteria appears. X Select criterion and press W to confirm. X i For example, as a search criterion you can set an Internet radio station that is located close to your navigation destination. Connecting to a station Search for a station (Y page 454). X Select ; (play) in the Internet radio menu and press W to confirm. The connection is established. X If the data stream is interrupted, an automatic attempt is made to re-establish the connection. Internet Display restriction Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Calling up a website Calling up the carousel view X Select the ® symbol in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. You can now enter a web address (option 1 (Y page 454)) or select it in the carousel view (option 2 (Y page 455)). To select in the carousel view, you must first create favourites (Y page 459). Option 1: entering the web address You can enter the web address using either the character bar or the number keypad (Y page 305). X Call up the carousel view (Y page 454). X Select www by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An input menu appears. X X To make entries using the character bar: enter the web address in the input line. Character entry (Y page 303). As soon as the first letter has been entered in the input line, a list appears below it. The list shows web addresses that begin with the letters you have entered and web addresses that have already been called up. The list is empty the first time you call it up. To enter characters using the number pad: press the number keys in rapid succession. The character appears when the key is pressed. The first available letter is highlighted. Enter the character using the character bar (Y page 305). X After entering the web address, select the ¬ symbol by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The website is called up. X To select a web address in the list: slide ZV the COMAND controller in the input menu with character bar. The list is activated. Select the web address by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The web address is entered in the input line. X Press W the COMAND controller. The website is called up. The Establish‐ ing data connection to ... message appears. X Option 2: selecting favourites You must create at least one favourite in the carousel view for this function (Y page 459). X Call up the carousel view (Y page 454). X In the carousel view, bring a favourite to the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the Z 455 COMAND Online Online and Internet functions 456 Online and Internet functions COMAND Online COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The website is called up. Example: highlighting an item that can be selected X Navigating the website Overview Step Example: entering text Activity Turn cVd the controller. Navigates from one item that can be selected (e.g. link, text field or selection list) to the next and highlights the respective element on the website. Sliding the controller: Moves the pointer on the page. X Turn cVd COMAND controller. A button is highlighted in the example. Left or right XVY Up or down ZVÆ X Diagonally aVb X X X Press W the controller. Calls up the menu or opens the selected item. X Press the % button. Calls up the previous page. X Press the j button. Closes the Internet browser. If several windows are open, the current window is closed. X Select an input line by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The character bar appears. Online and Internet functions 457 Enter the text using the character bar or the number keypad. Character entry (Y page 303). X If the text has been entered, select the¬symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The text has now been entered. X Menu functions COMAND Online Calling up a menu X X To call up the shortcut: highlight the selectable item on the page by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To call up the entire menu: when the shortcut is displayed, slide VÆ the COMAND controller downwards. or X Select a free area on the website by sliding ZVÆ, XVY or aVb the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Open Opens the website to the selected item. X Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND controller. Enter URL Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Enter URL by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 454). X Z Online and Internet functions 458 Calling up the previous website X Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Previous by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online Calling up the next website X Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Next by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. View You can use this function to: Rposition a selection window on websites that are larger than the display Rselect a window that is already open X Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select View by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the z key on the number keypad. i You cannot use the z key if a phone call is being made. X To position the selection window: confirm Full-screen view of current page by pressing W the COMAND controller. A selection window appears on the website. Slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller and position the selection window on the website. X Press W the COMAND controller. The selected section is enlarged. X X X To display and select open windows: select Display open windows by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The carousel view appears. Press W the COMAND controller. The website is displayed. Exiting the menu Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Internet browser is closed. If other windows are opened in the background, another prompt appears. X Other menu functions Opening in a new window You can open up to five windows simultaneously. X Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Open in new window by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To select a window: select View and press W to confirm. X Select the website in the carousel view by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Adding to favourites Adds the current website to the favourites. The website can then be called up using the carousel view. You can save up to 20 favourites in the carousel view. X Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Add to favourites by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The following message appears: The page has been added as a favourite. favourite Display favourites X X Call up the menu (Y page 457). Select Display favourites by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The favourites are shown in the carousel view. Further information on favourites (Y page 459). Online and Internet functions Reloading a website X X Call up the menu (Y page 457). Select Reload by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Creating favourites Creating favourites in the carousel view X Call up the carousel view (Y page 454). X Bring the Create new favourite panel to the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller. An input menu appears. Closing the active window X X Call up the menu (Y page 457). Select Close active window by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online or X Press the 2 button to the right of the COMAND controller. i You cannot use the 2 button if a phone call is being made. Displaying the complete web address of the selected link Call up the menu (Y page 457). Select Link details by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The URL appears. X Press W the COMAND controller and close the display. X X Settings The settings are described in a separate section (Y page 461). Favourites Introduction Favourites are frequently visited websites. You have the following options for creating a favourite: Rin the carousel view (Y page 459) Rvia the menu item Add to favourites (Y page 458) Before creating a favourite in the carousel view, you must first terminate any active connections (Y page 441). You can select and edit favourites that you have created. 459 Enter the web address (URL) and name using either the character bar or the number keypad. Entering characters (Y page 303) X Select the¬symbol and press W to confirm. The favourite has been created. X Adding a favourite via the menu When a website is displayed, call up the menu. X Select Add to favourites in the menu and press W to confirm (Y page 458). X Selecting favourites X Call up the carousel view (Y page 454). X Select the favourite in the carousel view by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The favourite is opened. Z Online and Internet functions 460 Editing favourites Editing favourites in the carousel view Calling up details Call up the carousel view (Y page 454). X Select Edit by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An input menu appears. X X COMAND Online X X Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 460). Select Details by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Enter the web address (URL) and name using either the character bar or the number keypad (Y page 303). Press the z button on the number keypad (this function is not available if you are using the telephone at the same time). The detailed display appears. Editing favourites in the Favourites menu Exiting Call up the menu (Y page 457). X Select Display favourites by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The favourite is displayed. X Press W the COMAND controller. The Favourites menu appears. Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 460). X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the % back button on the left next to the COMAND controller. The Favourites menu closes. X X Select Edit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the g button on the number keypad (this function is not available if you are using the telephone at the same time). An input menu appears. X Enter the web address (URL) and name using either the character bar or the number keypad. Character entry (Y page 303). Other functions in the Favourites menu Opening current favourites Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 460). X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND controller. X Opens the current favourites in a new window. Opening in a new window X X Call up the Favourites menu (Y page 460). Select Open in new window by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Deleting favourites Deleting favourites in the carousel view Call up the carousel view (Y page 454). Select Delete by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A query appears. X Select Yes and press W to confirm. The favourite is deleted. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. X X Deleting favourites in the Favourites menu X Select Delete by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press the 2 button to the right of the COMAND controller. The favourite is deleted. Online and Internet functions Settings menu You can select a different character set here, e.g. if the characters of a website appear distorted. RDeleting private data Deletes data which has been saved by the browser during Internet use. Changing settings X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switch the setting on O or off ª. Select Character size or Character code by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a setting using the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X X X Call up the menu (Y page 457). Select Settings by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can activate/deactivate the following settings: RDownload images automatically It may take some time to download the contents of websites that contain a large number of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deactivate this option. RBlock popups Popups are windows (usually with advertisements) which are displayed automatically when you call up a website. You can block these displays. REnable Javascript JavaScript makes it possible to display and interact with dynamic content on the website. REnable cookies Some websites save information in small text files (cookies) in COMAND Online. You can determine whether cookies may be stored. RCharacter size You can select the font size which is used when displaying the website. RCharacter code i If you change the settings, the websites may not be displayed correctly. Deleting private data X Select Delete private data and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select the setting by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot in front of an entry indicates which setting is active. or X Select Delete all data on exiting and press W to confirm. Switch the setting on O or off ª. Z COMAND Online Settings 461 Audio COMAND Online 462 Radio mode and DAB radio mode Option Function All Deletes all private data. Cache Deletes data in the temporary storage. may seriously impair radio and DAB radio reception. Cookies Deletes cookies that are created by websites which you have called up. DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a single frequency. Digital radio stations can be transmitted nationally, regionally or locally. Some stations only transmit programmes at certain times. If you have selected a station that has subsequently been removed from the ensemble, it will no longer be received. You will continue to receive the other programmes in the ensemble. You will then need to select a different programme. Websites visited Deletes all websites visited (path). ODelete Delete all data on exiting If this function is activated O, all private data is deleted when you exit the Internet browser. i If you reset COMAND Online to the factory settings (reset function), these settings are deleted (Y page 316). Calling up the carousel view and closing the Internet browser To call up the carousel view: press the % back button for longer than two seconds. X To close the Internet browser: press the % back button again for longer than two seconds. X Audio Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. Introduction i Portable electronic devices in the vehicle i DAB cannot be received everywhere in Europe. Switching to radio mode and DAB radio mode Switching on with the function button X Press the $ function button. The radio or DAB radio display appears. Radio mode: you will hear the last station played on the last waveband selected. DAB radio mode: you will hear the last station played from the last ensemble selected. i Repeatedly pressing the $ function button switches between the FM, MW, SW and LW wavebands in that order. It then calls up DAB radio mode. Pressing the button again takes you back to FM radio mode. Switching on with the audio menu X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If radio mode or DAB radio mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio mode is switched on, you can now switch to radio mode in the audio menu. You can select DAB radio mode in the radio display. X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. FM radio display : Waveband and frequency of the selected station ; Station name or station frequency of the selected station = Memory position of a station ? Radio text plus display (if available) A Radio mode menu bar X To switch on DAB radio mode: select FM in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DAB and press W to confirm. : Current audio operating mode ; Main function bar = Audio menu X Select Radio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z 463 COMAND Online Audio Audio 464 Ensembles An ensemble consists of multiple radio programmes. Every ensemble is transmitted in a certain area (national, regional or local) in the same way as a traditional AM/FM radio station. COMAND Online Switching to an FM station automatically DAB radio display : Name of the ensemble to which the selec; = ? A ted station belongs Name of the selected station Memory position of a station Radio text plus display (if available) DAB radio mode menu bar i If reception is poor (e.g. in tunnels or mountain valleys), affected stations are shown in grey. Playback of the currently selected station is interrupted. As soon as the reception quality is adequate, displays and playback return to normal. Switching wavebands Option 1 You can switch the radio between the FM, MW, LW and SW wavebands. X Press the $ function button repeatedly until the desired waveband is selected. Option 2 Select FM FM, DAB DAB, MW MW, SW or LW in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a waveband and press W to confirm. You will hear the last station played on the selected waveband. X i In the MW, LW and SW wavebands, COMAND Online shows the station frequency instead of the station name. If the reception of a DAB radio station deteriorates, COMAND Online automatically changes to the corresponding FM station. For this to happen, the following conditions must be met: Rthe FM station's frequency is available. Station fix menu item (Y page 467) is switched off. Rthe i If you want to use this function, do not switch to FM radio mode. If reception is not possible, the symbol of a radio tower with a line through it appears in the display. Setting a station Setting a station from the station list The station list is available in the FM waveband and in DAB radio mode. Radio mode: the station list contains all the stations that can currently be received and is sorted alphabetically. For stations without a programme service, the list shows the frequency instead of the name. DAB radio mode: the station list contains stations from all ensembles that can currently be received. It shows the current programme and a programme preview if the station operator supports this function. The station list is sorted alphabetically. X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/ Audio or X Press the E or F button. The needle jumps to the left or right. To make a selection in the station list: select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Station list by pressing W. The station list appears. X To call up the programme preview: slide VY the COMAND controller. The next programmes are shown for the displayed DAB radio stations. X Switch back by sliding XV. X To activate the alphabetical browser: slide XV the COMAND controller. X Select the initial letters of the desired station name by turning cVd the COMAND controller. The station list changes to the appropriate station. X Switch back by sliding VY. X X Example: radio mode : Currently selected station ; Memory slot in station presets To select the station using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Setting a station using the station search function In radio mode, the station search function is only available for the MW, LW and SW wavebands. X Press the E or F button. Station search scans up or down and stops at the next station. X To select the station using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Setting stations via the station presets X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g. l. X Example: DAB radio mode : Alphabetical browser ; DAB radio station = Current programme ? Start and end times of the programme X Select the station by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Directly in the station presets: select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. The channel presets appear. The # dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored. Z COMAND Online selection window for the radio display is active. 465 Audio 466 X Select a station by turning cVd and press W to confirm. or X COMAND Online X Press a number key, such as l. To select the station using the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual. Setting stations by entering the frequency manually This function is available in radio mode. X Option 1: press the l button. X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Frequency entry and press W to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, an input menu will appear. X Enter a frequency using the number keys. COMAND Online sets the frequency entered. Waveband Frequency FM (VHF) 87.5 – 108.0 MHz MW (medium wave) 531 – 1620 kHz SW (short wave) 5800 – 6250 kHz LW (long wave) 153 – 282 kHz i You can only enter currently permitted numbers. i If you enter a frequency in the MW, SW or LW wavebands that is outside the frequency range, COMAND Online sets the next lower frequency. Storing a station Storing stations manually There are 10 presets available for each waveband as well as for DAB radio mode. X Quick save: press and hold a number key, e.g. l, until you hear a tone. The station is stored. X Directly in the station presets: press W the COMAND controller when the display/ selection window is active. or X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the station presets appear. The # dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored. Station presets in DAB radio mode X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold W until you hear a tone. The station is stored under the preset. Storing stations automatically This function automatically stores stations with adequate reception under the presets. The search starts at the lowest frequency. COMAND Online stores any stations found, beginning with preset 1. The storing process ends once the highest frequency has been reached or once 10 stations have been found. Any stations stored manually under the presets will be lost. COMAND Online may not occupy all memory slots when storing. Audio Option 2: select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Autostore and press W to confirm. In both cases, COMAND Online searches for stations that can be received. You will see a message to this effect. The available stations are automatically stored in the preset positions. X X To cancel storing: select Cancel and press W to confirm. Radio Data System (RDS) General notes The Radio Data System (RDS) provides inaudible additional information in the FM waveband. The system consists of a listening receiver and a monitoring receiver. The monitoring receiver permanently scans the FM waveband and collects certain data from all receivable stations. This includes, for instance, reception quality and RDS data such as programme names and alternative frequencies. COMAND Online stores the data and constantly updates the memory. The audio receiver is therefore able to switch automatically to an alternative frequency with a better signal. i RDS only functions for stations which transmit RDS data. Switching RDS on/off You can use the Frequency fix (radio mode) or Station fix (DAB mode) functions to prevent COMAND Online from switching between the alternative frequencies of a station. This is useful, for example, when the same content is broadcast with a time delay, or when there is interference on one of the frequencies. X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Frequency fix or Station fix by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch Frequency fix on O or off ª. Traffic Programme Note Many FM stations transmit traffic announcements (TA). You can also hear these in DAB radio mode. Switching traffic announcements on/off X Option 1: select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The tick next to TA indicates that traffic announcement reception is switched on. You see the TA symbol in the status bar. X Select TA and press W to confirm. TA is switched on or off, depending on the previous status. X Option 2: on COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel, press and hold the 8 button until the TA icon lights up or goes out in the status bar. A warning tone sounds. Once traffic announcements have been switched on, COMAND Online selects an RDS station. Traffic Programme is retrieved from: Rthe currently selected FM station RDS station from the network of the currently selected FM station Rthe RDS station with the best reception quality When traffic announcements are switched on, a traffic announcement will interrupt the Ran Z COMAND Online Option 1: press W the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. X Select Autostore in the presets by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X 467 Audio 468 audio signal from the currently activated audio or video source. i Telephone conversations and navigation announcements are not interrupted. A display message appears in the display in all audio operating modes. Interrupting a traffic announcement During a traffic announcement: COMAND Online X To show/hide the artist and track: select Radio in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display artist and track and press W to confirm. Switch the display on O or off ª. X X On COMAND Online or on the multifunction steering wheel, briefly press the 8 button. or X To display radio text: select Info in the corresponding radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If the station supports radio text and information is available, the system displays it. Press the 9, : or 9 button on the multifunction steering wheel. COMAND Online switches back to the audio source that was selected before the announcement. Any subsequent new announcements will continue to interrupt the audio source. Radio text/radio text plus Messages in the display The function is available in FM mode and in DAB radio mode. Radio text/radio text plus consists of additionally transmitted data, e.g. information on the current programme, which is displayed in the COMAND display. If the station supports radio text plus, the artist and track are displayed. Radio text plus (display: artist and track) Radio text (display for additional information on programme) To return to the radio display: confirm Info by pressing W. X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up. X Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Important safety notes G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, invisible laser beams may be released. These laser beams may damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. You must not open the casing. Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Audio Handling discs while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Handle discs only when the vehicle is stationary. Bear in mind that, at a speed of only 50 km/h, your vehicle is already covering a distance of 14 m per second. G WARNING SD memory cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Ejecting a disc from the single DVD drive X Press the 8 button. X Take the disc out of the slot. If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is drawn in again automatically after a short while and reloaded. Inserting discs into the DVD changer The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with six trays. X To insert a CD/DVD into the magazine tray: press the V button. A menu shows the current load status of the magazine trays. The last tray selected is identified by a red digit. Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs Notes If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. If neither side is printed, the side to be played should face downwards. CDs/DVDs with copy protection may not be able to be played by the system. i If a medium contains other files in addi- tion to music files, the loading time before the first track starts to play may be longer. Inserting a disc into the single DVD drive Press the 8 button. If there is a disc already inserted, it will be ejected. X Take the disc out of the slot. X Insert a disc into the slot. The disc is drawn in and playback starts if the disc has been inserted correctly and it is a permissible type. X X Select a magazine tray to be filled by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press a number key, e.g. j. The DVD changer switches to the selected magazine tray. You see the Please wait... message. You then see the Please insert disc message. Z COMAND Online G WARNING 469 Audio 470 To load the empty magazine trays: press the V button. The magazine menu appears. X Select Fill Empty Slots. Slots You see the Please wait... message. COMAND Online switches to the next free magazine tray. You then see the Please insert disc message. i Do not insert a disc into the magazine tray until you have seen this prompt. X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards. You see the Please wait... message. Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer switches to the next empty tray. You see the Please insert disc message. X Repeat this step until all trays are loaded. The DVD changer plays the last disc you loaded if it has been inserted correctly and it is a permissible type. COMAND Online X X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards. The DVD changer loads the disc into the selected magazine tray. The Loading disc ... message appears. i It may take some time for the disc to be loaded, depending on the type of disc. If no disc is inserted for approximately 20 seconds, the display returns to the magazine menu. The DVD changer plays the disc if: Rit Rit has been inserted correctly is a permissible type of disc : Full magazine tray (eject function is avail- able) ; Empty magazine tray (disc can be inser- ted) X To exit the menu: press the V or % button again. or X Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To cancel the loading process: press the V or % button again. i If you cancel loading with the % back button, the system loads and plays the last CD you inserted. X Ejecting discs from the DVD changer If you remove one disc while playing another disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Playback continues once the disc has been ejected. X To eject a single CD/DVD: press the V button. The magazine menu appears. The magazine tray with the current disc is highlighted. : ; = ? X Eject possible Data medium type Disc name (only if stored on the disc) Current disc Select a magazine tray containing a disc by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Press a number key, e.g. j. You see the message: Ejecting disc .... You then see the following mes... sage. X To eject all CDs/DVDs: press the V button. The magazine menu appears. Select Eject all by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The DVD changer ejects the last disc selected. You see the Ejecting disc ... message. X Take the disc out of the disc slot when you see the Please remove disc . message. The DVD changer switches to the next loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc. X Repeat the last step until the magazine is empty. X X To exit the menu: press the V or % button again. or X X Take the disc out of the slot. If you do not take the disc out of the slot, COMAND Online will draw it in automatically after a short while and load it again. Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Inserting and removing an SD memory card General notes COMAND Online supports SD memory cards (Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards (Secure Digital High Capacity) and SDXC memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity. Z 471 COMAND Online Audio 472 Audio The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The first MP3 track is then played. An hourglass symbol indicates that further tracks are being loaded in the background. COMAND Online i Not all memory cards available on the market are designed for the temperatures which may be reached in the vehicle. If the SD memory card is no longer in use, you should remove it from COMAND Online. High temperatures can damage the card. Due to the wide range of SD memory cards available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory card. The readable storage capacity depends on the memory card used. You can obtain further information at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inserting an SD memory card X Insert the memory card into the slot on the control panel until it engages in place. The side with the contacts must face downwards and point towards the slot. If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see a message to this effect. The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The first MP3 track is then played. An hourglass symbol indicates that further tracks are being loaded in the background. Ejecting an SD memory card X Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected. X Remove the memory card from the slot. Connecting a USB device The USB port is located in the stowage compartment in the centre console. Electrical consumption at this connection must not exceed a continuous current of 500 mA. If the electrical consumption is higher, use a separate source to provide power for the USB device (e.g. 12 V power supply). X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to the USB port. If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see a message to this effect. i Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all brands of USB device. Information about suitable USB devices can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP). The MTP mode must be active. Switching to audio CD/audio DVD or MP3 mode Inserting or connecting a data medium Insert CDs/DVDs (Y page 469) or X Inserting an SD memory card (Y page 472) or X Connect a USB device (Y page 472). COMAND loads the medium inserted and starts to play it. X Switching on using the button X Press the h function button one or more times. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: Raudio CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 CD/MP3 DVD in the DVD changer or single DVD drive (disc mode) Rmemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Roperation with Bluetooth® audio X Select an audio medium from the media list (Y page 474). Audio X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Disc Disc, Memory card card, Music Regis‐ ter, USB storage or Media Interface ter and press W to confirm. This switches to the desired audio source. X Select an audio medium from the media list (Y page 474). Example display: audio DVD mode Cover (if available) Track time Track number Graphic time and track display Disc type, disc position in the media list, disc name (only if stored on the disc) B Audio DVD mode menu : ; = ? A Example display: audio CD mode Example display: MP3 mode : CD cover (if available) ; Gracenote data found, then the elapsed Cover (if available) Track time Track number and name Graphic time and track display Medium type, position of medium in the media list, current folder or current album B Artist (if available) C MP3 mode menu track time = Track number and track name (if stored ? A B C on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote® data is available) Graphic time and track display Disc type, disc position in the media list and disc name (if stored on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote® data is available) Artist (if stored on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote® data is available) CD mode menu : ; = ? A i If no Media Interface is connected during operation with a DVD changer, C displays Changer instead of Media (Y page 494). Z COMAND Online Switching on with the audio menu X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The last active audio source is now activated. You can activate a different audio source using the audio menu. 473 Audio COMAND Online 474 Pause function X In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode X To pause playback: briefly press the 8 button. The , symbol appears at the top left in the status bar. X To continue playback: briefly press the 8 button again. The , symbol disappears. Selecting CD/audio DVD/MP3 discs Only in audio DVD mode To pause playback: switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 472). X Select Ë by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë symbol changes to Ì. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. The Ì symbol changes to Ë. To restart playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback starts at the beginning of the DVD. Selecting via the media list X Media list when equipped with a DVD changer X Stop function This function is only available in audio DVD mode. Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 472). To interrupt playback: select É by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë symbol changes to Ì. The É symbol remains highlighted. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. X X X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to confirm. or X Select É and confirm by pressing W twice in rapid succession. Ì is highlighted. In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select Media or Changer by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select Media by sliding VÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium being played. The media list shows the discs currently available. View in :: RG magazine tray not shown RI magazine tray shown To switch the display: select 1...6 Changer by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous setting, the magazine trays are shown or not shown. i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears next to the corresponding magazine tray. X Audio 475 i If you select a video DVD, the system switches to video DVD mode (Y page 511). Selecting a track using the number keypad X When the display/selection window is active, press a number key, e.g. n. The medium at the corresponding position in the media list is loaded and then played. X Select the data medium by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The following tables list the selection options in the media list for the respective equipment variants. For DVD changer Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs Memory card, position 7 MUSIC REGISTER, position 8 USB storage device, position 9 Media Interface, position 0 Bluetooth® audio For a single DVD drive DVD drive, position 1: readable data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs Memory card, position 2 MUSIC REGISTER, position 3 USB storage device, position 4 Media Interface, position 5 Bluetooth® audio, position 6 Selecting a track Selecting by skipping to a track To skip forwards or back to a track: turn cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. or X Press the E or F button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. The skip back function skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has been playing for more than 8 seconds. If the track has been playing for less than 8 seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track. If the Random tracks or Random Folder playback option has been selected, the track order is random. X X Make a selection on the multifunction steering wheel and view in the multifunction display (see the separate vehicle Owner's Manual). Selecting a track using the number keypad X Press the ¯ key on the number keypad. A numerical entry field appears. The number of positions offered corresponds to the number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only numbers that correspond to a track number on the CD/DVD can be entered. X Enter the desired track number using the number keys. Playback commences immediately after the last possible track digit is entered. Z COMAND Online Media list showing all magazine trays Audio 476 cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears. i Pressing and holding a number key for more than 2 seconds completes the entry and the corresponding track is played. COMAND Online Selecting a track using music search Example: current track list X Select Current tracklist, tracklist Folder or a category and press W to confirm. Select music via categories (e.g. albums, artists etc.) with the music search function. If you select a category, COMAND Online starts a search for track information if the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected. track information from these data carriers is not yet contained in the COMAND music database. COMAND Online imports track information from the following data carriers: X Fast forward/rewind X Rthe Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3) card RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory The Track information is complete message appears once the search is completed. COMAND Online stores the music data in its own database. You can now select the available music data within the desired category. You will find further information on searching for music in the "Music search" section (Y page 481). X In audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode, select Search by sliding VÆ and turning Rmemory Select the track by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The basic display appears and the track is played. While the display/selection window is active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached. or X Press and hold the E or F button until the desired position is reached. Gracenote Media Database Introduction This function is only available in audio CD mode. There is a version of Gracenote®music recognition technology on the COMAND Online hard drive. You will recognise this by the logo Audio Database menu item is shown in grey and cannot be selected. X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Switching the Gracenote® data display on/off X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 472). X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Gracenote Media Database by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To switch off the display: select None and press W to confirm. In the basic display, Track 1, 1 Track 2 etc. are shown instead of the Gracenote® data, for example (Y page 473). X To switch on the display: select an entry in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Selecting Gracenote® data to be displayed Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 472). Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Gracenote Media Database by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current selection for the display. X X If several entries exist for the CD of a particular artist, you can select which of the entries should be shown. If the inserted CD does not contain any Gracenote® data, the Gracenote Media Updating Gracenote® music recognition technology and the Gracenote Media Database Due to the release of new CDs, the digital data on the Gracenote Media Database must be updated. Optimum functionality can only be attained with up-to-date Gracenote® music recognition technology. Information about new versions can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You can have your music recognition software updated there with a DVD, or you can update it yourself. i The Gracenote Media Database is upda- ted in conjunction with the navigation system's digital map (Y page 382). Z COMAND Online in the bottom right-hand corner of certain audio displays. Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND Online uses the information contained therein to display the artist, album and track name. If the audio CD does not contain any CD text information, COMAND Online can use the Gracenote® Media Database to identify unknown audio tracks when in audio CD mode. This is only possible if the relevant information is saved in the Gracenote Media Database and if the Gracenote Media Database function is activated. If this is the case, COMAND Online will display the corresponding data such as artist, album and track name in the relevant displays and lists. 477 Audio 478 Displaying the track and album X Press the z button. The current track and album are displayed in a window. COMAND Online Displaying metadata (MP3 mode) COMAND Online can also display the album name and artist (metadata) during playback if this information has been entered into the system. For all media that contain MP3 data (e.g. MP3 CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you can determine whether: Rthe metadata contained in the tags of the encoded music data should be displayed Rthe file and directory names should be displayed during playback X To display the album and artist name: select MP3 or USB in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display track Information and press W to confirm. Selecting a group (DVD audio) The content of an audio DVD can be divided into up to nine groups. The availability and type of group depends on the respective DVD. A group can contain music in different sound qualities (stereo and multichannel formats, for example), or bonus tracks. Each group can contain up to 99 tracks. If an audio DVD only contains one audio format, the Group menu item(s) cannot be selected. X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 472). X Select DVD-A by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Group by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the group currently selected. Select the desired group by turning cVd and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the % back button. X Selecting an active partition (USB mass storage devices only) You can select this function for USB mass storage devices when the storage device is partitioned. Up to 5 partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported. X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Select active partition and press W to confirm. Playback options To select options: switch on audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 472). X Select CD CD, DVD-A or MP3 by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal track sequence, sequence you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. The following options are available to you: X RNormal track sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). In MP3 mode, the track order is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the MP3 data carrier when it is created. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RRandom media Audio All the tracks on the medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). RRandom track list (MP3 mode only) You will hear the tracks in the current playlist or currently active folder (including all subfolders) in random order. The disc may contain no more than eight directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level will not be recognised by the system. i The Normal track sequence option is Track and file names When you create a disc with compressed music files, you can assign names to the tracks and folders. COMAND Online uses these names accordingly for the display. Folders that contain data other than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by COMAND Online. If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root directory itself, the root directory will also be treated as a folder. COMAND Online will then show the name of the root directory as the folder name. You should observe the following when assigning track names: Notes on MP3 mode General notes Depending on the volume and format of the MP3 data, the length of time required for reading the data may increase. Permissible data carriers RCD-R and CD-RW RDVD-R and DVD-RW RDVD+R and DVD+RW RSD memory card RUSB storage device Permissible file systems RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs RUDF for audio and video DVDs RFAT16, FAT32 and NTFS for SD memory card and USB storage media Multi-session CDs For multi-session CDs, the content of the first session determines how COMAND Online will process the CD. COMAND Online plays only one session and gives priority to the audio CD session. If possible, only play CDs on COMAND Online that have been written in one session. File structure of a disc When you create a disc with compressed music files, the tracks can be organised in folders. A folder may also contain subfolders. i COMAND Online loads up to 15,000 tracks from the SD memory card or USB storage medium. Rtrack names must have at least one character. Rtrack names must have the extension "mp3" or "wma". Rthere must be a full stop between the track name and the extension. Example of a correct track name: "Track1.mp3". Permissible formats COMAND supports the following formats: RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V8 and V9 (WMA) without copy protection Microsoft Windows Media Audio V2, V7, V8 and V9 (WMA) Radditional music files in AAC format with the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes music files with the extension .m4p. i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other music files in these audio formats stored on Z COMAND Online automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND Online is switched on or off. 479 480 Audio the disc, the loading process may require a longer time before the first track is played. copyright holder has granted you permission, these restrictions do not apply. i The MP3 audio encoding method is under Notes on CDs/DVDs ! COMAND Online is designed to play discs which comply with the EN 60908 standard. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the device. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter. licence from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integrierte Schaltungen – Institute for Integrated Circuits) and Thomson. COMAND Online Permissible bit and sampling rates COMAND supports MP3 files of the following types: Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s to 320 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND Online supports WMA files of the following types: Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND Online does not support WMA files of the following types: RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files Rvariable bit rate RWMA Pro R5.1 Surround i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz. Lower rates may cause a noticeable deterioration in quality. This is especially the case if you have activated a surround sound function. Notes on copyright MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play back are generally subject to copyright protection in accordance with the applicable international and national regulations. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these. If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your own compositions and recordings, or if the Discs with copy protection are not compatible with the CD standard and therefore may not be able to be played by COMAND Online. You may encounter playback problems when playing copied discs. There is a wide range of data carriers, disc-writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. There may be playback problems if you play CDs that you have copied yourself with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of this type do not conform to the currently applicable standards. i On many DVD audio discs, the last track does not contain any music. If COMAND Online therefore switches to the next disc, it is normal system behaviour and does not mean that there is a malfunction. i COMAND Online is able to play back audio CDs in multichannel audio format. Audio 481 Music search X Category list Switch on an audio source and call up the basic display, e.g. MP3 mode (Y page 472). X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears. X The categories are displayed according to the data available. The categories Current tracklist, Folder tracklist Folder, Playlists (if available) and Photos (if available) are already assigned. The other available categories are filled by the music search. Selecting a category Starting a music search Select music via categories (e.g. albums, artists etc.) with the music search function. If you select a category, COMAND Online starts a music search under the following conditions: Select a category in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Reading data... message appears. The search may take some time, depending on the number of tracks available. The Track information is complete message appears once the search is completed. Playback then starts with the previously active audio source. X To cancel the music search: confirm Cancel by pressing W. Selecting artists X Select Artists in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available artists are displayed alphabetically. Selecting an album Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected. Rthe music tracks on these data carriers are not yet in the COMAND music database. COMAND Online reads music tracks from the following data carriers: Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3) card RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device Rmemory Z COMAND Online Calling up the category list Audio 482 X Select Albums in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available albums are displayed alphabetically. If there is a cover available for an album, it is displayed in front of the album name. COMAND Online Selecting a track X Select Tracks in the category list (Y page 481) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available tracks are displayed. Selecting composers X Select Composers in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available composers are displayed alphabetically. Selecting music genres X Select Genres in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available music genres are displayed alphabetically. Selecting a cover X Select Select by cover in the category list (Y page 481) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available covers are displayed in alphabetical order of the artists. Selecting a year of publication X Select Year in the category list (Y page 481) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select an entry and press W to confirm. The genre list is displayed. X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and press W to confirm. The track list is displayed. X Select a track and press W to confirm. Playback starts. X Select the desired cover by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The corresponding album is played. Selecting via keyword search X Select Keyword search in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. An input menu appears. X To change the character set used in the character bar: highlight Select by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A list of available character sets is shown. X Select an entry, e.g. Artists Artists, and press W to confirm. The album and cover (if available) are displayed. X Confirm the album with W. The tracks on the album are displayed. X Select a track and press W to confirm. Playback starts and the basic display appears. Select the desired character set and press W to confirm. X Enter characters and confirm the entry. Character entry (Y page 303). Depending on the entry, the hits are shown in a list. X X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z 483 COMAND Online Audio 484 Audio MUSIC REGISTER General notes ! Retain the original music files in a secure COMAND Online location. An error in COMAND Online might result in the loss of the music files stored in the MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. You can store music files in a compressed format in the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 485). The memory has a capacity of 10 GB. Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER MUSIC REGISTER basic display Switching on with the function button X Press the h function button repeatedly until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc) card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Roperation with Bluetooth® audio If music files are available, playback begins at the point last listened to. If there are no music files, you will see a message to this effect. X Confirm the message by pressing W the COMAND controller and then copy the music files to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 485). Rmemory Switching on with the audio menu Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If the MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode selected, it is now switched on. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in the audio menu. X Example: MUSIC REGISTER : Cover (if available) ; Track time = Track number and name ? Graphic time and track display A Position of the medium in the media list and name of the medium, followed by the current playback option (no display for Normal track sequence) sequence B Artist C MUSIC REGISTER menu bar X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Music Register and press W to confirm. Switching on using the number keys X Make sure that neither radio nor disc is activated. X Press the r (for a DVD changer) or m (for a single DVD drive) number key. The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on. Audio 485 Copying music data to the MUSIC REGISTER Introduction You can copy music files in the file formats MP3, WMA and AAC (with the file extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac) from the following media: in a DVD changer or a single DVD drive RMemory card RUSB memory i While copying, several functions will not be available. If this is the case, you will see a message to this effect. 1. Selecting a data medium X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Copy MP3 music files and press W to confirm. The media list appears. A data medium from which files can be copied is selected automatically. 2. Selecting music files To select all music files: select All tracks and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. This function copies all music files on the selected data carrier. The icon in front of All tracks is filled in and all following entries have a tick O beside them. X X To select a folder: turn cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A tick O next to the folder entry highlights the selection. 3. Confirming your selection X Select Continue by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The copying menu appears. 4. Starting the copying process ! Under no circumstances should you remove the medium while you are copying data from it (SD memory card, USB storage device, CD/DVD). Doing so will generate unusable data in the MUSIC REGISTER. X Select the data medium by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The data medium is loaded. If the data carrier contains music files that can be copied, you see a menu. Z COMAND Online Rdiscs Audio 486 In the example, music files are copied from the memory card to the MUSIC REGISTER. X To select a destination folder: select Destination folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Folder and press W to confirm. The folder is selected O. X Select Continue and press W to confirm. Confirm Start by pressing W. Copying begins. The progress bar indicates the status of the copying procedure. i It may take some time for the copying process to be completed, depending on the amount of data. If there is not enough memory space, you will see a message to this effect. Once copying is complete, you hear the first track of the copied album. The MUSIC REGISTER display appears. Now you can copy more music files to the MUSIC REGISTER. X To cancel the copying process: select Cancel and press W to confirm. Music files are stored in the MUSIC REGISTER up until the point of cancellation. COMAND Online X Deleting all music files ! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND Online during this time. This function deletes all music files from the MUSIC REGISTER. X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Delete all music files and press W to confirm. A query appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes Yes, all music files are deleted. You see the Please wait... message. You will then see the Data deleted message. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. Calling up memory space information Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Memory info and press W to confirm. The following is displayed: Rstorage capacity Ravailable memory Roccupied memory Rcontent (folders, tracks) X Music search Introduction The music search finds tracks via all available media. The search begins with the audio source that is currently active. The music search covers the following media: Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3) card RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears. X Select a track in a category (Y page 481). Rmemory Example: opening a folder X Select Folder in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the contents of the current folder. Audio 487 Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select Delete and press W to confirm. A query appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes Yes, the folders/tracks are deleted. You see the Please wait... message. You will then see the Data deleted message. If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. The name of the current folder is at the top and the track currently playing is indicated by a # dot. X To switch to the next folder up: press the % back button or slide XV the COMAND controller. Changing the folder/track name X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Rename / delete files and press W to confirm. X Select a folder/track by turning cVd. X Select Options by sliding VY and press W to confirm. X Select Change and press W to confirm. X Enter a name for the folder/track (Y page 303). X To save the changes: select ¬ and press W to confirm. Deleting folders/tracks Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Rename / delete files and press W to confirm. X Select a folder/track by turning cVd. X Playback options The following options are available: RNormal track sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). RRandom media All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RRandom track list (MP3 mode only) The tracks in the currently active folder or the current track list are played in a random order. X To select options: switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 484). X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal track sequence, sequence you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. i The Normal track sequence option is automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND Online is switched on or off. Z COMAND Online X 488 Audio Operation with Bluetooth® audio COMAND Online Preconditions for the Bluetooth® audio device Bluetooth® audio mode requires a Bluetooth®-capable audio device. Observe the information in the Bluetooth® audio device's operating instructions. Before using Bluetooth® audio mode, you should check your Bluetooth® audio device for the following: RBluetooth® audio profile The Bluetooth® audio device must support the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles. RBluetooth® visibility Certain Bluetooth® audio devices require more than simply activating the Bluetooth® function. In addition, your device must be made "visible" to other devices. RBluetooth® device name This device name is predetermined but can usually be changed. To make a clear selection of the Bluetooth® device possible, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you customise the device name. i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio data transmission AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio data playback i Not all Bluetooth® audio devices available on the market are equally suitable. Information on suitable Bluetooth® audio devices and on connecting Bluetooth® audio devices to COMAND Online: Ris available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Ror visit the website http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect X Activate Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility on the Bluetooth® audio device. Preconditions in COMAND Online X Activate the Bluetooth® function in COMAND Online (Y page 313). Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices General notes Before using your Bluetooth® audio device with COMAND Online for the first time, you will need to authorise it. When you authorise a new Bluetooth® audio device, it is connected automatically. Connection involves first searching for a Bluetooth® audio device and then authorising it. You can authorise up to fifteen Bluetooth® devices. i If you authorise a mobile phone that supports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected automatically. The mobile phone is then entered: the Bluetooth® telephone list (Y page 391) Rin the Bluetooth® device list (Y page 489) Mercedes-Benz recommends authorising a mobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony (Y page 391). Rin Audio Example: Bluetooth® device list : Newly detected mobile phone with Blue- tooth® audio function in range ; Bluetooth® audio player not within range but previously authorised (symbol appears in grey) The Bluetooth® device list displays all authorised devices, whether they are within range or not. After a device search, devices which are within range but not authorised are also displayed. Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode (Y page 491). If you see the No Bluetooth audio device authorised message, you will need to authorise the Bluetooth® audio device first. X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list by pressing W the COMAND controller. X To search: confirm Search for BT audio devices by pressing the COMAND controller W. COMAND Online searches for Bluetooth® audio devices within range and adds them to the Bluetooth® device list. If Bluetooth® audio devices support the Bluetooth® audio profiles (A2DP, AVRCP), the devices are detected. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth® audio devices within range and their characteristics. X To authorise: select an unauthorised Bluetooth® audio device from the list (: in the example) by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Authorise and press W to confirm. Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device used, you now have two options for continuing with authorisation. X Option 1: enter the passkey (Y page 391). After successful authorisation, the Bluetooth® audio device is connected and starts playing. X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the digit codes displayed in COMAND Online and on the Bluetooth® audio device are the same, confirm Yes by pressing W. If you select Yes Yes, authorisation continues and the Bluetooth® audio device is connected. Playback starts. If you select No No, authorisation will be cancelled. i The Bluetooth® audio device must support Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND Online creates a six-digit code, which is simultaneously displayed on both devices that are to be connected. X Z COMAND Online Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth® audio device 489 Audio 490 External authorisation Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audio device The Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected automatically under the following circumstances: COMAND Online Rone If COMAND Online does not find your Bluetooth® audio device, this may be due to particular security settings on your Bluetooth® audio device. In this case, check whether your Bluetooth® audio device can locate the COMAND Online system. The Bluetooth® device name of COMAND Online is MB Blue‐ tooth. tooth Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode (Y page 491). X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list by pressing W the COMAND controller. X To search: confirm Connect via BT audio device by pressing the COMAND controller W. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth® audio devices within range and their characteristics. X To authorise: start the authorisation on the Bluetooth® audio device; see the operating instructions of the Bluetooth® audio device. After successful authorisation, the Bluetooth® audio device is connected and starts playing. X i With some Bluetooth® audio devices, playback must first be started on the device itself so that COMAND Online can play the audio files. of the last two mobile phones to have been connected has also been used as a Bluetooth® audio player (if the function is supported by the mobile phone). Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic connection itself. A Bluetooth® audio player without telephone functions is not automatically reconnected, even if it was the last device connected. If the No Bluetooth audio device con‐ nected message appears, you have two options to connect a Bluetooth® audio device: Connecting the last device Confirm Connect last device in the basic display by pressing W the COMAND controller. If COMAND Online can locate the Bluetooth® audio device, it will be connected and will start playing. i With some Bluetooth® audio devices, playback must first be started on the device itself so that COMAND Online can play the audio files. Connecting a device from a list X Select BT audio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list by pressing W the COMAND controller. X Select a Bluetooth® audio device by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If COMAND Online can locate the Bluetooth® audio device, it will be connected and will start playing. i With some Bluetooth® audio devices, playback must be initially started on the device itself so that COMAND Online can play the audio files. X Audio Displaying details Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the Bluetooth® device list. X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Details and press W to confirm. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth® name RBluetooth® address Ravailability status (shown after an update) Rauthorisation status X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller. X De-authorising (de-registering) a Bluetooth® audio device Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the Bluetooth® device list. X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select De-authorise and press W to confirm. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to de-authorise this device. X Select Yes or No No. If you select Yes Yes, the device will be deleted from the Bluetooth® device list. X If you select No No, the process will be cancelled. i Before re-authorising the Bluetooth® audio device, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your Bluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list. See the Bluetooth® audio device's operating instructions. Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode The Bluetooth® audio basic display COMAND Online Bluetooth® audio device and simultaneous search for mobile phones During the search for mobile phones, the connection with the Bluetooth® audio device is terminated (Y page 390). In the Bluetooth® audio basic display, you will see the No Blue‐ tooth audio device connected message and the Connect last device menu item cannot be selected. 491 Example: Bluetooth® audio basic display : Track name ; Current playback settings (no symbol for "Normal track sequence") Album name Sound settings Media list Artist To stop É or start Ì playback To connect a Bluetooth® audio device, to switch traffic announcements on/off, to increase the volume on COMAND Online E Bluetooth® audio data carrier type F Data carrier position in the media list = ? A B C D i If the Bluetooth® audio device connected supports metadata and if the corresponding data is available, then the artist, track and album name can be displayed. Z Audio 492 Using the Bluetooth® audio basic display X Bluetooth® Connect (Y page 488) audio devices or COMAND Online X Reconnect the Bluetooth® audio device (Y page 490). COMAND Online activates the Bluetooth® audio device. The basic display appears and the device starts playing. X To continue playback: select Ì by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A message appears. É is selected. Restarting playback after stopping Using the function button Press the h function button one or more times. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: X Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc) card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Roperation with Bluetooth® audio Rmemory Using the media list X Select Bluetooth audio in the media list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 474). COMAND Online activates the connected device. You will see a message to this effect. The basic display then appears. Starting/stopping playback X To start playback: select Ì by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Playback starts. É is selected. X To stop playback: select É by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A message appears. Ì is selected. During the search for mobile phones, the connection with the Bluetooth® audio device is terminated (Y page 390). In the Bluetooth® audio (Y page 491) basic display, you will see the No Bluetooth audio device connec‐ ted message and the Connect last device menu item cannot be selected. When the search is finished, the Bluetooth® audio device can be reconnected. X Confirm Connect last device by pressing W. Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device used, playback starts immediately or you need to start playback manually. In this case, you will see the Bluetooth audio device paused message. Audio To start playback: select Ì by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Playback resumes from the beginning. Selecting a track The function is not supported by all Bluetooth® audio devices. X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: press the E or F button on COMAND Online. or X Press the 9 or : button briefly on the multifunction steering wheel. X Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9 or : button on the multifunction steering wheel until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed increases after a short time. Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select the option by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If you select Random tracks tracks, you will see a corresponding symbol in the display/ selection window. X Increasing the volume on COMAND Online COMAND Online X Selecting playback options If the Bluetooth® audio device supports the corresponding function, the following options are available: RNormal track sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). Audio data playback is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RRandom tracks All the tracks on the medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). 493 Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Volume and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Standard or Boost and press W to confirm. X Information about sound settings (Y page 299) Information about Traffic Programme (Y page 467) You will find further information in the "Audio AUX mode" section (Y page 500) Z 494 Audio Media Interface mode COMAND Online Connection options Overview You will find the connection sockets in the centre console stowage compartment. Device-specific adapter cables are required to connect external devices to the Media Interface. These are supplied in country-specific versions with the Media Interface (Y page 494). You can connect the following data carriers to COMAND Online via the Media Interface: Connecting an external device Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. At extreme temperatures, they cannot be guaranteed to function correctly (see the operating instructions of the device in question). Examples of extreme temperatures are direct sunlight or very low outside temperatures. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage to external devices. i Never connect more than one device at a time. You will otherwise not be able to play back from the external device. USB hubs (devices with several USB connections) are not supported. RiPod® RiPhone® Rcertain MP3 players i Store individual parts in a safe place. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connection cables. i iPod® and iPhone® are registered trade- marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA. i MP3 players that support MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) can be used. This allows the MP3 player to be easily connected to the Media Interface and removed after use. Audio data is played without problems. On some MP3 players, you have to activate the relevant function; see the MP3 player operating instructions. Supported devices For further details and a list of supported devices, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or visit the website at http:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ connect. Then, follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section. : 4-pin socket for 3.5 mm stereo jack, e.g. for MP3 players (audio and video) ; iPod® plug, to connect an iPod® = USB socket, to connect an MP3 player ? Example of device (iPod®) X Connect the external device with suitable socket :, ; or =. COMAND Online activates the device, a display appears (when connecting an iPod® plug or USB socket). If you remove a device, the No device con‐ nected message appears. i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should not be simultaneously operated via the Media Interface and the remote control (e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) or directly via the device itself. Doing so may cause unforeseen technical difficulties. Audio i Connecting a fully discharged iPod® or MP3 player can result in an extended initialisation period. Error messages appear while the device is being activated if: Rthe connected device is not supported (External External device unavailable message). Rthe connected device consumes too much power. Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty. Ra mass storage device (e.g. USB memory stick or USB hard drive) is connected to the Media Interface. In this case the Please connect the device to the other USB port message appears. i The separate USB connection ensures quick access and expanded media content options. i Information is available at any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Disconnecting an iPod® X Press the release buttons on iPod® plug ; and pull the iPod® cable from the iPod®, see the separate cable kit instructions. Switching on automatically X Connect an external device (Y page 494). COMAND Online activates the device (if connected via the iPod® connector or USB socket). The basic display then appears. Switching on with the function button The external device is connected to the Media Interface. X Press the h function button one or more times. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc) card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Roperation with Bluetooth® audio Rmemory Switching on using a number key X Press the i number key (for a DVD changer) or the o number key (for a single DVD drive) number key. This selects the connected external audio device directly. Switching on via the media list Switching to Media Interface mode General notes In extreme cases, starting up individual functions can take up to several minutes; this depends on the external device and its content (e.g. video podcasts). Only use the original software to save files on iPods® or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or all functions may not be available. Media Interface mode (iPod® mode) when equipped with a DVD changer : Cover (if available) or representation of device ; Track number Z COMAND Online Applications (Apps) that are activated on the connected device may lead to malfunctions. 495 Audio 496 COMAND Online = Elapsed track time (also in format ? A B C D E F G H X 00:00:00 for audio books) Track name Graphic time display Track position in playlist Album name (if available) Artist (if available) Music search Position in the media list Data medium type Playback options Select the entry under position 0 (DVD changer) or position 5 (single DVD drive) in the media list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm (Y page 474). COMAND Online activates the connected device. You will see a message to this effect. The basic display then appears. If no device is connected, you will see the Media Interface entry instead of a device name. The type of device connected is indicated by the corresponding symbol for iPod® (iPhone®) or MP3 player. The current playback option is shown with a symbol behind album name (no display for Normal track sequence) sequence (Y page 499). i If the device connected does not contain any playable tracks, a message appears to this effect. Selecting music files Note COMAND Online displays the data stored on the iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player according to the file structure used in the respective medium. Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. or X Press the E or F button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. The skip back function skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has been playing for more than eight seconds. If the track has been playing for less than eight seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track. If you have selected a playback option other than Normal track sequence, the track sequence is random. sequence On the multifunction steering wheel: switch to Media Interface mode in COMAND Online (Y page 495). X On the multifunction steering wheel, press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. X Press the 9 or : button briefly. If you hold down the 9 or : button, the system scrolls through the list more quickly. Not all media players support this function. If track information is available on the media player, the multifunction display shows the number and name of the track. X Selecting using the number keypad X To make an entry: press the l button. An input menu appears. The number of characters available for input depends on the number of stored tracks. To enter a track number: press a number key, e.g. q. The digit is entered in the first position in the input line. i COMAND Online will ignore and not display an invalid digit. X Audio The Videos category is available for iPods® and iPhones® (except for Hong Kong). X Fast forward/rewind X While the display/selection window is active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached. or X Press and hold the E or F button until the desired position is reached. i On an iPod® or iPhone®, fast rewind only functions within the current track. i The functions are available as soon as the entire media content has been read and analysed. For certain functions, such as keyword search and selection by cover, this can take several minutes, depending on the scope of media and the connected device. If the same device is reconnected with unchanged media content, these functions are available much more quickly. However, if you change the media content, it has to be read and analysed again. Calling up the category list Selecting a category/playlist/folder Overview For an iPod®, iPhone® or certain MP3 players, you can select tracks using categories or folders. Depending on the device connected, the following categories may be available, for example: RCurrent tracklist by cover RKeyword search RPlaylists (e.g. All All) RArtists RAlbums RTracks RPodcasts RGenres RComposers RAudiobooks RVideos (except for Hong Kong) RSelect i Some playback categories contain the entry All All. If this entry has been selected, the entire content of the category selected will be played. Example: category list X Select Search in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears. i Search is not available until the device has been activated. Z COMAND Online Enter more numbers if desired. The track plays after the last possible number is entered. i Pressing and holding a number key for more than 2 seconds completes the entry, and the corresponding track is played. 497 Audio 498 i Reading: if the media content of the con- COMAND Online nected device is being read, this is indicated on the upper right by a symbol. When reading has ended, the categories Select by cover and Keyword Search are available. Depending on the connected device and the size of the media content, reading may take several minutes. When the device is next started or reconnected, the advanced functions will be quickly available. However, if you change the media content on your iPod®/iPhone®, it has to be read and analysed again. Playing back the contents of a category or folder X Select the category or folder by turning c V d the COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds. The content of the category or folder selected is played according to the playback option selected (Y page 499). Alphabetical track selection iPod®, iPhone® and MP3 player This function is available for alphabetically sorted categories and folders. This function is not available for albums or playlists, for example. X Select a category, e.g. Artists Artists, by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available artists are displayed. Press the corresponding number key once or repeatedly to select the initial letter of the desired artist. For example, to select an artist whose name begins with C, press the l number key three times. The available letters are listed at the lower edge of the display. After a message, the first entry in the list that matches the letter entered is highlighted. i If no corresponding entry exists, the last entry corresponding to an initial letter is highlighted instead. X Example: current track list : Symbol for next folder up ; Device symbol and device name = Track symbol ? Current track Select Current tracklist by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The content of the current track list appears. X Select the track by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The track is played. X X To switch to the next folder up: slide XV the COMAND controller. or X Press the % back button. i iPods and MP3 players: the quality of the search results is highly dependent on the version and language variant of the software used to populate the device. A wellknown example of such software is iTunes®. If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in iTunes®), the search is cancelled without any result. Audio i For more information on Select by cover and Keyword Search can be found under "Music search, selecting category" (Y page 497). i For an iPod®/iPhone®, the available covers are added most efficiently if the entire media content is in the current playlist. This is the case if you have selected the playback option Title or Random media (Y page 499). Special feature in iPod®/iPhone® mode i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not functioning or paused, you can search for tracks but cannot select them. After confirming a new track, the Function unavailable message appears. Playback options X To select a playback option: select Media Interface in the basic display by sliding V Æ and turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected. X Select an option and press W to confirm. The following options are available: RNormal track sequence Normal track sequence: you hear the tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical or alphabetical). RRandom media All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RRandom track list The tracks in the currently active category or folder, including any subfolders, are played in random order. i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not functioning or paused, the playback options are inactive. The display of options is greyed out. MP3 player instructions General information Up to 30,000 tracks per medium are supported. You can speed up some functions and improve the search results by: Rmaking sure the names of tracks, albums and artists, for example, are written the same way Rlabelling albums featuring various artists as "compilations" i Multiple entries of tracks in playlists are filtered out for some players. Data formats MP3 and WMA are supported as data formats with fixed and variable bit rates (up to 320 kbit/s). Z COMAND Online Additional selection functions RSelect by cover Albums can be chosen by cover using the menu item. The first time the Select by cover function is used, additional data must be loaded from the iPod®/iPhone®. The current music playback is interrupted to allow access to this data. The process may take a few minutes and should not be cancelled. Otherwise it will start again from the beginning the next time Select by cover is selected. Covers are initially searched for in the Gracenote Media Database and are then added to during playback from the connected device (Y page 476). The availability depends on the use and the tracks already selected. RKeyword search Selecting keyword search allows you to search through all categories on the connected device for keywords. 499 500 Audio Special considerations when using MP3 players Up to 8 directory levels with up to 1,000 tracks per directory are supported. Do not use USB extension leads or adapters. They can impair functionality. i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protec- COMAND Online ted files are not supported by the Media Interface. Audio AUX mode Notes on audio AUX mode The varying volumes of external audio sources can mean that system messages (e.g. traffic and navigation announcements) are played at a noticeably increased volume. If necessary, deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually. You can connect an external audio source (AUX) to COMAND Online. Depending on the vehicle model series the connection is made via a jack in the storage compartment in the centre console or via the USB port (Y page 472). If COMAND Online is equipped with a Media Interface, external audio sources are connected using the cable set provided. The cable set then replaces the audio AUX socket. The connections for the Media Interface are located in the stowage compartment in the centre console. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc) card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Roperation with Bluetooth® audio Rmemory Switching on with the audio menu When you connect an external audio source, audio AUX is not selected automatically. X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch to audio AUX mode in the audio menu. X Select Audio using ZV and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears. X Select Aux by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in the external audio source is played if the source is connected and playback selected. i You can find more information on the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect and in the "Media Interface mode" section (Y page 494). Switching to audio AUX mode Switching on with the function button The external device is connected to the audio AUX input. X Press the h function button one or more times. Please see the respective operating instructions for how to operate the external audio source. Video Information on: Rvolume Rsound settings (Y page 299) settings (Y page 299) Increasing the volume on COMAND Online 501 going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. General notes If the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 5 km/h, the picture for the driver automatically switches off in the following modes: RTV mode (with teletext) DVD mode SPLITVIEW allows the front passenger to view the TV and video image (Y page 308). The following message appears in the display: In order not to distract you from the traffic situation, the picture is faded out while the vehicle is in motion. As soon as the vehicle speed drops below about 5 km/h, the picture switches back on again. RVideo X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select Standard or Boost and press W to confirm. Standard: the volume of the external audio Standard source is adjusted to a standard value. Boost: the volume of the external audio Boost source is raised by approximately 10 dB. A device which is connected as an external audio source may seem quieter or louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume cannot be reached. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play the music at high volume without distorting it. Video Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of Background video mode If another main function is active, e.g. navigation, you can perform the following operations in TV and video DVD mode. A window shows information about the selected function. Using the E or F button, you can: Rselect Rselect a TV channel a scene or chapter (video DVD mode) forward or rewind (video DVD mode) Where operating steps can be carried out in the active main function using the number keys, the following functions are not possible: Rfast Rselecting TV channels from the channel presets Rstoring TV channels in the channel presets Z COMAND Online Automatic picture shutoff Video 502 Basic settings COMAND Online Adjusting the brightness, contrast or colour The following describes the TV, video DVD and video AUX modes. X In TV or video DVD mode, press W the COMAND controller. The menu is shown. X Select TV TV, DVD-V or Aux by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. Select Brightness Brightness, Contrast or Colour by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Set the value between - 5 and + 5 and press W to confirm. X The TV tuner is designed to receive digital TV channels compliant with the DVB-T standard. If the reception deteriorates, the TV receiver automatically switches to an alternative digital frequency transmitting the same programme content with better reception. i In some countries, DVB-T may not be available, or may not be available in all areas. The constantly changing reception conditions while the vehicle is in motion can interrupt the signal. If the reception is too poor, COMAND Online can mute the sound and freeze or hide the picture. To indicate this, an icon of a radio tower with a line through it appears in the display. Switching to TV mode Changing the picture format The following describes the TV, video DVD and video AUX modes. X In TV or video DVD mode, press W the COMAND controller. The menu is shown. X Select TV TV, DVD-V or Aux by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Automatic Automatic, 16:9 optimised, optimised 4:3 or Widescreen and press W to confirm. The dot in front of the entry indicates the currently selected format. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. TV mode Reception quality Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may seriously impair TV reception. Video menu Select Video in the main function bar by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If TV mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another mode is switched on, you can now switch to TV mode in the video menu. X Select TV and press W to confirm. If the TV channel that was previously selected is still receivable, it will be displayed. X Showing/hiding the control menu Showing/hiding the TV menu Preset position of the selected TV channel Selected TV channel/number Current programme Next TV channel in the channel list (channel name or number) A Shows the TV menu B Previous TV channel in the channel list (channel name or number) : ; = ? A To show the control menu: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. i Full-screen mode means that the control menu is hidden and you see the television picture. or : ; = ? X i If you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the next/previous channel is selected at the same time. X To hide the control menu: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. or X Wait for approximately eight seconds. X TV options Channel preset list Information about the current programme To switch on teletext Sound settings To show the TV menu: press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press W to confirm. X To hide the TV menu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and confirm Full screen by pressing W. X i Information about current programme = and teletext ? are not supported by all TV standards or TV channels in all countries. Selecting TV channels Selecting channels using the control menu X Turn cVd the COMAND controller. or X Slide XVY the COMAND controller. or X Press the E or F button. The TV tuner selects the previous or next channel from the alphabetical channel list. Z 503 COMAND Online Video Video 504 Setting a channel from the channel list After starting the vehicle or switching on COMAND Online, all receivable TV and radio stations are listed by the reception function. The respective channel list contains the following information, if it is transmitted and can be received: Rthe COMAND Online names of the channels/stations with adequate reception Rfor each channel: the titles of the current and upcoming programmes via the electronic programme guide (EPG) The TV tuner requires a certain amount of time to update this information. The information can be displayed if: Setting channels via the channel presets Rchannels are transmitting this information and Rthe reception conditions are adequate The order of the channel list is country-specific. X To set a channel using COMAND Online: press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Channel list (TV) or Station list (Radio) and press W to confirm. The channel list appears. A dot # indicates the currently selected channel. A number shows the memory position in the station memory. X Select the channel and press W to confirm. To set a channel using the multifunction steering wheel: switch on TV mode in COMAND Online (Y page 502). X Press the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. X Press and hold the 9 or : button. X Channel presets Option 1: press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select Preset by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel presets appear. A dot # indicates the currently selected channel. A number shows the memory position in the station memory. X Select and confirm a channel by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Option 2: briefly press one or two number keys. To select a channel from a single-digit preset, briefly press the s number key, for example. To select a channel from a double-digit memory position, briefly press the l and m number keys, for example. If a channel was saved, the storage number and channel name appear and COMAND Online sets the channel. Saving a TV channel automatically or manually (Y page 505). X Selecting channels by entering the channel and programme number Several programmes can be transmitted on one channel with digital TV. You can therefore Video X Step 2: to enter a channel/programme number: press the corresponding number keys. As soon as you have entered the channel/ programme number, COMAND Online sets the channel/station. If you only enter the first two or three digits of the channel/programme number, the first receivable programme will be set within the programme series. If you have not entered a programme number, the first programme with adequate reception will be set. If you enter channels that are either not intended for or not allowed in your country, the Invalid channel number message appears. X Press W the COMAND controller and confirm the message. i You can enter channel numbers or pro- grammes available in your country even if the reception is currently not adequate. Information on channel numbers available in your country can be found on the websites of the private or public broadcasters, for example. Storing TV channels Storing channels manually You can manually store up to 40 TV channels in preset positions. X Option 1: press one or two number keys while a TV programme is playing, until a tone can be heard. To save a channel to a single-digit memory position, briefly press the s number key, for example. To save a channel to a double-digit memory position, briefly press the l number key, for example. Then within three seconds, press and hold m, for example. The current channel is stored. The TV picture then reappears. or X Option 2: press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select Preset by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel presets appear. A dot # indicates the currently selected channel. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller to select the desired preset position. X To store a channel, press and hold W the COMAND controller until you hear a tone. The previously saved channel is overwritten. Storing channels automatically TV channels are automatically stored on the first 20 of the 40 preset positions in total. Receivable channels are stored in order of reception quality. The current preset channels in positions 1 – 20 are manually overwritten. Z COMAND Online enter a channel and the desired programme on this channel. X Step 1: to call up the input line for the channel number: press l during TV playback. or X Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Channel entry and press W to confirm. With both options, the input line for the four-digit channel number appears. 505 Video 506 Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select Preset by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Autostore and press W to confirm. COMAND Online searches for channels with adequate reception. The available stations are automatically stored in the preset positions. channels or digital radio stations which have adequate reception. A dot # indicates the currently selected channel. COMAND Online X Information about the current programme Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select Info by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You will see the information if it is provided by the selected TV channel or radio station. The information field otherwise remains empty. X To display multi-page information, turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. X i It may take a few seconds for the information to appear. Displaying the current programme or programme preview This function is available if the selected TV channel or radio station transmits the necessary information. X Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Channel list (TV) or Station list (Radio). (Radio) The selected channel list appears. It shows the current programme on the digital TV Alphabetical browser Channel name To display the programme preview Visual display of the elapsed programme time (if this information is broadcast) A Title of the current programme B Current channel : ; = ? To activate the alphabetical browser: slide XV the COMAND controller to the left. The browser is highlighted. X Select the initial letter of the desired channel name by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller. or X To select the letter B, for example, press the l number key twice in quick succession. The programme display changes to the appropriate channel. i Entering characters using the number keypad (Y page 305). X X Switch back by sliding VY. X To display the programme preview: slide VY the COMAND controller to the right. The channel list shows the channel's next programme. Video 507 The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. When the function is switched on, FIX appears in the display window. X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the % back button. i The setting is only valid for the currently selected channel. : ; = ? A To display the current programme Channel name Beginning and end of the programme Title of the next programme Current channel To display the current programme: slide XV the COMAND controller to the left. X To close the display: press the % back button. The browser cannot be activated in the programme preview. X i The programme preview is also referred to as the electronic programme guide (EPG). Basic TV settings Fixing the frequency Depending on reception levels, country or TV standard, the TV tuner automatically switches to an alternative channel with better reception if it is broadcasting the same programme content. You can use the Channel fix function to prevent this channel switching. This is useful e.g. if there is a disruptive time delay between the channels or if you do not wish the tuner to switch channels automatically. X Press W the COMAND controller. The TV menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Channel fix and confirm with W. Setting the TV standard COMAND Online is already set to the correct TV standard. If you are driving your vehicle in a different country or region with a different TV standard, you should reset the TV standard. If the TV standard is not set correctly, channels may not be found or characters may be incorrectly displayed, for example. A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can help you to select the correct TV standard. X Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select TV standard and press W to confirm. A list appears showing the reception regions. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected reception area or country. X Select the reception area and press W to confirm. A message appears to inform you that if the wrong country is set, correct reception will not be possible. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, COMAND Online will switch to the country setting you have selected. If you select No No, the country list will appear again. Z COMAND Online X Video 508 COMAND Online Teletext Introduction Teletext and data service functions are not supported by all TV standards in all countries. Teletext can only be received if there is no interference in the picture reception. The teletext or data service functions receive and save all teletext pages for the currently selected channel in the system memory. This excludes any subpages. If you set a different channel, the memory is cleared and refilled. X To select a subpage: slide XVY the COMAND controller. Digital teletext (MHEG-5) Switching teletext on/off Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X To switch on: select Teletext by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To switch off: press the % back button. The TV picture appears. X Selecting a teletext page X To access a page directly: press the corresponding number keys. X To access the previous/next page: turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. i You can only enter pages that are permissible for teletext between 100 and 899. Dynamic teletext page A dynamic teletext page may be available. This page consists of multiple sub-pages that are displayed at the bottom of the display via 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. In addition to TV and radio programmes, you can also use interactive multimedia applications such as weather forecasts, news reports and sports results. Digital teletext is only available in some countries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand. X Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X To switch on: select Teletext by sliding XVY and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. When the data contents are displayed, turn cVd the COMAND controller. The menu bar appears at the bottom of the picture. X To select a colour: select Red Red, Green Green, Yellow or Blue by turning cVd the COMAND controller. X Press W to confirm. The contents of the selected colour are displayed. X To navigate to the page: when the menu bar is displayed, slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. The menu bar disappears. X Slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller and select contents from the page. X Press W to confirm. X Video To return to the TV programme: turn cVd the COMAND controller. X Select TV by turning cVd the COMAND controller. or X Press and hold the % back button on the left next to the COMAND controller. X 509 Rselect a country-specific character set channel list settings Rreset the settings Rperform "TV - further options" menu Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Further options by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X To exit the menu: select Exit and press W to confirm. X If a multilingual broadcast is received, you can select the audio channel you would like to hear. With Audio 1 you can select the main channel, with Audio 2 you can choose an additional audio track. X Press W the COMAND controller while in full-screen mode. The TV menu is shown. X Select TV by sliding XVY or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Audio 1 or Audio 2 by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller. The # dot indicates the selected setting. The audio channel switches over, e.g. to another language. Selecting language and subtitles Further options Overview You can use this function to: Rselect audio languages subtitles on/off and select the subtitle language Rswitch Audio language: when the Prefer COMAND language function is switched on, it gives preference to the COMAND system language currently set. For programmes broadcast in multiple languages, the listener can select between several audio languages. A symbol Z COMAND Online Selecting audio COMAND Online 510 Video for programme transmission may appear in front of the audio language: with audio explanations (for the visually impaired) in stereo or for the hearing impaired. If a symbol does not appear, the programme is either broadcast in mono or the transmission properties are unknown. Subtitles: when this function is activated, shows subtitles in the selected language for the programme currently broadcast (if available). X In the "Tuner - Further Options" menu, confirm Language & Subtitles by pressing W the COMAND controller (Y page 509). A menu appears. X To select the language: confirm Audio Language by pressing W the COMAND controller. X Select Prefer COMAND language or one of the available audio languages. Switch the setting on O or off ª or select an available audio language. If you select one of the available audio languages, e.g. English, this setting is used for the current program only. X To select subtitles: select Subtitles by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Subtitles and press W to confirm. Switch the subtitles on O or off ª. X Select Prefer COMAND language or one of the available languages for subtitles. Switch the setting on O or off ª or select an available language for subtitles. If you select one of the available languages for subtitles, e.g. English, this setting is used for the current programme. X To exit the menu: select Back and press W to confirm. Settings In the "Tuner - Further Options" menu, confirm Settings by pressing W the COMAND controller (Y page 509). A menu appears. X To set a country-specific character set: select 1. country-specific charac‐ ter set and press W to confirm. Switch the setting on O or off ª. Function deactivated: the character set broadcast by the TV channels is used for the display. Function activated: a country-specific character set is used for the display. X To perform station list settings: select 2. Station List Settings by sliding ZVÆ or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Display free-to-air TV Sta‐ tions, Display free-to-air Radio tions Stations or Display data-serviceonly Stations. Stations Switch the display of free-to-air TV channels or radio stations and data-only services in the channel list on O or off ª. X To reset the settings: select Reset Reset. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to reset. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. After selecting Yes Yes, the reception device settings are reset to the factory settings. No cancels the procedure. X To exit the menu: select 0. Back and press W to confirm. X Video Important safety notes G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, invisible laser beams may be released. These laser beams may damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. You must not open the casing. Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Handling discs while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Handle discs only when the vehicle is stationary. Bear in mind that, at a speed of only 50 km/h, your vehicle is already covering a distance of 14 m per second. software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. DVD playback requirements There are video DVDs available on the market that do not conform to the current standards. Such DVDs may have picture, sound or other playback problems. COMAND Online is capable of playing back video DVDs produced according to the following standards: RRegion code 2 (for Europe) or region code 0 (no region code) or NTSC standard You will generally find the relevant details either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case. RPAL i If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, you will see a message to this effect. i COMAND Online is set to region code 2 at the factory. This setting can be changed at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. This will allow you to play video DVDs with a different region code, provided that they are produced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC standard. The region code can be changed a maximum of five times. Notes on discs ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage COMAND Online. Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which can result in read errors and disc recognition problems. ! COMAND Online is designed to play discs which comply with the EN 60908 standard. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the device. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter. Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions will be temporarily blocked or may not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions or actions, you will see the K symbol in the display. Inserting and removing DVDs X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and ejecting CDs and DVDs" section (Y page 469). You may encounter playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing Z COMAND Online Video DVD mode 511 Video 512 Switching to video DVD mode Switching on automatically X Single DVD drive: insert a video DVD. COMAND loads the medium inserted and starts to play it. X X DVD changer: insert a video DVD. Press h. COMAND Online Select Video by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The video menu appears. X Select DVD-V and press W to confirm. X Showing/hiding the control menu or X If another video source is switched on, you can now switch to video DVD mode in the video menu. Press the % back button. COMAND Online loads the medium inserted and starts to play it. Switching on with the function button X Press the h function button. COMAND Online switches to the disc operating mode previously set. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 in the DVD changer or single DVD drive (disc mode) Rmemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB memory RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode Roperation with Bluetooth® audio X DVD changer: select Media by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Single DVD drive: select Media by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a ý video DVD from the media list (Y page 514). X To show: in video DVD mode, slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. X To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller. or X Wait for approximately eight seconds. Raudio Switching on with the video menu X Select Video in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If video DVD mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. Control menu displayed : Data medium type ; Current track = Current scene ? Track time A To show the menu i This function is not available while the DVD menu is being displayed. Showing/hiding the menu X To show: in full-screen video DVD mode, press W the COMAND controller. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press W to confirm. Video X To hide: slide the ZV COMAND controller and confirm Full screen by pressing W. X 513 To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to confirm. During playback, confirm É by pressing W twice in rapid succession. Ì is selected. X To restart playback: confirm Ì by pressing W. Playback restarts from the beginning. Pause function Menu shown : Video DVD options ; Pause function = Stop function ? Media media selection A Sound settings i This function is not available while the DVD menu is being displayed. Fast forward/rewind X In full-screen video DVD mode, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position is reached. or X Press and hold the E or F button until the desired position is reached. You see the control menu. Stop function Show the menu (Y page 512). X To interrupt playback: select É by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. The video image is hidden. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. X Show the menu (Y page 512). To pause playback: select Ë by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. X To continue playback: select Ì and press W to confirm. The menu is hidden. X X Selecting a scene/chapter If the film is divided into scenes or chapters, you can select them directly while the film is running, or skip forwards step by step. Some DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g. during the opening credits). It may also be possible to select the scene/ chapter from within the menu stored on the DVD. X To skip forwards or back: in full-screen mode, turn cVd the COMAND controller. or X Slide XVY the COMAND controller. or X Press the E or F button on the control panel. The control menu (Y page 512) appears for approximately eight seconds. Z COMAND Online or X Video 514 On the multifunction steering wheel: switch to video DVD mode in COMAND Online (Y page 512). X Use the = or ; button to select the Audio menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select a scene/chapter. If you press and hold the 9 or : button for an extended period, rapid scrolling begins. COMAND Online X Selecting a video DVD from the media list X X X Selecting a film/title Show the menu (Y page 512). Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The media list appears. The # dot indicates the medium currently being played. Video DVDs are indicated by the ý icon. If equipped with a single DVD drive: press W the COMAND controller. COMAND Online loads the video DVD and begins playing it. If equipped with a DVD changer: press W the COMAND controller to display all magazine trays. X Select the video DVD by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. COMAND Online loads the video DVD and begins playing it. X DVD function menu This function is only available if the DVD is divided into several films/titles. If the DVD contains several films, these can be selected directly. A film can be selected either when the DVD is being played back or when it is stopped. The film can also be selected from the menu on the DVD itself. X Show the menu (Y page 512). X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD functions and press W to confirm. A menu appears. X Select Title selection by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select a film/title and press W to confirm. i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an MP3 medium, you switch to the respective audio mode. For further information about the media list; see (Y page 474). DVD menu Calling up the DVD menu The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example, you can change the DVD language in the DVD menu. X Show the menu (Y page 512). X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Video Selecting menu items in the DVD menu Moving up one level in the DVD menu Show the DVD menu (Y page 514). X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. or X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. X Select Go up and press W to confirm. X Going back to the film Press the k button repeatedly until you see the movie. or X Select the corresponding menu item from the DVD menu. X X X Show the DVD menu (Y page 514). Select a menu item by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. or X Select a menu item by sliding XVY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The menu appears. To reconfirm your selection: confirm Select by pressing W. COMAND Online carries out the action. Make a selection from the further options, if necessary. COMAND Online then switches back to the DVD menu. i Menu items that cannot be selected are shown in grey. X i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to the movie) movie), Play Play, Stop Stop, K, L or Go up may either not function at all or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. To indicate this, the K symbol appears in the display. X Select the Back (to the movie) menu item in the menu and press W to confirm. Setting the language and audio format This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the DVD menu language, the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is dependent on the DVD content. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu (Y page 514). X Show the DVD menu (Y page 514). X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND controller to show the menu. X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD functions and press W to confirm. X Select Menu language or Audio lan‐ guage and press W to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Z COMAND Online Select DVD functions and press W to confirm. X Select Menu and press W to confirm. The DVD menu appears. X 515 516 Video COMAND Online Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of the DVD. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Show the DVD menu (Y page 514). X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select DVD functions and press W to confirm. X Select Subtitles or Camera angle and press W to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the current setting. X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If your vehicle is equipped with the Media Interface, you can connect an external video source. You require an additional audio/video cable set to connect an external video source to the Media Interface. For more details, please contact a MercedesBenz Service Centre or visit http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Then, follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section. You will find the connection sockets in the centre console stowage compartment. Interactive content DVDs may contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, for example, you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD. X Select an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller and press W to execute it. A menu appears and the first entry, Select Select, is highlighted. X Press W the COMAND controller. Video AUX operation Connecting external video sources External video sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system messages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually. Audio/video sockets : Video port (V) (yellow) ; Audio port (L) (white) = Audio port (R) (red) i For correct playback, a suitable video standard must be set at the external video source. X Connect the external device to the corresponding port. Video Switching to video AUX mode 517 louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play the sound at high volume without distorting it. Video AUX mode X Press the h function button repeatedly until Media Interface mode is selected. X X or Select Video in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. If video AUX mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another video source is switched on, you can now switch to video AUX mode in the video menu. X Select Video and press W to confirm. X Select Aux and press W to confirm. The video AUX menu appears. You will hear and see the content of the external video source if it is connected and switched to playback. X Showing/hiding the menu X Show the video AUX menu (Y page 517). Select Volume by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting. Select Standard or Boost and press W to confirm. Standard: the volume of the external video Standard source is adjusted to a standard value. Boost: the volume of the external video Boost source is raised by approximately 10 dB. Picture viewer Introduction If there are pictures on the active data medium, you can view them. You can display pictures with a resolution of up to 20 megapixels. To show: in video AUX mode, press W the COMAND controller. X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller and confirm Full screen by pressing W. Data medium Supported picture formats CD/DVD with picture files bmp, jpeg, jpg, png Volume and sound settings USB devices (sticks, bmp, jpeg, jpg, png hard drives) SD memory card X Information on: Rvolume Rsound settings (Y page 299) settings (Y page 299) i A device which is connected as an external video source may seem quieter or Calling up the category list X Select a data medium with pictures (e.g. a memory card): Z COMAND Online Increasing the volume on COMAND Online Video 518 Rin Rin X the Audio menu (Y page 462) the media list (Y page 474) Changing the picture view Select Search in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears (Y page 481). Displaying pictures COMAND Online X X Select Photos from the category list (Y page 481) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A folder directory appears. Select a folder with photos and press W to confirm. The folder displays the existing picture files (example). X While viewing a picture (Y page 518), press W the COMAND controller. A menu appears. X To turn the picture clockwise: confirm Turn clockwise by pressing W the COMAND controller. X To turn the picture anti-clockwise: select Turn anticlockwise by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by turning the cVd COMAND controller and press W to confirm. After you have zoomed into the picture, you can move the section of the picture. X Slide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller. X X Select a photo and press W to confirm. The photo is displayed and the music is stopped. X To revert to the original size: press W the COMAND controller. or X Press the % back button. Exiting the picture viewer X Select Back to menu in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Rear Seat Entertainment System 519 Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle stowage compartment. Components The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes: Rear Seat Entertainment System Features of your COMAND Online This Supplement describes all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND Online system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND Online system may not be equipped with all the features described. screens for the rear behind the frontseat head restraints Ra remote control Ra CD/DVD drive RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display) and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) Rtwo sets of cordless headphones Overview Important safety notes G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, invisible laser beams may be released. These laser beams may damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. You must not open the casing. Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sources are not secured in the passenger compartment, they can be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, for example in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Z COMAND Online Rtwo 520 Rear Seat Entertainment System COMAND Online Rear-compartment screens : AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 521) ; Display Remote control Overview : ; = ? A B C D E F Switches the screen on/off Switches the button lighting on/off Selects the screen for the remote control Selects a menu or menu item Confirms a selection or setting Switches the sound on/off Adjusts the volume Skips, fast-forward/fast-rewind Selects a track; to enter track directly Exits a menu (back) Selecting the screen for the remote control The remote control can be used to operate one of the two rear-compartment screens or SPLITVIEW for the front passenger. To do so, you must switch the remote control to the desired screen (Y page 520). X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumbwheel = until "L REAR" is highlighted in the window. X To select the right-hand screen: turn thumbwheel = until "R REAR" is highlighted in the window. X To select SPLITVIEW: turn thumbwheel = until "SPLITVIEW" is highlighted in the window. Switching the screen on/off If the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (see the vehicle Owner's Manual), or if the key is not inserted, the screens in the rear will switch off after 30 minutes. Before the screens switch off, they show a message to this effect. You can switch the screens back on. However, this will discharge the starter battery. X CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks Switching the button lighting on/off X Press button ; on the remote control (Y page 520). Depending on the previous status, the button lighting is switched on or off. : CD/DVD slot ; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal Point the remote control at the rear-compartment screen that has been selected for remote operation. X Press button : on the remote control (Y page 520). The respective rear screen switches on or off. i You can only switch the screens on using the remote control if the ignition is switched on. i If you do not use the remote control for about 15 seconds, the button lighting switches off automatically. Switching the sound on/off X Press button B on the remote control (Y page 520). The sound is switched on/off. (red) = AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal (white) ? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow) A CD/DVD eject button The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive. Identical connections can be found on the right-hand side of the rear-compartment screens (display AUX)(Y page 520). Selecting a menu/menu item and confirming your selection X Select a menu/menu item using the =;9: buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. Z 521 COMAND Online Rear Seat Entertainment System Rear Seat Entertainment System 522 Cordless headphones COMAND Online Overview : ; = ? A X Volume control Selects a screen for the headphones Battery compartment cover Switches the cordless headphones on/off Indicator lamp with various displays (Y page 523) Open both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow. Switching the cordless headphones on/off X Press button :. Depending on the previous status, the headphones are switched on or off. To preserve the batteries, the headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an audio signal for approximately three minutes. Rear Seat Entertainment System Indicator lamp displays The colour of the indicator lamp shows whether the headphones are switched on or off and indicates the charge level of the batteries inserted. LED display Status Green The batteries are fine. Red The batteries are almost discharged. Lit continu- The headphones are switched ously on and connected to a screen. Turn volume control : until the desired volume has been set. i If you have connected cordless headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume using the remote control (Y page 520). Flashing The headphones are searching for the connection to a screen. Off (dark) The headphones are switched off or the batteries are discharged. X Selecting a screen for the headphones Connecting additional headphones You can connect one additional set of corded headphones to each of the two rear-compartment screens (Y page 520). The socket is designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms. Replacing batteries Notes X Move push slider : to L (left-hand screen) or R (right-hand screen). G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Z COMAND Online Adjusting the volume of the headphones 523 524 Rear Seat Entertainment System COMAND Online Batteries are required for the remote control and for the two sets of cordless headphones. The batteries can be replaced (Y page 523). Only valid for South Africa On the remote control Remove discharged batteries A from the tray. X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery compartment when doing so. Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face upwards. Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face downwards. X To close the battery compartment: insert battery compartment cover = starting with retaining lugs ? into the battery compartment and allow catch tab ; to engage in place. X On the cordless headphones : Battery compartment cover : ; = ? A Battery compartment Catch tab Battery compartment cover Retaining lugs Batteries The remote control contains 2 type AAA, 1.5 V batteries. X To open the battery compartment: remove battery compartment cover = on the back of the remote control. X To do so, press down retaining lug ; and take off battery compartment cover =. The cordless headphones contain two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries. X To open the battery compartment: flip battery compartment cover : upwards. As you do so, hold the left-hand side of the headphones as shown to prevent the batteries from falling out. X Remove the discharged batteries from the tray. X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery compartment when doing so. Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face upwards. Rear Seat Entertainment System i The operating duration of the headphones with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours. Basic functions Selecting sound settings You can select the sound settings in the audio CD/DVD/MP3, TV, video DVD and AUX modes. X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio CD mode) (Y page 527). X Select Treble or Bass using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears. X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. Using headphones Multiple users You can use the cordless headphones supplied and/or up to two sets of corded headphones connected to the corresponding jack of the rear-compartment screens (Y page 520). Information on the cordless headphones (Y page 522). Simultaneous use of the rear-compartment disc drive The two rear-compartment screens can be operated almost entirely independently from one another. However, there can be a conflict in some menus if the two screens are used simultaneously. If the rear-compartment disc drive is being used for both screens simultaneously, selecting certain menus or settings on one of the screens also affects the other screen. The following functions affect both screens: Using the main loudspeakers This function is available in conjunction with COMAND Online. You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to listen to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment drive. To do so, at least one of the rear-compartment screens must be set to disc mode. X To set on COMAND Online: press the $ function button to switch on an audio mode. X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The Audio menu appears. X Select Rear by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. i The headphones' volume setting does not affect the main loudspeakers. Rchanging playback options Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder) Rusing the play, pause and stop functions forwarding/rewinding or scrolling Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating within it Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera angle Rcalling up interactive DVD content The following functions affect only one screen: Rfast Raudio and video functions as well as picture settings Rswitching menu between full screen and the Z COMAND Online Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face downwards. X To close the battery compartment: press the battery compartment cover downwards until it engages into place. If the batteries have been inserted correctly, the indicator lamp will light up green when the headphones are switched on. 525 Rear Seat Entertainment System 526 Switching between operating modes When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you call up this operating mode again later, there are two possibilities: COMAND Online Rthe operating mode has been changed on the other screen. Rthe operating mode has not been changed. In the first case, the operating mode appears as it is on the other screen. In the second case, the setting appears on the screen as it was when you last exited the operating mode. Picture settings Overview You can select the picture settings in TV, video DVD and AUX mode (Y page 541). Adjusting the brightness, contrast and colour X In both cases, select TV or DVD-V using the :=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. Select Brightness Brightness, Contrast or Colour using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears. X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Changing the picture format X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or Select Menu while the control menu is shown (Y page 512) and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select TV or DVD-V using the :=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of one of the menu items 16:9 optimised optimised, 4:3 or Widescreen indicates the format currently selected. X Select a format using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X System settings Note Example: TV mode : Brightness, contrast and colour ; Picture formats Switch on TV mode (Y page 531) or video DVD mode (Y page 535). X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown (Y page 512) and press the 9 button to confirm. X You can adjust almost all system settings individually for each screen without affecting the other screen. You make these settings using the remote control(Y page 520). Selecting the display language X Select System using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm. You see the system menu on the selected rear screen. Rear Seat Entertainment System X Select a language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The Rear Seat Entertainment System activates the selected language. X Hiding/showing the picture X To hide the picture: select Display off in the system menu using the :; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The picture is hidden. X To display the picture: press the 9 button. Changing the display design Select Settings in the system menu using the : button on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Day design, design Night design or Automatic using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot indicates the current setting. X Design Explanation Day design The display is set permanently to day design. Night design The display is set permanently to night design. Automatic The display design changes depending on the vehicle instrument cluster illumination. Setting the brightness Select Settings in the system menu using the : button on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Brightness using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. A scale appears. X Adjust the brightness using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The brightness bar moves up or down. The picture becomes lighter or darker in accordance with the scale. Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode Important safety notes G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, invisible laser beams may be released. These laser beams may damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. You must not open the casing. Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. General notes You will find information on the following topics in the Audio section: RNotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 480) on MP3 mode (Y page 479) RNotes on copyright (Y page 480) RNotes Z COMAND Online Select Settings using the : button and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The list of languages appears. A #dot indicates the current setting. X 527 Rear Seat Entertainment System 528 Inserting a CD/DVD Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 528). The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads the inserted disc. X Select Disc in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and confirm by pressing the 9 button. The corresponding mode is switched on. The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays the disc. COMAND Online X : Disc slot ; Disc eject button i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result in the elapsed time shown being different to the actual elapsed time. Depending on the vehicle model and equipment level, the CD/DVD drive is found: Rbehind the centre console in a folding com- partment, or Runder the rear bench seat, or Rin the stowage box between the rear seats. The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If there is already a disc inserted, this must be ejected before another is inserted. X Insert a disc into the disc slot. The printed side of the disc must face upwards. If neither side of the disc is printed, the side you wish to play must face downwards. The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc. The CD/DVD drive plays the disc: Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a permissible disc, and Rafter you have switched on disc mode (audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode) (Y page 528). Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded by the drive. Loading may take some time, depending on the number of folders and tracks. Selecting a track Selecting by skipping to a track To skip forwards or backwards to a track: press the = or ; button on the remote control. or X Press the E or F button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has passed 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed time is shorter, it will skip to the start of the previous track. If the Random tracks or Random folder playback option has been selected, the track order is random. X Selecting by track list In audio CD mode, the track list contains all tracks on the disc currently playing. In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all tracks in the currently active group; see "Setting the audio format" (Y page 478). In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks in the currently active folder as well as the folder structure, allowing you to select any track on the MP3 CD. Rear Seat Entertainment System Select Track list (audio CD/DVD mode) or Folder (MP3 mode) using the :=; buttons on the remote control, and confirm by pressing the 9 button. or X Press the 9 button when the display/ selection window is active. The track list appears. The # dot indicates the current track. X Select a track using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. Selecting a folder This function is only available in MP3 mode. Select Folder in MP3 mode using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. or X Press the 9 button when the display/ selection window is active. The folder content appears. X COMAND Online X Making a selection by entering the track number directly X Press the h button on the remote control. The track entry display appears. Example: track 2 X Press number button 2. Example: track 12 X Press the corresponding number keys in rapid succession. Wait for approximately three seconds after making the entry. You will hear the track that has been entered. The corresponding basic menu then reappears. i It is not possible to enter numbers that exceed the number of tracks on the CD or in the currently active folder. X : Folder selection symbol ; Current folder name = Track symbol X To switch to the superordinate folder: select symbol : using the 9: buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The display shows the next folder up. Fast forward/rewind X With the display/selection window active, press the = or ; button on the remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired position. or X Press and hold the E or F button until the desired position is reached. 529 : Folder selection symbol ; Folder symbol Z Rear Seat Entertainment System 530 X Setting the audio format Pause function Further information on audio formats is available in the "Audio" section (Y page 478). X Select DVD-A using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm. X Select Group using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The list of available audio formats appears. The # dot indicates the format currently selected. X Select an audio format using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the = or ; button. COMAND Online Select a folder using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. You will see the tracks in the folder. X Select a track using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The track is played and the corresponding folder is now the active folder. This function is only available in audio DVD mode. X To pause playback: select Ë using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. X To continue playback: select Ì and press the 9 button to confirm. The Ì display changes to Ë. Stop function This function is only available in audio DVD mode. X To interrupt playback: select É using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. X To continue playback: select Ì and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted. X To restart playback: select Ì and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD. Playback options Further information on playback options is available in the "Audio" section (Y page 478). X Select CD CD, DVD-A or MP3 using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option currently selected. Select Normal track sequence sequence, Random tracks or Random folder using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal track sequence, sequence you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. i If you switch the data carrier which you are currently listening to, the Normal track sequence option is activated automatically. If an option is selected, it remains selected after the Rear Seat Entertainment System is switched on or off. X Switching track information on/off (MP3 mode only) If the function is switched on, folder and track names are displayed. Rear Seat Entertainment System If the function is switched off, disc and file names are displayed. X Select MP3 using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Display track information using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. A To show the menu B Previous TV channel in the channel list (channel name or number) To show: press the 9 or : button on the remote control. X To hide: press the 9 or : button. or X After approximately eight seconds, the menu is automatically hidden. X COMAND Online Showing/hiding the menu TV mode General notes Further information on channel reception quality can be found in the "Video" section (Y page 502). Switching to TV mode X Select TV using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. You see the last TV channel selected, provided it can still be received. Showing/hiding the control menu 531 Example: menu shown : TV options ; Channel preset list = Information about the current programme ? To switch on teletext A Sound settings X To show: press the 9 button on the remote control. or Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. X To hide: press the 9 button, select Full screen and press the 9 button to confirm. X Control menu displayed : Preset position of the selected TV channel ; Selected TV channel/number = Current programme ? Next TV channel in the channel list (chan- nel name or number) Z Rear Seat Entertainment System 532 Selecting TV channels COMAND Online Selecting channels using the control menu X Press the = or ; button on the remote control while the display window is active. or X Press the E or F button. The TV tuner selects the previous or next channel from the alphabetical channel list. Setting channels via the channel presets X or X X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The channel presets appear. The # dot indicates where the selected channel is currently stored. X Select a channel using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. or X Press a number button. Setting a channel from the channel list Notes on the channel list can be found in the "Video" section (Y page 503). Information regarding COMAND Online also applies to the Rear Seat Entertainment System. Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. Select TV using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Station list and press the 9 button to confirm. The channel list appears. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel. A number before the list entry shows the memory slot in the channel presets. X X Example: station memory To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. Select a channel using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. Selecting channels by entering the channel and programme number Several programmes can be transmitted on one channel with digital TV. You can therefore enter a channel and the desired programme on this channel. Only one programme can be transmitted on a channel with analogue TV. The programme entry function therefore has no effect. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. X Option 1: select TV using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Channel entry and press the 9 button to confirm. X Option 2: press the h button while the TV is playing. Irrespective of the option, an input bar appears at the top of the screen. Rear Seat Entertainment System To set a channel: enter the channel number using the number keys and press the 9 button to confirm. or X Press and hold the number key until the entry line is hidden. The channel is set. i If you have not entered a programme number, the first programme with adequate reception will be set for a digital channel. i You can enter channels or programmes available in your country even if the reception is currently not adequate. If you enter channels that are either not intended for or not allowed in your country, the Invalid channel number message appears. Storing TV channels Storing channels manually There are ten preset positions available. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control or confirm Menu by pressing the 9 button while the control menu is shown. X X Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The channel presets appear. The # dot indicates under which preset the currently selected channel is stored. To store a channel: select a preset using the 9: buttons and press and hold the 9 button until you hear a tone. or X Press and hold a number button until you hear a tone. The TV picture then reappears. reception quality. Any channels stored manually in the preset memory will be lost. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control or confirm Menu by pressing the 9 button while the control menu is shown. Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Autostore and press the 9 button to confirm. The Rear Seat Entertainment System searches for channels it can receive. The available channels are automatically stored in the preset positions. X Information about the current programme This function is only available on digital TV channels. If you are watching an analogue TV channel, this menu cannot be selected. X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control or confirm Menu by pressing the 9 button while the control menu is shown. X Select Info using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. If the current TV channel provides the corresponding information, this will be displayed. i It can take a few seconds for the information to be displayed. Displaying the current programme or programme preview This function is only available on digital TV channels. The programme preview is also referred to as the electronic programme guide (EPG). Storing channels automatically This function automatically stores channels with adequate reception in order of their Z COMAND Online X 533 Rear Seat Entertainment System 534 = Beginning and end of the programme ? Title of the next programme A Current channel To show the programme preview: select Display programme preview and press the 9 button to confirm. The channel list shows the channel's next programme. X To show the current programme: select Display current programme and press the 9 button to confirm. X To close the display: press the % button. COMAND Online X Example: current programme : Alphabetical browser ; Channel name = To display the programme preview ? Visual display of the elapsed programme time (if this information is broadcast) A Title of the current programme B Current channel X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control or confirm Menu by pressing the 9 button while the control menu is shown. Select TV using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Station list and press the 9 button to confirm. The channel list appears. It shows the current programme on the digital TV channels with adequate reception. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected channel. X Basic TV settings Fixing the frequency Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 507). X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control or confirm Menu by pressing the 9 button while the control menu is shown. Select TV using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Channel fix and press the 9 button to confirm. The function is switched on O or off ª, depending on the previous status. When the function is switched on, FIX appears in the display window. X To exit the menu: press the = or ; button. X Setting the reception region Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 507). X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control or confirm Menu by pressing the 9 button while the control menu is shown. Example: programme preview : To display the current programme ; Channel name Rear Seat Entertainment System Teletext Switching teletext on/off X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. To switch on: select Text using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The first teletext page is displayed. X To switch off: press the % back button. X Selecting a teletext page X To select a page directly: press the corresponding number keys on the remote control. X To call up the previous/next page: press the 9 or : button. i You can only enter pages that are permissible for teletext between 100 and 899. Dynamic teletext page A dynamic teletext page consists of several subpages. The display automatically changes to the next page after a certain time. Video DVD mode Important safety notes G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, invisible laser beams may be released. These laser beams may damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. You must not open the casing. Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. General notes DVD playback requirements You may encounter playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat Entertainment System will be able to play video DVDs that you have copied yourself. Other information can be found under Video (Y page 511). Information regarding COMAND Online also applies to the Rear Seat Entertainment System. Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions described in this section will be temporarily blocked or may not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions or actions, you will see the K symbol in the display. Z COMAND Online Select TV using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select TV standard and press the 9 button to confirm. A list appears showing the reception regions. The # dot in front of a list entry indicates the currently selected reception area or country. X Select the reception area and press the 9 button to confirm. A message appears to inform you that if the wrong country is set, correct reception will not be possible. X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button to confirm. If you select Yes Yes, the Rear Seat Entertainment System switches the country. If you select No No, the country list will appear again. X 535 Rear Seat Entertainment System 536 Switching to video DVD mode Insert a video DVD (Y page 528). The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads the disc. If disc mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as described in the following instructions. X Select Disc in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and confirm by pressing the 9 button. If the video DVD fulfils the playback criteria: the film either starts automatically or the menu saved on the DVD appears. If the DVD menu appears, you must start the film manually. X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu. Showing/hiding the menu COMAND Online X Showing/hiding the control menu Example: menu shown : Video DVD options ; Pause function = Stop function ? Media media selection A Sound settings X To show: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. X To hide: press the 9 button, select Full screen and press the 9 button to confirm. Fast forward/rewind X Control menu displayed : Data medium type ; Current track = Current scene ? Track time A To show the menu X To show: press the 9 or : button on the remote control. X To hide: press the 9 or : button. or X Wait for approximately 8 seconds. Press and hold the E or F button on the remote control until the desired position has been reached. You see the control menu. Pause function X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. X To pause playback: select Ë and press the 9 button to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. Rear Seat Entertainment System To continue playback: select Ì and press the 9 button to confirm. The menu is hidden. Stop function X To show the menu: press the 9 button on the remote control. or X Option 2: while the film is playing, press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu. X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select DVD functions and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Scene selection and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select 5 using the 9 or : button and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, playback will begin from the 5th scene/chapter after a brief pause. X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm. To interrupt playback: select É and press the 9 button to confirm. The Ë display changes to Ì. The video image is hidden. X To continue playback: select Ì and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. The menu is hidden. X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted. X X Selecting a scene/chapter directly The examples illustrate how to select scene/ chapter 5. X Option 1: while the film is playing, press the h button on the remote control. X Press the corresponding number key, such as 5. To restart playback: select Ì and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD. Selecting a film/title Option 1: Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu. X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. X Selecting a scene/chapter General notes Also observe the information on the video DVD mode (Y page 513). Skipping forwards/backwards Press the = or ; button on the remote control. or X Press the E or F button. The control menu (Y page 512) appears for approximately eight seconds. X Select DVD functions and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Title selection and press the 9 button to confirm. X Z COMAND Online X 537 Rear Seat Entertainment System 538 To call up the selection list: press the 9 button. X Select a film/track. remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears. X Option 2: Example: selecting film 2 X Press button 2. After a brief pause, the second film is played. COMAND Online DVD menu Calling up the DVD menu The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example, you can change the DVD language in the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu. X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. X Select DVD functions and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Menu and press the 9 button to confirm. The DVD menu appears. Selecting menu items in the DVD menu X Select a menu item using the 9:=; buttons on the Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button. The Rear Seat Entertainment System carries out the action or shows a submenu. X If available, additional options can now be selected. The Rear Seat Entertainment System then switches back to the DVD menu. X i Menu items that cannot be selected are shown in grey. i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to the movie) movie), Play Play, Stop Stop, E, F or Go up may either not function at all or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. To indicate this, the K symbol appears in the display. Stopping a film or skipping to the beginning or end of a scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. The menu appears. X To stop the film: select the Stop menu item and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. X To skip to the end of a scene: select the F menu item and press the 9 button to confirm. X To skip to the beginning of a scene: select the E menu item and press the 9 button to confirm. Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Show the DVD menu. X Press the % back button on the remote control or select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu. or X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. X Select Go up and press W to confirm. Rear Seat Entertainment System Select DVD functions and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Subtitles or Camera angle and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the current setting. X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X X Setting the audio format This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is dependent on the DVD content. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu. X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. X Select DVD functions and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Audio language and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears after a short while. The # dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language. X Select a language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. X To exit the menu: press the = or ; button. Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of the DVD. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu. X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. To exit the menu: press the = or ; button. Interactive content DVDs may also contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may be able to influence events, for example, by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD. X Select an action using the 9;:= buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to execute it. A menu appears and the first entry, Select Select, is highlighted. X Press the 9 button. Active COMAND source mode Switching the function on/off in COMAND Online You can transfer an audio or video source selected in COMAND Online to the Rear Seat Entertainment System. If you subsequently switch modes in COMAND Online, the new source will not be transmitted to the Rear Seat Entertainment System. X To switch on the function in COMAND Online: switch to the desired audio mode in COMAND Online, e.g. CD mode (Y page 472), or show the menu in video DVD mode (Y page 512). X Select the menu item at the bottom left, e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ Z COMAND Online Going back to the film Press the % button repeatedly until you see the movie. or X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select the Back (to the movie) menu item in the menu and press the 9 button to confirm. X 539 Rear Seat Entertainment System 540 COMAND Online and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Active audio/video source in rear and press W to confirm. In the status bar at the top, you will see the headphones symbol and the _ symbol for the source that has been switched on. X To switch off the function in COMAND Online: switch on the desired audio mode in COMAND Online or show the menu in video DVD mode. X Select the menu item at the bottom left, e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select Rear audio/video off _ and press W the COMAND controller to confirm. Selecting an active COMAND source in the rear-compartment screen Loading the active COMAND source X Select COMAND using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm. The audio or video source selected in COMAND Online is loaded in the Rear Seat Entertainment System. When the loading process is complete, the audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat Entertainment System. If Rear audio/video off is activated in COMAND, the COMAND is off or there is no active COMAND source message appears. Audio CD mode X To select by skipping to a track: press the = or ; button. or X Press the E or F button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed track time is less than 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the previous track. Additional setting option: RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 525) Audio DVD mode X To skip to the next/previous group: press the : button on the remote control. X To select K L: highlight using the = or ; button and press 9. Additional setting option: RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 525) i Information on groups can be found in the "Setting the audio format" section (Y page 478). Rear Seat Entertainment System To select a folder: press the : button on the remote control. X Highlight one of the two folder symbols with the = or ; button and press 9 to confirm. Depending on your selection, the previous or next folder is selected and the first track is played. X Additional setting option: RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 525) Video DVD mode X To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the 9 button. The video image is played in full screen mode. Additional setting options: RAdjusting the brightness, contrast and colour (Y page 526) RChanging the picture format (Y page 526) RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 525) AUX mode Introduction You can connect one external video source to each of the displays of the Rear Seat Entertainment System (AUX display) and also one external video source to the rear-compart- ment drive (AUX drive) with a sound and video signal. Please see the corresponding operating instructions for information on how to operate the external video source. For further details about external video sources, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Connecting AUX equipment AUX drive The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/DVD drive on the right next to the CD/DVD eject button (Y page 521). AUX display The AUX display jacks are on the side of the screen (Y page 520). Audio and video connection X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right signals into the corresponding L and R jacks. X Insert the video plug into the V jack. Switching to AUX mode AUX drive X Select Aux in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The AUX menu appears. Select Source from the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Disc drive Aux and press the 9 button to confirm. You will hear and see the content of the external video source if it is connected to the CD/DVD drive and switched to playback. If no video image is available from the AUX source connected, you will see an audio menu. X Z COMAND Online MP3 mode X To select a track by skipping to a track: press the = or ; button on the remote control. or X Press the E or F button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed track time is less than 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the previous track. 541 Rear Seat Entertainment System COMAND Online 542 AUX display X Select a screen using the thumbwheel on the remote control (Y page 520) until "L REAR" (left-hand screen) or "R REAR" (righthand screen) is highlighted in the window. X Select Aux in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Source from the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Display Aux and press the 9 button to confirm. You will see and hear the content of the video source if it is switched to playback. If no video image is available from the AUX source connected, you will see an audio menu. Setting treble and bass Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. An adjustment scale appears. X Select a setting using the 9 or : button and press the 9 button to confirm. X Adjusting the brightness, contrast or colour Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux in the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select Brightness Brightness, Contrast or Colour and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears. X Select a setting using the 9 or : button and press the 9 button to confirm. X Changing the picture format Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux in the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm. X Select 16:9 optimised, optimised 4:3 or Wide‐ screen using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of a menu item indicates the current setting. X 543 Useful information ............................ 544 Stowage areas .................................. 544 Stowing and features Features ............................................. 548 544 Stowage areas Useful information Glove compartment i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Stowing and features els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Stowage areas Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X In the glove compartment, there is a coin holder, a map holder and a pen holder. i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 150). The glove compartment can be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. X To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it to position 1. Stowage areas X To open: press button ;. Armrest : opens. In the stowage compartment, there are a stowage tray and a mobile phone bracket. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a 12 V power socket, USB port or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (Y page 494). Spectacles compartment Stowage compartment in the centre console To open: press the trim element on cover :. X To remove the rubber mat: grasp the tabs on the rubber mat and pull up to remove. X To insert the rubber mat: press the rubber mat into the housing. X To close: swing cover : downwards until it engages. X You can remove the rubber mat from the stowage compartment to clean it. Clean it with clean, lukewarm water only. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there is a cup holder and an ashtray in the centre console stowage compartment. Umbrella holder X To open: press marking :. Spectacles compartment ; opens. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Example: vehicle side, left There are umbrella holders in the door stowage compartments on both sides of the vehicle. One compact umbrella can be stowed per side. Z Stowing and features Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest 545 Stowage areas 546 To remove: grab strap ; and pull umbrella holder : out of the stowage compartment in the direction of the arrow. X To insert: push umbrella holder : in the opposite direction to the arrow, into the stowage compartment until it engages. X Stowing and features You can remove the umbrella holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Stowage compartment in the rear centre console There is a stowage compartment in the rear on the left-hand side only. X Open the seat belt guide and remove the seat belt (Y page 115). X Move the left-hand front seat forwards (Y page 115) and fold the backrest forwards. X To open: press release button ;. Cover : folds upwards. X To close: fold down cover : and let it engage. X Fold the backrest of the left-hand front seat back and move the seat backwards (Y page 115). X Route the seat belt back through the seat belt guide. Stowage net X To open: slide cover : in the direction of the arrow. On vehicles equipped with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is fitted in the stowage compartment (Y page 577). On vehicles equipped with a bottle holder, the bottle holder is located in the stowage compartment (Y page 549). Stowage compartment in the rear compartment There is a stowage net : in the frontpassenger footwell. Loading aid in the boot Raising/lowering the roof G WARNING Body parts can become trapped when the roof is being raised or lowered. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of moving parts. Press the switch again if someone becomes trapped. Stowage areas 547 ! Only close the boot once the roof is low- Stowing and features ered completely. Otherwise, you could damage the roof. To make it easier to load your luggage, you can raise the stowed roof after you have opened the boot lid. You can only raise roof ; if boot separator = is closed and the boot lid is opened completely. To raise the roof: press switch :. The roof is raised slightly. Switch : lights up brightly. X Slide boot separator = back (Y page 106). X You can only lower roof ; if boot separator = is closed and the boot lid is opened completely. To lower the roof: close the boot separator (Y page 106). X Press switch :. The roof is lowered slightly. Switch : lights up dimly. X Vehicles with boot lid remote closing feature: when the boot lid is opened, the loading aid rises automatically. It lowers automatically when the boot lid is closed. Z Features 548 Problems with the loading aid Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions It is no longer possible to lower the stowed roof in the boot using the loading aid. You cannot close the boot any more. X Call a qualified specialist workshop. Stowing and features Stowage well under the boot floor To open: open boot separator = (Y page 106). X Swing boot floor ? up by loop ;. X Pull hook with Velcro attachment : off the underside of boot floor ?. X Attach hook with Velcro attachment : to boot separator = by its handle. X The TIREFIT kit, tyre-change tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. Features Cup holders Important safety notes ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Cup holder in the centre console To open: open stowage compartment =(Y page 545). X To remove the insert: slide catches : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove the cup holder insert upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in stowage compartment =. X Slide catches : outwards in the direction of the arrow until they engage. X You can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Reducer ; can be removed. In this way, you can place large and small containers in the cup holder. X To remove: grip reducer ; and pull out upwards in the direction of the arrow. X To insert: place reducer ; into the cup holder and push it downwards against the direction of the arrow to the stop. Features Bottle holders Observe the "Important safety notes" in the "Stowage compartments" section (Y page 544). 549 ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 546). X To remove the insert: slide catches : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Lift bottle holder insert ; up and remove. X To refit the insert: place insert ; in the stowage compartment. X Slide catches : outwards in the direction of the arrow until they engage. X The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over. Fold down sun visor :. X Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;. X Swing sun visor : to the side. X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. X Ashtray Sun visors Overview : Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining strip, e.g. for a car park ticket Z Stowing and features Glare from the side Features 550 To open: open stowage compartment : (Y page 545). X To remove the insert: pull insert ; up in the direction of the arrow, out of the cup holder. X To refit the insert: push insert ; on the left-hand side into the cup holder. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X To open: open stowage compartment : under the armrest (Y page 545). X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X i Only refit insert ; on the left-hand side of Stowing and features the cup holder. Cigarette lighter 12 V sockets General notes X G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Ra Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as bulbs or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-off ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Socket in the front-passenger footwell Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Lift up the cover of socket :. Features Open stowage compartment : under the armrest (Y page 545). X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X Socket in the boot driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 620). Rthe X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. General notes There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone with COMAND Online through the Bluetooth® interface. This also applies if your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony. i You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently Z Stowing and features Socket under the armrest 551 552 Features More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with COMAND Online can be obtained: Charge maintenance socket Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Ron i The functions and services available when Stowing and features you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Using a mobile phone If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, the mobile phone will be charged and connected with the exterior aerial. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 545). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 235). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the hands-free system. Active calls will first be transferred to the mobile phone directly. The battery may drain if the vehicle is left stationary for long periods. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recommends attaching the trickle charger to charge maintenance socket :. Charge maintenance socket : is designed solely for connecting a trickle charger. A trickle charger can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. X Switch the ignition off. X Open the boot lid. X Open the stowage well under the boot floor (Y page 548). X Remove the boot tub using the handle. X Connect the trickle charger to charge maintenance socket :. Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions on how to do so. The boot lid can be closed, even if a trickle charger is connected. Make sure that the connector for both the connector cables is outside of the vehicle. The connector can then separate if the vehicle is moved, even if you forget to disconnect the connector cables. This prevents damaging the cables and the trickle charger. i A trickle charger connected to charge maintenance socket only maintains the current charge level of the vehicle's electrical system battery. If the vehicle's electrical system battery is discharged, it needs to be charged with a battery charger. You Features Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available: Rat a qualified specialised workshop Rvia the HomeLink® Hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 or alternatively +49 (0) 6838 907-277 Ron the Internet at http://www.homelink.com Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 553). Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? of the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : begins to light up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow immediately the first time button ;, = or ? is programmed. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator Z Stowing and features will find further information on charging the battery on (Y page 582). 553 Stowing and features 554 Features lamp : lights up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 5 to 20 cm. X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronise the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts may be required. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Synchronising the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 553). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronise the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. Depending on the manufacturer, the location of the programming button may vary. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarise yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within range of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronisation is then complete. Problems when programming If you have problems when programming the integrated garage door opener, please note the following: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 5and 30 cm or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf there is another remote control for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been Features Frequencies Europe Country AD (Andorra) 20 July 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 AT (Austria) Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp first lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 BE (Belgium) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 BG (Bulgaria) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CH (Switzer- Article 6 of Directive land) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CY (Cyprus) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CZ (Czech Republic) General Licence GL-30/R/ 2000 Reg No. 844 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433 DK (Denmark) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 DE (Germany) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 7519301 29 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Z Stowing and features fitted in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. 555 Stowing and features 556 Features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) EE (Estonia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IC (Canary Islands) ES (Spain) 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3rd June 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IE (Ireland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15347 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15348 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15350 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15358 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15359 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FI (Finland) FR (France) GI (Gibraltar) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 (UK) MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 GR (Greece) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HR (Croatia) SDR 224/06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HU (Hungary) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LI (Liechten- Article 6 of Directive stein) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LT (Lithuania) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) LU (Luxembourg) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 150405/9538 24 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 RU (Russian Federation) POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 May 05 MHz: 433 LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MC (Monaco) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MT (Malta) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NL (Netherlands) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 RO (Romania) Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SK (Slovakia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 UK (United Kingdom) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Africa Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ZA (South Africa) 11 October 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433 Z 557 Stowing and features Features 558 Features Stowing and features America Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) BB (Barbados) Registration not required MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CL (Chile) 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 MHz: 40, 433 3943/DFRS05165/F-50 MHz: 280 to 433 GF (French Guyana) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 GP (Guadeloupe) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MQ (Martini- Article 6 of Directive que) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MX (Mexico) MHz: 280 to 390 Asia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AE (United Arab Emirates) 1623/5/10-2/26/76 MHz: 433 JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 KW (Kuwait) 5 October 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 SA (Saudi Arabia) 11_02_05/5024-5-6 MHz: 418, 433 Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 July 07 MHz: 433 Australia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AU (Australia) 28 June 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 NZ (New Zealand) 20 March 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433 Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Features Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. Stowing and features X 559 X Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. Z 560 561 Useful information ............................ 562 Engine compartment ........................ 562 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 566 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 568 562 Engine compartment Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Maintenance and care ist workshops: (Y page 34). Engine compartment Bonnet Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open while driving and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet while driving. G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle ! An active bonnet that had been triggered must be repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet function will then be available again. The additional pedestrian protection provided by the active bonnet will then be restored. The active bonnet is only available in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is raised at the rear in the area around the hinge by approximately 85 mm. The active bonnet is triggered by pyrotechnics. For the drive to the workshop, reset the triggered active bonnet yourself. If the active bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. Resetting G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. Engine compartment 563 There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X With your hand flat, push down active bonnet : in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows) until you feel it engage. If you can raise the active bonnet slightly in the area around the hinges, it is not engaged correctly. Repeat the step. Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the bonnet Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Z Maintenance and care X 564 Engine compartment Engine oil Notes on oil level Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Maintenance and care Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick tube. Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X X Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. Engine compartment When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. Have excess oil siphoned off. Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 564). X For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 626). Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING The engine cooling system is under pressure, particularly if the engine is warm. You could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when opening the cap. There is a danger of injury. Allow the engine to cool before opening the cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow pressure to escape. Example: engine oil filler cap X X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. Example Z Maintenance and care H Environmental note 565 ASSYST PLUS 566 Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 155). X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display. The coolant temperature must be below 70 †. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 155) in the ignition lock. X Slowly turn cap ; half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap ; further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank :. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank :. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Maintenance and care X For further information on coolant, see (Y page 627). Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the following components. G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Example To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X X The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to top up the washer fluid (Y page 272). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 628). ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ASSYST PLUS does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 564). The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: RService X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying a service message Switch the ignition on. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Rif Z Maintenance and care i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display 567 Maintenance and care 568 Care In these or similar operating conditions, have the air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Driving abroad Automatic car wash An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Care Notes on care H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! It is preferable to use car washes with adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that corresponds to the specification for the Cabriolet programme. In car washes that use high water pressures, there is a risk that a small amount of water may leak into the vehicle. ! Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if a key with KEYLESS-GO is within the detection range of the KEYLESS-GO antenna, the following situations could lead to the unintentional opening of the boot lid: Rusing a car wash a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 2 m away from the vehicle. Rusing ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N when washing your Care ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the roof are completely closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0 The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe wax off the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical ! Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: if a key with KEYLESS-GO is within the detection range of the KEYLESS-GO antenna, the following situations could lead to the unintentional opening of the boot lid: Rusing a car wash a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 2 m away from the vehicle. Rusing Z Maintenance and care vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Other transmission positions may lead to damage to the vehicle. 569 570 Care Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Maintenance and care Rmagnetic Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. Care from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the X windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres- sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Z Maintenance and care ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away 571 Care 572 Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- Maintenance and care lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X Cleaning Night View Assist Plus ! Never clean the camera lens. When cleanX Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. Cleaning the exhaust pipe ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by MercedesBenz. ing the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Care 573 Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Cleaning the windscreen on the inside in front of the camera lens: fold down the cover of camera ; using the recess. X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in front of camera ;. X Cleaning the thermal imaging camera in the radiator trim: thermal imaging camera : is cleaned at regular intervals when the windscreen washer system is operated. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean thermal imaging camera : when it is very dirty. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Z Maintenance and care Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever 574 Care Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: Maintenance and care RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). RClean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X 575 Useful information ............................ 576 Where will I find...? ........................... 576 Flat tyre ............................................. 578 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 582 Jump-starting .................................... 586 Towing and tow-starting .................. 588 Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses ................................. 592 576 Where will I find...? Useful information Setting up the warning triangle i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Breakdown assistance Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle Warning triangle : is located in a bracket on the inside of the boot lid. X Open the boot lid. X Press catch ; in the direction of the bracket and open the bracket in the direction of the arrow. X Pull the clip of warning triangle : in the centre of the bracket outward. X Remove warning triangle : from the bracket. X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using upper press-stud :. First-aid kit First-aid kit : is located in the boot under the boot floor. X Open the boot lid. X Open the boot separator (Y page 106). X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 548). X Remove first-aid kit :. i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Where will I find...? Fire extinguisher G WARNING When you brake heavily or change direction suddenly, the fire extinguisher can be thrown around the vehicle interior if the roller box is left open. There is a risk of accident and injury to you or the passenger. Keep the shutter of the roller box closed whilst the vehicle is in motion. 577 Check whether bracket = is properly engaged. X Close cover :. X i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled after each use and checked every one to two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. Vehicle tool kit The towing eye is located in the boot in a bracket below the boot lid lock. If the vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit, it is located in the stowage compartment under the floor of the boot. : ; = ? Cover Fire extinguisher Retainer Locking button Fire extinguisher ; is in the roller box behind the centre console, between the seats. X To remove the fire extinguisher: open cover :. X Slide locking button ? in the direction of the arrow. X Lift and swing out bracket = from the side on which locking button ? is located. X Take fire extinguisher ; out of the roller box. X To insert the fire extinguisher: insert fire extinguisher ; into the roller box. X Insert bracket = into the roller box on the side opposite locking button ?. X Then, insert bracket = completely. X Slide locking button ? in the opposite direction to the arrow. Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit : ; = ? Towing eye Tyre sealant filler bottle Fuse allocation chart Tyre inflation compressor Open the boot lid. Open the boot separator (Y page 106). X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 548). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 579). X X Z Breakdown assistance General notes Flat tyre 578 Tyre-change tool kit : Bag containing the tyre-changing tools Open the boot lid. Open the boot separator (Y page 106). X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 548). X Breakdown assistance X i Depending on the vehicle equipment, not all vehicles will have the tools that are required for changing a wheel, such as a jack. Tools approved for your vehicle are available at a qualified specialist workshop. Bag with tyre-changing tools : contains: Rjack Rwheel wrench pin Rwheel chock Rgloves Rcentring Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- acteristics) (Y page 578) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 579) Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (Y page 614) Information on changing/fitting a wheel (Y page 605). Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away from traffic as possible. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 155). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (Y page 576). Observe legal requirements. X MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. Flat tyre You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not Robserve the instructions in the display mes- G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Rspeed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you use only: Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle and Rtyre(s) marked "MOExtended" If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. Z Breakdown assistance sages (Y page 267). Rcheck the tyre for damage Rif driving on, observe the following notes The maximum driving distance is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: 579 580 Flat tyre G WARNING Using the TIREFIT kit In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. TIREFIT sticker, 2-part Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the boot floor (Y page 577). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X Flat tyre 581 If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Tyre pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: X X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter (Y page 550). Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 550). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: (Y page 581). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: (Y page 581). i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. Very slowly drive forwards or reverse, approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of five minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Z Breakdown assistance Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto the valve. X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Battery (vehicle) 582 H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved after ten minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X X Pull away immediately. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). Breakdown assistance X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (see the fuel filler flap for values). X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery may lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit. This, in turn, may restrict the functions of the safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may then be compromised. You could then lose control of the vehicle, e.g.: Rwhen braking making sudden steering movements and/or travelling at an inappropriate speed. There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or similar situation, inform a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rwhen Further information on ABS and ESP® (Y page 71) and (Y page 73). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing to friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth Rdue G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Z 583 Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) 584 Battery (vehicle) ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. Breakdown assistance ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. WARNING Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the battery Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient Battery (vehicle) ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. X X 585 Open the bonnet. Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 586). Breakdown assistance G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while still installed in the vehicle. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Z 586 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting 587 Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 155). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 155). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. RThe Z Breakdown assistance RThe Towing and tow-starting 588 Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. Press cover : of positive terminal ; down (in the direction of the arrow) and turn it clockwise. Cover : is held down in the lowered position, which exposes positive terminal ;. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X After removing the jump leads, press down cover : of positive terminal ; and turn it anticlockwise. Cover : returns to its original position. Positive terminal ; is covered up and thus insulated again. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or towstarted is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could over- turn. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road Towing and tow-starting ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N i Deactivate the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 242). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection before the vehicle is towed (Y page 80). Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot. There is a risk of burning when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use extreme caution when removing the rear cover. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi- cle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 622). Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. Z Breakdown assistance users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. 589 590 Towing and tow-starting Breakdown assistance Removing the towing eye Example: covers for towing eye mountings : Front cover ; Rear cover The mountings for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under the covers. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 577). X Front bumper: insert a finger into the recess on the bottom edge of cover :. X Pull cover : out of the bumper towards you in the direction of the arrow. Cover : is attached by a strap in the aperture. X Rear bumper: press the mark on cover ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover ; from the aperture. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. Example: covers for towing eye mountings : Front cover ; Rear cover Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Front bumper: position cover : on the opening in the bumper, as shown. X Twist cover : into the opening in the direction of the arrow. Cover : is now attached at the upper edge of the opening. X To close, press the lower section of cover :. X Rear bumper: position cover ; on bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 577). X X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 130). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 588). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 155). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 588). X G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 130). i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When the combination switch is reset, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transport purposes. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic transmission. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. Z 591 Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting Electrical fuses 592 i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 586). Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING Breakdown assistance If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Rdashboard fuse box Rfuse box in the rear compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the boot floor (Y page 577). Dashboard fuse box i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 592). ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Before replacing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 175). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 155). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 155). X To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the dashboard. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X Electrical fuses Fuse box in the engine compartment i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 592). G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the 593 To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert both openings = at the rear of cover : into the brackets on the fuse box. The brackets on the fuse box must be completely visible in the two openings = on the fuse box. X Fold down cover :. X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. X X Close the bonnet. fuse box when the cover is open. X Fuse box in the rear is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Open the bonnet. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the tion (Y page 592). fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: open clamps ;. X Fold cover : of the fuse box up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X The fuse box in the rear is located on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. To open: open the seat belt guide on the right-hand seat and remove the seat belt (Y page 115). X Move the right-hand seat as far forward as possible (Y page 115). X Insert your fingers at the bottom of front cover : between the cover and floor covering. X Z Breakdown assistance ! When closing the cover, make sure that it Electrical fuses 594 Remove front cover : towards the front by pulling it in the direction of the arrow. X Lift off top cover ; by pulling it in the direction of the arrow. Breakdown assistance X Fuses = are accessible through the two openings in the top of the fuse box. To close: insert the securing tags underneath top cover ; in the recesses at the top of the fuse box. X Fold down top cover ; until it engages audibly. X Insert the securing tags underneath top cover : in the recesses at the front of the fuse box. X Push front cover : towards the rear until it engages audibly. X Move the right-hand seat backwards (Y page 115). X Hook the seat belt into the seat belt guide on the right-hand seat (Y page 115). X 595 Useful information ............................ 596 Important safety notes .................... 596 Operation ........................................... 596 Winter operation ............................... 598 Tyre pressure .................................... 600 Changing a wheel ............................. 605 Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 610 Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel ................... 614 596 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found (Y page 610). Information on air pressure for the tyres on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 174) Rin the "Tyre pressure" section Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for Operation Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 600). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 614). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style pressure Rmileage Rtyre Regular checking of wheels and tyres Important safety notes on the tyre tread G WARNING G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures Rtears in the tyres Rbulges on tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 597). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Z Wheels and tyres damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 597 598 Winter operation Wheels and tyres tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These requirements can stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 578). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 614). MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. Only use MOExtended tyres in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitoring system and only on tyres specifically inspected by Mercedes‑Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 578). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 605). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both are marked with M+S. Winter operation X X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 600). Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 604). For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 614). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheeltyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 610). Ronly use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Ron vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC), you must drive at a raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 199). i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 74). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 614). Snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever Rfit fit snow chains on the front wheels snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. Z Wheels and tyres Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix a corresponding warning label in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also use permanent SPEEDTRONIC to restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 196). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: 599 600 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Rat least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Wheels and tyres Rwhen G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information label apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with an electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Tyre pressure Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed at which you are driving and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) Rcause i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 601). Important safety notes The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 600). The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou drive with a heavy load. Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. Rchanged Z Wheels and tyres The tyres are cold: 601 Tyre pressure 602 Wheels and tyres The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 600). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or If the Tyre pressure now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Example: current tyre pressure display For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 603). Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 600). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 604). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe Tyre pressure Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- sage appears in the multifunction display. Further information can be found on (Y page 267). If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 155) in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be shown in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically recognises new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, for a few minutes the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Z Wheels and tyres the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 600). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: 603 604 Tyre pressure Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning light comes on. Wheels and tyres RIf the Rectify tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly and the tyres must be checked. RIf the Warning tyre defect message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 267). i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 600). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be dis‐ played after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message. X Press the : button. The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X interchanged, for a short time the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions. After a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Brazil 1489-10-4415 Model: MRXMERCTX1 Dubai TRA, Registered-NO: 0016161/08 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Morocco MR5526 ANRT 2010/ 27/04/2010 MR6706 ANRT 2011/ 17/11/2011 Philippines ESD-1105558C Serbia И 011 12 Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard N0140-09 South Africa TA-2008/1068 TA-2011/1370 Changing a wheel Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 578). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 578). may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchanging front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel (Y page 606). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Direction of rotation Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Z Wheels and tyres Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor 605 Changing a wheel 606 Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Cleaning the wheels Wheels and tyres G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. Fitting a wheel If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X i Apart from certain country-specific variations, vehicles are not equipped with a tyrechange tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Necessary wheel-changing tools may include, for example: Rjack Rwheel Rwheel chock wrench Securing the vehicle against rolling away Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Unload the vehicle. The jack can only be used when the vehicle is unladen. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Move the front wheels to the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 155). X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 577). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Changing a wheel 607 The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suitable for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Never release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. a rubber mat. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the boot lid when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Z Wheels and tyres Rto Changing a wheel 608 Wheels and tyres X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ; upwards. X Position jack ? at jacking point =. Example X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits completely on jacking point = and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank A until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Removing a wheel ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repoCovers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equipment) AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers fitted next to the jacking points on the outer sills. sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel Changing a wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. 609 sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 605). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel (Y page 615). Only then lower the vehicle. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Z Wheels and tyres X Wheel and tyre combinations 610 Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the boot again. X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 600). Wheels and tyres X i If you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Do not restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor until the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure control system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. Wheel and tyre combinations 611 ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 600). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Wheels and tyres RFA: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 578). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted at the factory in all countries. Z Wheel and tyre combinations 612 Tyres SL 350 Summer tyres R17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/45 R17 98 Y1 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 R18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 95 Y1, 2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 35.5 FA: 255/40 R18 95 Y2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 35.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47.5 Wheels and tyres R19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL2, 3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 35.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 47.5 FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL2, 3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 35.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/45 R17 98 V M+S i1 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 R18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 35.5 Not in conjunction with Active Body Control (Code 487), Sports package (Code 950) or Edition 1 package (Code P88). 2 Available as MOExtended tyres. 3 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 1 Wheel and tyre combinations 613 SL 500 Summer tyres R18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 95 Y2 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 35.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 47.5 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL2, 3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 35.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 47.5 FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL2, 3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 35.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 35.5 AMG vehicles Summer tyres i AMG vehicles with 20-inch wheels on the rear axle: if replaced with 19-inch wheels, ETS may intervene noticeably earlier for the first few kilometres. After approximately 10 km ETS will function as usual again. Information on ETS can be found under "ETS (Electronic Traction System)" (Y page 73). R19/R20 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL4 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 27 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 48 FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL4 RA: 285/30 ZR20 (99 Y) XL3, 4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 27 RA: 10.0 J x 20 H2 ET 48 Available as MOExtended tyres. The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. 2 3 Z Wheels and tyres R19 Emergency spare wheel 614 Winter tyres R19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i4 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i4 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 27 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. Wheels and tyres RAdapt not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. 4 General notes You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 600). The applicable value is found on the wheel or under "Technical data" (Y page 617). An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. i If you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Do not restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor until the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor: for a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Observe notes on "Large wheels" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section. Emergency spare wheel Removing the emergency spare wheel 615 Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 606). Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation comOpen the boot. Open the boot separator (Y page 106). X Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with collapsible emergency spare wheel :. X X Mount the collapsible emergency spare wheel as described (Y page 606). The collapsible emergency spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter or into a 12 V of power socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter (Y page 550). Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 550). X Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel is packed in emergency spare wheel bag : and secured in the boot. X Open the boot. X Open the boot separator (Y page 106). X Loosen tensioning strap ; on both sides of emergency spare wheel bag :. X Unhook retaining spring hooks = of tensioning strap ; from the retainers. X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with the emergency spare wheel. X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and remove the emergency spare wheel. Z Wheels and tyres pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel Emergency spare wheel 616 Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 155). X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. Wheels and tyres X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the compressor housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle. X Emergency spare wheel 617 Technical data All models (except AMG vehicles) Collapsible emergency spare wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheels 175/55 - 18 95 P Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) 6.0 B x 18 H2 ET 25 AMG vehicles Tyres Light-alloy wheels 175/50 - 19 97 P Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 Wheels and tyres Collapsible emergency spare wheel Z 618 619 Useful information ............................ 620 Information on technical data ......... 620 Vehicle electronics ........................... 620 Identification plates ......................... 622 Service products and capacities ..... 622 Technical data Vehicle data ...................................... 629 620 Vehicle electronics Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 34). Information on technical data General notes You can find current technical data on the Internet on our Mercedes‑Benz homepage. Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in an improper way, its electromagnetic radiation can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if: Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial This can jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Robserve Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discus- Vehicle electronics Approved aerial positions : Rear wing i On the rear wing, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 30 W 4 m waveband 74 - 78 MHz 15 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 25 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 15 W GSM/DCS/PCS 850/900/1800/1900 10 W UMTS/LTE 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RMobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/ LTE) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband RGSM/DCS/PCS RUMTS/LTE R70 Z Technical data sion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (Y page 551). The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters: 621 Service products and capacities 622 Identification plates VIN Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Fold up floor covering : in front of the front-passenger seat. VIN ; can be seen. X X Open the right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 622). Technical data Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Example: vehicle identification plate : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain ? A B C D countries) VIN Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Service products and capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Service products and capacities Rfuels Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid control system refrigerant When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations. Components and service products must be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: Rclimate RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Tank capacity The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Model Total capacity AMG vehicles 75.0 l All other models 65.0 l or 75.0 l Model Of which reserve fuel AMG vehicles Approx. 14.0 l All other models Approx. 8.0 l or 9.0 l Z Technical data Service products include the following: 623 624 Service products and capacities Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea- ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification can contain up to 10 % ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear and damage the engine and exhaust system. Technical data ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RPetrol with additives containing metal RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by MercedesBenz; see "Additives". You can obtain fur- ther information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/ 82 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON/MON. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 173). AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. ! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. Service products and capacities i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. SL 350 ! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphurfree unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ 85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives in petrol ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were, in each case, based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with standards up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Z Technical data Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If only regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or lower is available, you must have the vehicle adapted to this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. 625 626 Service products and capacities Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Technical data General notes When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 622). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. In certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. All models available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: Rvehicles Engine oil Model i If the engine oils listed in the table are not MB Approval 229.5 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. with a petrol engine: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 Rdiesel engines: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 This may only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Model Replacement amount SL 350 6.5 l SL 500 8.0 l SL 63 AMG Without external oil cooler: 8.5 l With external oil cooler: 9.5 l SL 65 AMG V12 Without external oil cooler: 10.0 l With external oil cooler: 11.0 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Service products and capacities Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 622). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 622). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of Rantifreeze Z Technical data Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. 627 628 Service products and capacities the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 622). At temperatures above freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. X At temperatures below freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- X i The coolant is checked at every mainte- Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. led with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. Technical data the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data Vehicle data All models (except AMG vehicles) General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe 629 heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 622). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. Vehicle length 4612 mm Vehicle length when opening/closing the roof 4798 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2099 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1877 mm Wheelbase 2585 mm Maximum boot load 100 kg SL 350 Vehicle height 1314 mm Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 1695 mm Dimensions and weights Vehicle height 1315 mm Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 1696 mm SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG V12 Vehicle length 4633 mm Vehicle length when opening/closing the roof 4858 mm : Opening height Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2099 mm AMG vehicles 1931 mm 1945 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1877 mm All other models 1922 mm 1923 mm Vehicle height 1300 mm 1308 mm Vehicle height when opening/closing the roof 1688 mm 1713 mm Model Z Technical data SL 500 630 Vehicle data SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG V12 Wheelbase Technical data Maximum boot load 2585 mm 100 kg 631 632